GM Owner Manuals

Seats and Restraint Systems

........................... 1-1

Front Seats

............................................... 1-3

Rear Seats

............................................... 1-8

Safety Belts

............................................. 1-11

Child Restraints

....................................... 1-32

Airbag System

......................................... 1-61

Restraint System Check

............................ 1-75

Features and Controls

..................................... 2-1

Keys

........................................................ 2-2

Doors and Locks

....................................... 2-7

Windows

................................................. 2-12

Theft-Deterrent Systems

............................ 2-14

Starting and Operating Your Vehicle

........... 2-16

Mirrors

.................................................... 2-36

OnStar

System

...................................... 2-40

Storage Areas

......................................... 2-42

Instrument Panel

............................................. 3-1

Instrument Panel Overview

.......................... 3-4

Climate Controls

...................................... 3-19

Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators

........ 3-22

Driver Information Center (DIC)

.................. 3-37

Audio System(s)

....................................... 3-44

Driving Your Vehicle

....................................... 4-1

Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle

........ 4-2

Towing

................................................... 4-50

Service and Appearance Care

.......................... 5-1

Service

..................................................... 5-3

Fuel

......................................................... 5-5

Checking Things Under the Hood

............... 5-10

Rear Axle

............................................... 5-44

Four-Wheel Drive

..................................... 5-45

Front Axle

............................................... 5-46

Bulb Replacement

.................................... 5-47

Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement

......... 5-52

Tires

...................................................... 5-54

Appearance Care

..................................... 5-89

Vehicle Identiﬁcation

................................. 5-98

Electrical System

...................................... 5-98

Capacities and Speciﬁcations

................... 5-103

Maintenance Schedule

..................................... 6-1

Maintenance Schedule

................................ 6-2

Customer Assistance and Information

.............. 7-1

Customer Assistance and Information

........... 7-2

Reporting Safety Defects

........................... 7-10

Index

................................................................ 1

2005 GMC Canyon Owner Manual M

GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem, GMC, the

GMC Emblem, and the name CANYON are registered

trademarks of General Motors Corporation.

This manual includes the latest information at the time it

was printed. We reserve the right to make changes

after that time without further notice. For vehicles ﬁrst

sold in Canada, substitute the name “General Motors of

Canada Limited” for GMC whenever it appears in

this manual.

Keep this manual in the vehicle, so it will be there if it is

needed while you are on the road. If the vehicle is

sold, leave this manual in the vehicle.

Canadian Owners

A French language copy of this manual can be obtained

from your dealer or from:

Helm, Incorporated

P.O. Box 07130

Detroit, MI 48207

How to Use This Manual

Many people read the owner manual from beginning to

end when they ﬁrst receive their new vehicle. If this

is done, it can help you learn about the features

and controls for the vehicle. Pictures and words work

together in the owner manual to explain things.

Index

A good place to quickly locate information about the

vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual. It is an

alphabetical list of what is in the manual and the

page number where it can be found.

Litho in U.S.A.

Part No. 05CANYON A First Edition

Safety Warnings and Symbols

There are a number of safety cautions in this book.

We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell about

things that could hurt you if you were to ignore

the warning.

{CAUTION:

These mean there is something that could hurt

you or other people.

In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.

Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the

hazard. Please read these cautions. If you do not,

you or others could be hurt.

You will also ﬁnd a circle

with a slash through it in

this book. This safety

symbol means “Do Not,”

“Do Not do this” or “Do Not

let this happen.”

iii

Vehicle Damage Warnings

Also, in this manual you will ﬁnd these notices:

Notice: These mean there is something that could

damage your vehicle.

A notice tells about something that can damage the

vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be

covered by your vehicle’s warranty, and it could be

costly. But the notice will tell what to do to help avoid

the damage.

When you read other manuals, you might see CAUTION

and NOTICE warnings in different colors

or in different words.

There are also warning labels on the vehicle. They use

the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.

Vehicle Symbols

The vehicle has components and labels that use

symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along with

the text describing the operation or information

relating to a speciﬁc component, control, message,

gage, or indicator.

If you need help ﬁguring out a speciﬁc name of a

component, gage, or indicator, reference the

following topics:

• Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1

• Features and Controls in Section 2

• Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3

• Climate Controls in Section 3

• Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators in Section 3

• Audio System(s) in Section 3

• Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5

These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:

✍ NOTES

Front Seats ......................................................1-3

Manual Seats ................................................1-3

Power Seats ..................................................1-4

Manual Lumbar ..............................................1-5

Heated Seats .................................................1-5

Reclining Seatbacks ........................................1-6

Head Restraints .............................................1-7

Seatback Latches ...........................................1-8

Rear Seats .......................................................1-8

Rear Seat Operation (Crew Cab) ......................1-8

Rear Seat Operation (Extended Cab) ...............1-10

Safety Belts ...................................................1-11

Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ................1-11

Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......1-15

How to Wear Safety Belts Properly .................1-16

Driver Position ..............................................1-16

Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment .....................1-23

Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ..................1-24

Right Front Passenger Position .......................1-24

Center Front Passenger Position .....................1-25

Rear Seat Passengers ..................................1-26

Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for

Children and Small Adults ..........................1-29

Safety Belt Pretensioners ...............................1-31

Safety Belt Extender .....................................1-31

Child Restraints .............................................1-32

Older Children ..............................................1-32

Infants and Young Children ............................1-34

Child Restraint Systems .................................1-37

Where to Put the Restraint .............................1-40

Top Strap ....................................................1-42

Top Strap Anchor Location .............................1-43

Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for

Children (LATCH System) ...........................1-46

Securing a Child Restraint Designed for

the LATCH System (Crew Cab) ...................1-48

Securing a Child Restraint Designed for

the LATCH System (Extended Cab with

Rear Seats) ..............................................1-48

Securing a Child Restraint Designed for

the LATCH System (Regular/Extended

Cab - No Rear Seats) ..................................1-49

Securing a Child Restraint in a

Rear Seat Position ....................................1-52

Securing a Child Restraint in the

Center Front Seat Position ..........................1-54

Securing a Child Restraint in the

Right Front Seat Position

(Models without an Airbag Off Switch) ..........1-54

Securing a Child Restraint in the

Right Front Seat Position

(Models with an Airbag Off Switch) ..............1-57

Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems

1-1

Airbag System ...............................................1-61

Where Are the Airbags? ................................1-64

When Should an Airbag Inﬂate? .....................1-67

What Makes an Airbag Inﬂate? .......................1-68

How Does an Airbag Restrain? .......................1-68

What Will You See After an Airbag Inﬂates? .....1-69

Airbag Off Switch ..........................................1-71

Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...........1-74

Adding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .............................1-75

Restraint System Check ..................................1-75

Checking Your Restraint Systems ...................1-75

Replacing Restraint System Parts

After a Crash ............................................1-76

Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems

1-2

Front Seats

Manual Seats

This section tells you about the seats – how to adjust

them, and fold them up and down.

{CAUTION:

You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to

adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle

is moving. The sudden movement could startle

and confuse you, or make you push a pedal

when you do not want to. Adjust the driver’s

seat only when the vehicle is not moving.

Move the lever located under the front of a manual seat

up to unlock it. Slide the seat to where you want it

and release the lever. Try to move the seat with your

body to make sure the seat is locked into place.

1-3

Power Seats

If your vehicle has this feature, there will be a control on

the outboard side of the front seat(s).

Horizontal Control: Raise or lower the front of the seat

by raising or lowering the forward edge of the control.

Raise or lower the rear of the seat by raising or lowering

the rear edge of the control.

Move the seat forward or rearward by moving the whole

control toward the front or the rear of the vehicle.

Moving the whole control up or down raises or lowers

the whole seat.

Vertical Control: This control reclines the seatbacks.

See Reclining Seatbacks on page 1-6 for more

information.

1-4

Manual Lumbar

If your vehicle has this

feature, there will be a

knob located on the

outboard side of the

driver’s seat.

Turn the knob counterclockwise to increase lumbar

support and clockwise to decrease lumbar support.

Heated Seats

If your vehicle has this

feature, the controls are

located on the outboard

side of the front seats.

This feature will quickly heat the lower cushion and

lower back of the driver’s and front passenger’s seats

for added comfort.

Press the lower part of the switch to turn the heater on

at low heat. Press the upper part of the switch to

turn the heater on at high heat. Put the switch in the

center position to turn the heater off.

The ignition must be on for the heated seat feature to

work. The passenger’s safety belt must be engaged for

the heated seat feature to work on the passenger’s seat.

1-5

Reclining Seatbacks

Your vehicle may have reclining seatbacks.

To manually recline your seatback, lift the lever on the

outboard side of the seat.

Release the lever to lock the seatback where you want

it. Pull up on the lever and without pushing on the

seatback, the seat will go to an upright position.

If you have power seats, you can use the vertical power

seat control to recline the seatback. Move the reclining

front seatback forward or rearward by moving the control

toward the front or rear of the vehicle.

But don’t have a seatback reclined if your vehicle

is moving.

1-6

{CAUTION:

Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle

is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you

buckle up, your safety belts can not do their

job when you are reclined like this.

The shoulder belt can not do its job because it

will not be against your body. Instead, it will be

in front of you. In a crash you could go into it,

receiving neck or other injuries.

The lap belt can not do its job either. In a

crash the belt could go up over your abdomen.

The belt forces would be there, not at your

pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal

injuries.

For proper protection when the vehicle is in

motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit

well back in the seat and wear your safety

belt properly.

Head Restraints

If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable head

restraints, adjust your head restraint so that the top of

the restraint is closest to the top of your head. This

position reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash.

Push up on the head restraint to raise it. To lower

the head restraint, press the button located on top of

the seatback and push down on the head restraint.

1-7

Seatback Latches

Your vehicle may be equipped with front seatbacks that

fold forward to let people get into the rear seat or to

access the storage area behind the seat.

To fold the front seatback

forward, push the lever on

the side of the seat

rearward and pull the

seatback forward.

{CAUTION:

If the seatback is not locked, it could move

forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could

cause injury to the person sitting there. Always

press rearward on the seatback to be sure it

is locked.

To return the seatback to the upright position,

push the seatback all the way back until the latch

catches. If the seatback was reclined before being

folded forward, it will return to the reclined position.

Rear Seats

Rear Seat Operation (Crew Cab)

If your vehicle is a crew cab, the rear seatback can be

folded forward. Before you can fold the rear seatback,

you need to unlatch the center safety belt buckle.

Use the following steps to lower one or both of the

rear seatbacks:

1. Insert a tool with a small tip into the slot to unlatch

the center position safety belt buckle. Then move

the belt to the side so it is not in the way.

1-8

2. Grasp the loop located

on the side of the

seatback you want to

fold and pull until

you hear a click.

3. Fold the seatback down.

4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 to fold down the other

seatback.

{CAUTION:

If the seatback is not locked, it could move

forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could

cause injury to the person sitting there. Always

press rearward on the seatback to be sure it

is locked.

{CAUTION:

A safety belt that is improperly routed, not

properly attached, or twisted will not provide

the protection needed in a crash. The person

wearing the belt could be seriously injured.

After raising the rear seatback, always check

to be sure that the safety belts are properly

routed and attached, and are not twisted.

To return the seatback to the upright position,

do the following:

1. Lift the seatback up and push it back into place.

2. Reconnect the center safety belt latch plate to

the buckle.

3. Make sure the seatback is locked into place by

pushing and pulling on it.

4. Repeat Steps 1 and 3 for the other seatback.

When the seatback is not in use, it should be kept in

the upright, locked position.

1-9

Rear Seat Operation (Extended Cab)

If your vehicle has an

extended cab, there may

be a forward folding seat in

the rear area.

To fold the rear seat down, pull down on the bottom of

the seat until the seat is in place.

The rear seat storage compartments must be in the

rearward position before folding the seat down.

To store the seat, do the following:

1. To ensure that the safety belt buckle does not

move when not in use, secure it to the inboard

side of the seat by the hook and loop fastener (A).

2. Push the entire seat up until it is ﬂush with

the trim panel.

1-10

Safety Belts

Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone

This part of the manual tells you how to use safety

belts properly. It also tells you some things you should

not do with safety belts.

{CAUTION:

Do not let anyone ride where he or she can not

wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a

crash and you are not wearing a safety belt,

your injuries can be much worse. You can hit

things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it.

You can be seriously injured or killed. In the

same crash, you might not be, if you are

buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt,

and check that your passengers’ belts are

fastened properly too.

{CAUTION:

It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo

area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a

collision, people riding in these areas are more

likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not

allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle

that is not equipped with seats and safety

belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a

seat and using a safety belt properly.

Your vehicle has a light

that comes on as a

reminder to buckle up.

See Safety Belt Reminder

Light on page 3-24.

1-11

In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law

says to wear safety belts. Here is why: They work.

You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have

a crash, you do not know if it will be a bad one.

A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so

serious that even buckled up, a person would not

survive. But most crashes are in between. In many of

them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes

walk away. Without belts they could have been badly

hurt or killed.

After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles,

the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up

does matter...a lot!

Why Safety Belts Work

When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as

it goes.

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat

on wheels.

1-12

Put someone on it. Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider

does not stop.

1-13

The person keeps going until stopped by something.

In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...

or the instrument panel...

1-14

or the safety belts!

With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.

You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,

and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why

safety belts make such good sense.

Questions and Answers About

Safety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after an accident

if I am wearing a safety belt?

A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety

belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt,

even if you are upside down. And your chance of

being conscious during and after an accident,

so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if

you are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to

wear safety belts?

A: Airbags are in many vehicles today and will be in

most of them in the future. But they are

supplemental systems only; so they work with

safety belts — not instead of them. Every airbag

system ever offered for sale has required the use of

safety belts. Even if you are in a vehicle that has

airbags, you still have to buckle up to get the most

protection. That is true not only in frontal collisions,

but especially in side and other collisions.

1-15

Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from

home, why should I wear safety belts?

A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in an

accident — even one that is not your fault — you

and your passengers can be hurt. Being a good

driver does not protect you from things beyond your

control, such as bad drivers.

Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of

home. And the greatest number of serious injuries

and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph

(65 km/h).

Safety belts are for everyone.

How to Wear Safety Belts Properly

This part is only for people of adult size.

Be aware that there are special things to know about

safety belts and children. And there are different

rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be

riding in your vehicle, see Older Children on page 1-32

or Infants and Young Children on page 1-34. Follow

those rules for everyone’s protection.

First, you will want to know which restraint systems your

vehicle has.

We will start with the driver position.

Driver Position

Lap-Shoulder Belt

The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how to wear

it properly.

1. Close and lock the door.

2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight. To see

how, see “Seats” in the Index.

1-16

3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.

Do not let it get twisted.

The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt

across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt

go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt

across you more slowly.

4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.

Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.

If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt

Extender on page 1-31.

Make sure the release button on the buckle is

positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the

safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

5. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle

end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder belt.

1-17

The lap part of the belt should be worn low and

snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash,

this applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you

would be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid

under it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen.

This could cause serious or even fatal injuries.

The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and

across the chest. These parts of the body are best able

to take belt restraining forces.

The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash,

or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.

1-18

Q: What is wrong with this?

A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give nearly

as much protection this way.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt

is too loose. In a crash, you would move

forward too much, which could increase injury.

The shoulder belt should ﬁt against your body.

1-19

Q: What is wrong with this?

A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if your belt is

buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,

the belt would go up over your abdomen.

The belt forces would be there, not at the

pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal

injuries. Always buckle your belt into the

buckle nearest you.

1-20

Q: What is wrong with this?

A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should

be worn over the shoulder at all times.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if you wear the

shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your

body would move too far forward, which would

increase the chance of head and neck injury.

Also, the belt would apply too much force to

the ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder

bones. You could also severely injure internal

organs like your liver or spleen.

1-21

Q: What is wrong with this?

A: The belt is twisted across the body.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.

In a crash, you would not have the full width

of the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt

is twisted, make it straight so it can work

properly, or ask your dealer to ﬁx it.

1-22

To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.

The belt should go back out of the way.

Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the

way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage

both the belt and your vehicle.

Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment

Before you begin to drive, move the shoulder belt height

adjuster to the height that is right for you.

Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the

belt is centered on your shoulder. The belt should

be away from your face and neck, but not falling off

your shoulder.

To move it up or down,

squeeze the release

buttons (A) together and

move the height adjuster

to the desired position.

After you move the adjuster

to where you want it, try to

move it down without

squeezing the release

buttons to make sure it has

locked into position.

1-23

Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy

Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant

women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be

seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and

the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,

below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the

mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more

likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For

pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making

safety belts effective is wearing them properly.

Right Front Passenger Position

To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s safety

belt properly, see Driver Position on page 1-16.

The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same

way as the driver’s safety belt — except for one

thing. If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out

all the way, you will engage the child restraint locking

feature. If this happens, just let the belt go back all

the way and start again.

1-24

Center Front Passenger Position

Lap Belt

If your vehicle has a 60/40 split front seat, someone can

sit in the center position.

When you sit in the center front seating position, you

have a lap safety belt, which has no retractor. To make

the belt longer, tilt the latch plate and pull it along

the belt.

To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as shown

until the belt is snug.

Buckle, position and release it the same way as the

lap part of a lap-shoulder belt. If the belt is not

long enough, see Safety Belt Extender on page 1-31.

Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned

so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt

quickly if you ever had to.

1-25

Rear Seat Passengers

It is very important for rear seat passengers to buckle

up! Accident statistics show that unbelted people in

the rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those

who are wearing safety belts.

Rear passengers who are not safety belted can be

thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike

others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.

Lap-Shoulder Belt

All rear seating positions have lap-shoulder belts.

Here is how to wear one properly.

1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.

Do not let it get twisted.

The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt

across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt

go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt

across you more slowly.

1-26

2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.

Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.

When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way,

it will lock. If it does, let it go back all the way and

start again.

If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt

Extender on page 1-31.

Make sure the release button on the buckle is

positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the

safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle

end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part.

The lap part of the belt should be worn low and

snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash,

this applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you

would be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid

under it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen.

This could cause serious or even fatal injuries.

The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and

across the chest. These parts of the body are best able

to take belt restraining forces.

1-27

The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or

a crash.

The safety belt also locks if you pull the belt very

quickly out of the retractor.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt

is too loose. In a crash, you would move

forward too much, which could increase injury.

The shoulder belt should ﬁt against your body.

To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.

1-28

Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for

Children and Small Adults

Your vehicle may have rear safety belt comfort guides

for the rear outside positions.

Rear safety belt comfort guides provide added safety

belt comfort for older children who have outgrown

booster seats and for small adults. When attached to a

shoulder belt, the comfort guide better positions the

belt away from the neck and head.

Here is how to attach the comfort guide to the

shoulder belt.

1. Slide the guide off of its storage clip located

between the interior body and the seatback.

1-29

2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. The elastic

cord must be under the belt. Then, place the guide

over the belt and insert the two edges of the

belt into the slots of the guide.

3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies ﬂat.

The elastic cord must be under the belt and the

guide on top.

1-30

4. Buckle, position and release the safety belt as

described in Rear Seat Passengers on page 1-26.

Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the

shoulder.

To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze the

belt edges together so that you can take them out of the

guides. Slide the guide back on its storage clip located

between the interior body and the seatback.

Safety Belt Pretensioners

Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners. Although

you cannot see them, they are located on the retractor

part of the safety belts for the driver and right front

passenger. They help the safety belts reduce a person’s

forward movement in a moderate to severe frontal or

near frontal crash.

Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in a

crash, you will need to get new ones, and probably other

new parts for your safety belt system. See Replacing

Restraint System Parts After a Crash on page 1-76.

Safety Belt Extender

If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,

you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer will

order you an extender. It is free. When you go in to

order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so

the extender will be long enough for you. To help avoid

personal injury, do not let someone else use it, and

use it only for the seat it is made to ﬁt. The extender has

been designed for adults. Never use it for securing

child seats. To wear it, just attach it to the regular safety

belt. For more information, see the instruction sheet

that comes with the extender.

1-31

Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrown booster seats should

wear the vehicle’s safety belts.

If you have a choice, a child should sit in a seat that

has a lap-shoulder belt to get the additional restraint a

shoulder belt can provide.

Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?

A: If possible, an older child should wear a

lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a

shoulder belt can provide. The shoulder belt

should not cross the face or neck. The lap belt

should ﬁt snugly below the hips, just touching the

top of the thighs. It should never be worn over

the abdomen, which could cause severe or even

fatal internal injuries in a crash.

Accident statistics show that children are safer if they

are restrained in a rear seat.

In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike

other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown

out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety

belts properly.

1-32

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here two children are wearing the same belt.

The belt can not properly spread the impact

forces. In a crash, the two children can be

crushed together and seriously injured. A belt

must be used by only one person at a time.

Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,

but the child is so small that the shoulder belt

is very close to the child’s face or neck?

A: If the child is sitting in a rear outside seat position,

move the child toward the center of the vehicle.

See Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children

and Small Adults on page 1-29. If the child is

sitting in the center rear seat of a crew cab, move

the child toward the safety belt buckle. In either

case be sure that the shoulder belt still is on

the child’s shoulder, so that in a crash the

child’s upper body would have the restraint that

belts provide.

1-33

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a

lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is

behind the child. If the child wears the belt in

this way, in a crash the child might slide under

the belt. The belt’s force would then be applied

right on the child’s abdomen. That could cause

serious or fatal injuries.

Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt

should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching

the child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s

pelvic bones in a crash.

Infants and Young Children

Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes

infants and all other children. Neither the distance

traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes

the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,

the law in every state in the United States and in

every Canadian province says children up to some age

must be restrained while in a vehicle.

Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,

they should have the protection provided by appropriate

restraints. Young children should not use the vehicle’s

adult safety belts alone, unless there is no other choice.

Instead, they need to use a child restraint.

1-34

{CAUTION:

People should never hold a baby in their arms

while riding in a vehicle. A baby does not

weigh much — until a crash. During a crash a

baby will become so heavy it is not possible to

hold it. For example, in a crash at only 25 mph

(40 km/h), a 12-lb (5.5 kg) baby will suddenly

become a 240-lb (110 kg) force on a person’s

arms. A baby should be secured in an

appropriate restraint.

{CAUTION:

Children who are up against, or very close to,

any airbag when it inﬂates can be seriously

injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder

belts offer protection for adults and older

children, but not for young children and

infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system

nor its airbag system is designed for them.

Young children and infants need the protection

that a child restraint system can provide.

1-35

Q: What are the different types of add-on

child restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the

vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.

Selection of a particular restraint should take

into consideration not only the child’s weight, height

and age but also whether or not the restraint will

be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will

be used.

For most basic types of child restraints, there are

many different models available. When purchasing a

child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used

in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a

label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle

safety standards.

The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come

with the restraint state the weight and height

limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,

there are many kinds of restraints available for

children with special needs.

{CAUTION:

Newborn infants need complete support,

including support for the head and neck.

This is necessary because a newborn infant’s

neck is weak and its head weighs so much

compared with the rest of its body. In a crash,

an infant in a rear-facing seat settles into

the restraint, so the crash forces can be

distributed across the strongest part of an

infant’s body, the back and shoulders. Infants

always should be secured in appropriate infant

restraints.

1-36

{CAUTION:

The body structure of a young child is quite

unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom

the safety belts are designed. A young child’s

hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s

regular safety belt may not remain low on the

hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle

up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash,

the belt would apply force on a body area

that is unprotected by any bony structure.

This alone could cause serious or fatal

injuries. Young children always should be

secured in appropriate child restraints.

Child Restraint Systems

An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use in a

motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system designed

to restrain or position a child on a continuous ﬂat

surface. Make sure that the infant’s head rests toward

the center of the vehicle.

1-37

A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with

the seating surface against the back of the infant.

The harness system holds the infant in place and,

in a crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in

the restraint.

A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint for

the child’s body with the harness and also sometimes

with surfaces such as T-shaped or shelf-like shields.

1-38

A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed to

improve the ﬁt of the vehicle’s safety belt system.

Some booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner,

and some high-back booster seats have a ﬁve-point

harness. A booster seat can also help a child to see

out the window.

Q: How do child restraints work?

A: A child restraint system is any device designed for

use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or position

children. A built-in child restraint system is a

permanent part of the motor vehicle. An add-on

child restraint system is a portable one, which

is purchased by the vehicle’s owner.

For many years, add-on child restraints have used

the adult belt system in the vehicle. To help

reduce the chance of injury, the child also has to be

secured within the restraint. The vehicle’s belt

system secures the add-on child restraint in the

vehicle, and the add-on child restraint’s harness

system holds the child in place within the restraint.

One system, the three-point harness, has straps that

come down over each of the infant’s shoulders and

buckle together at the crotch. The ﬁve-point harness

system has two shoulder straps, two hip straps and a

crotch strap. A shield may take the place of hip

straps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps that

are attached to a ﬂat pad which rests low against the

child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield has

straps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like shield

that swings up or to the side.

1-39

When choosing a child restraint, be sure the child

restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. If it is, it will

have a label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle

safety standards.

Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You may

ﬁnd these instructions on the restraint itself or in a

booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system or

the LATCH system in your vehicle, but the child also

has to be secured within the restraint to help reduce the

chance of personal injury. When securing an add-on

child restraint, refer to the instructions that come with the

restraint which may be on the restraint itself or in a

booklet, or both, and to this manual. The child restraint

instructions are important, so if they are not available,

obtain a replacement copy from the manufacturer.

Where to Put the Restraint

Accident statistics show that children are safer if they

are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.

General Motors recommends that child restraints

be secured in a rear seat including an infant riding in a

rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in a forward-facing

child seat and an older child riding in a booster seat.

Never put a child in a rear-facing child restraint in

the right front passenger seat unless your vehicle has

an airbag off switch and the airbag off light shows off.

Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the right

front passenger seat unless the airbag is off.

Here is why:

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be

seriously injured or killed if the right front

passenger’s frontal airbag inﬂates. This is

because the back of the rear-facing child

restraint would be very close to the inﬂating

airbag. Be sure to turn off the airbag before

using a rear-facing child restraint in the right

front seat position.

CAUTION: (Continued)

1-40

CAUTION: (Continued)

Even though the airbag off switch is designed

to turn off the right front passenger’s frontal

airbag, no system is fail-safe, and no one can

guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under

some unusual circumstance, even though it is

turned off. We recommend that rear-facing

child restraints be transported in vehicles with

a rear seat that will accommodate a rear-facing

child restraint, whenever possible.

If you need to secure a forward-facing child

restraint in the right front seat, always move

the right front passenger seat as far back as it

will go. It is better to secure the child restraint

in a rear seat.

Do not use child restraints in the center front seat

position. The restraints will not work properly.

If you need to secure a rear-facing child restraint in

the right front passenger’s position, the right front

passenger’s frontal airbag must be off. See Securing a

Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position

(Models with an Airbag Off Switch) and Securing a

Child Restraint Designed for the LATCH System

(Regular/Extended Cab — No Rear Seats) in the Index,

and Airbag Off Switch on page 1-71 for more on this

including important safety information.

Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the child

restraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move

around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in

the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child restraint

in your vehicle — even when no child is in it.

1-41

Top Strap

Some child restraints have a top strap, or “top tether”.

It can help restrain the child restraint during a collision.

For it to work, a top strap must be properly anchored to

the vehicle. Some top strap-equipped child restraints are

designed for use with or without the top strap being

anchored. Others require the top strap always to be

anchored. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for

your child restraint. If yours requires that the top strap be

anchored, do not use the restraint unless it is anchored

properly.

If the child restraint does not have a top strap, one can

be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints.

Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit

is available.

In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child

restraints have a top strap, and that the strap be

anchored. In the United States, some child restraints

also have a top strap. If your child restraint has a

top strap, it should be anchored.

Anchor the top strap to one of the following anchor

points. Be sure to use an anchor point located on the

same side of the vehicle as the seating position

where the child restraint will be placed. If you have an

adjustable head restraint, route the top strap over it.

1-42

When using a top strap-equipped child restraint in a

rear outboard seating position of a crew cab model,

route the top strap over the top of the seatback. Then,

attach it to the anchor point for that seating position.

{CAUTION:

Each top tether bracket is designed to anchor

only one child restraint. Attaching more than

one child restraint to a single bracket could

cause the anchor to come loose or even break

during a crash. A child or others could be

injured if this happens. To help prevent injury

to people and damage to your vehicle, attach

only one child restraint per bracket.

Once you have the top strap anchored, you will be

ready to secure the child restraint itself. Tighten the top

strap when and as the child restraint manufacturer’s

instructions say.

Top Strap Anchor Location

{CAUTION:

Children who are up against, or very close to

any airbag when it inﬂates can be seriously

injured or killed. See Where to Put the

Restraint on page 1-40 or Airbag Off Switch on

page 1-71.

1-43

Crew Cab

A. Top Strap Anchorage

B. Seatback Latch

There are top strap anchors on the back wall behind

each rear seating position. You must pull the seatback

forward to access the top strap anchors (A). See Rear

Seat Operation (Crew Cab) in the Index.

1. Release the rear seatback from its latches (B).

See Rear Seat Operation (Crew Cab) in the

Index for instructions.

2. Attach the top strap to the anchor (A).

Make sure that you secure the top strap to the top

strap anchor (A) and not to the seatback latch (B).

3. Push rearward on the seatback until it locks into its

upright position.

Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is

secured properly.

Do not secure a child restraint with a top strap in the

right front passenger’s position if a national or local law

requires that the top strap be anchored, or if the

instructions that come with the child restraint say that

the top strap must be anchored. There is no place

to anchor the top strap in this position.

Crew Cab

1-44

Extended Cab with Rear Seats

A. Top strap routing loops

B. Top strap anchors

C. LATCH anchors (See Lower Anchorages and Top

Tethers for Children (LATCH System) on page 1-46.

There are two top strap anchorages on the center of the

back wall located behind a removable cover for the

rear seating positions. You must route the top strap

through the loop (A) at the top of the seatback to attach

the top strap to the one of the top strap anchors (B)

as shown.

Do not secure a child restraint with a top strap in the

right front passenger’s position if a national or local law

requires that the top strap be anchored, or if the

instructions that come with the child restraint say that

the top strap must be anchored. There is no place

to anchor the top strap in this position.

Regular and Extended Cabs without

Rear Seats

There is a top strap anchor located behind a removable

cover on the back wall behind the right front passenger

seat. You must pull the seatback forward to access

the top strap anchors. See Seatback Latches on

page 1-8.

Extended Cab with Rear Seats

1-45

Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers

for Children (LATCH System)

Your vehicle is equipped with the LATCH System.

For crew cabs, there are anchors for each outboard

seating position. You will ﬁnd the anchors where

the seatback meets the back of the seat cushion.

For extended cabs with rear seats, there are anchors

for each rear seating position. You will ﬁnd the anchors

attached to the back wall near the seat cushion.

For regular cabs and extended cabs without rear seats,

there are anchors for the right front passenger

position. You will ﬁnd the anchors where the seatback

meets the back of the seat cushion.

To assist you in locating the anchors, place your hand

in a palm-up position and reach up between the

seat cushion and the seatback.

This system, designed to make installation of child

restraints easier, does not use the vehicle’s safety belts.

Instead, it uses vehicle anchors and child restraint

attachments to secure the restraints. Some restraints

also use another vehicle anchor to secure a top

tether strap.

A. Lower Anchorage

B. Lower Anchorage

C. Top Tether

1-46

A. Lower Anchorage

B. Lower Anchorage

In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle,

you need a child restraint designed for that system.

{CAUTION:

If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached

to its anchorage points, the restraint will not

be able to protect the child correctly. In a

crash, the child could be seriously injured or

killed. Make sure that a LATCH-type child

restraint is properly installed using the

anchorage points, or use the vehicle’s safety

belts to secure the restraint, following the

instructions that came with that restraint,

and also the instructions in this manual.

1-47

Securing a Child Restraint Designed

for the LATCH System (Crew Cab)

1. Find the LATCH anchorages for the seating position

you want to use. See Lower Anchorages and Top

Tethers for Children (LATCH System) on page 1-46.

2. Put the child restraint on the seat.

3. If the child restraint is forward-facing and it has a

top tether, install the top tether according to the

instructions in Top Strap Anchor Location on

page 1-43 and also refer to your child restraint

instructions to learn about the proper use of your

top tether.

4. Attach the LATCH attachments on the child

restraint to the LATCH anchorages in the vehicle.

The child restraint instructions will show you how.

5. Tighten the LATCH attachments and the top tether.

The child restraint instructions will show you how.

6. Push and pull the child restraint in different

directions to be sure it is secure.

To remove the child restraint, disconnect the latch

attachments, pull the seatback forward and unhook the

top tether from the top tether anchorage. Be sure to

return the seatback to its fully upright position. See Rear

Seat Operation (Crew Cab) in the Index.

Securing a Child Restraint Designed

for the LATCH System

(Extended Cab with Rear Seats)

1. Find the LATCH anchorages for the seating position

you want to use. See Lower Anchorages and Top

Tethers for Children (LATCH System) on page 1-46.

2. Put the child restraint on the seat.

3. Attach the LATCH attachments on the child

restraint to the LATCH anchorages in the vehicle.

The child restraint instructions will show you how.

4. If the child restraint is forward-facing and it has a

top tether, install the top tether according to the

instructions in Top Strap Anchor Location on

page 1-43 and also refer to your child restraint

instructions to learn about the proper use of your top

tether.

5. Tighten the LATCH attachments and top tether.

The child restraint instructions will show you how.

6. Push and pull the child restraint in different

directions to be sure it is secure.

To remove the child restraint, disconnect the latch

attachments and unhook the top tether from the top

tether anchorage.

1-48

Securing a Child Restraint Designed

for the LATCH System (Regular/

Extended Cab - No Rear Seats)

Your vehicle has airbags. Regular cab models and

extended cab models without rear seats have an airbag

off switch on the instrument panel you can use to

turn off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag.

See Airbag Off Switch on page 1-71 for more on this

including important safety information.

United States

Canada

1-49

Unless the right front passenger’s frontal airbag has

been turned off, never put a rear-facing child restraint

in this vehicle. Here is why:

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be

seriously injured or killed if the right front

passenger’s frontal airbag inﬂates. This is

because the back of the rear-facing child

restraint would be very close to the inﬂating

airbag. Do not use a rear-facing child restraint

in this vehicle unless the airbag has been

turned off.

Even though the airbag off switch is designed

to turn off the right front passenger’s frontal

airbag, no system is fail-safe, and no one can

guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under

some unusual circumstance, even though it is

turned off. We recommend that rear-facing

child restraints be transported in vehicles with

a rear seat that will accommodate a rear-facing

child restraint, whenever possible.

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light ever comes on

when you have turned off the airbag, it means

that something may be wrong with the airbag

system. The right front passenger’s frontal

airbag could inﬂate even though the switch is

off. If this ever happens, do not let anyone

whom the national government has identiﬁed

as a member of a passenger airbag risk group

sit in the right front passenger’s position

(for example, do not secure a rear-facing child

restraint in your vehicle) until you have your

vehicle serviced. See Airbag Off Switch on

page 1-71.

1-50

1. Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s frontal

airbag. See Airbag Off Switch on page 1-71.

If your child restraint is forward-facing, always move

the seat as far back as it will go before securing

it in this seat. See Manual Seats on page 1-3

or Power Seats on page 1-4. Never use a

rear-facing child restraint in this seat unless the

airbag is off.

2. Find the LATCH anchorages in the passenger seat.

See Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for

Children (LATCH System) on page 1-46.

3. Put the child restraint on the seat.

4. Attach the LATCH attachments on the child

restraint to the LATCH anchorages in the vehicle.

The child restraint instructions will show you how.

5. If the child restraint is forward-facing, attach the

top tether to the top tether anchorage if your child

restraint has one. The child restraint instructions

will show you how. You must pull the seatback

forward to access the top tether anchorage.

See Seatback Latches on page 1-8 and Top Strap

Anchor Location on page 1-43.

6. Tighten the LATCH attachments and top tether.

The child restraint instructions will show you how.

7. Push and pull the child restraint in different

directions to be sure it is secure.

To remove the child restraint, loosen and disconnect the

LATCH attachments and loosen the top tether. Pull

the seatback forward, and unhook the top tether from

the top tether anchorage. Be sure to return the seatback

to its fully upright position. See Seatback Latches on

page 1-8.

Turn on the right front passenger’s frontal airbag when

you remove the child restraint from the vehicle unless

the person who will be sitting there is a member of

a passenger airbag risk group. See Airbag Off Switch

on page 1-71.

{CAUTION:

If the right front passenger’s frontal airbag is

turned off for a person who is not in a risk

group identiﬁed by the national government,

that person will not have the extra protection

of an airbag. In a crash, the airbag would not

be able to inﬂate and help protect the person

sitting there. Do not turn off the right front

passenger’s frontal airbag unless the person

sitting there is in a risk group. See Airbag Off

Switch on page 1-71 for more on this,

including important safety information.

1-51

Securing a Child Restraint in a

Rear Seat Position

If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH

system, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for

Children (LATCH System) on page 1-46. See Top Strap

on page 1-42 if the child restraint has one.

If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,

you will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the

child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the

instructions that came with the child restraint.

Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the

instructions say.

1. Put the child restraint on the seat.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder

portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or

around the restraint. The child restraint instructions

will show you how.

3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is

positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the

safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

1-52

4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of

the retractor to set the lock (crew cab only).

5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,

pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the

lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder

belt back into the retractor. If you are using a

forward-facing child restraint, you may ﬁnd it helpful

to use your knee to push down on the child

restraint as you tighten the belt.

6. Push and pull the child restraint in different

directions to be sure it is secure.

To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s

safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety

belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an

adult or larger child passenger.

1-53

Securing a Child Restraint in the

Center Front Seat Position

Do not use child restraints in this position. The restraints

will not work properly.

Securing a Child Restraint in the

Right Front Seat Position (Models

without an Airbag Off Switch)

Crew Cab Models and Extended Cab

Models with Rear Seats

If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH

system, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for

Children (LATCH System) on page 1-46. See Top Strap

on page 1-42 if the child restraint has one.

There is no top strap anchor in the right front

passenger’s position. Do not secure a child seat in this

position if a national or local law requires that the

top strap be anchored, or if the instructions that come

with the child restraint say that the top strap must

be anchored. See Top Strap on page 1-42 if the child

restraint has one.

Your vehicle has a right front passenger airbag.

Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the right front

passenger’s seat. Here is why:

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be

seriously injured or killed if the right front

passenger’s airbag inﬂates. This is because

the back of the rear-facing child restraint

would be very close to the inﬂating airbag.

Always secure a rear-facing child restraint in a

rear seat.

A rear seat is a safer place to secure a forward-facing

child restraint. If you need to secure a forward-facing

child restraint in the right front seat position, see Where

to Put the Restraint on page 1-40.

1-54

If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,

you will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the

child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the

instructions that came with the child restraint.

Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the

instructions say.

1. Because your vehicle has a right front passenger’s

frontal airbag, always move the seat as far back as

it will go before securing a forward-facing child

restraint. See Manual Seats on page 1-3 or Power

Seats on page 1-4.

2. Put the child restraint on the seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder

portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or

around the restraint. The child restraint instructions

will show you how.

4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is

positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the

safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

1-55

5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of

the retractor to set the lock.

6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,

pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the

lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder

belt back into the retractor. If you are using a

forward-facing child restraint, you may ﬁnd it helpful

to use your knee to push down on the child

restraint as you tighten the belt.

7. Push and pull the child restraint in different

directions to be sure it is secure.

To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s

safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety

belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an

adult or larger child passenger.

1-56

Securing a Child Restraint in the

Right Front Seat Position

(Models with an Airbag Off Switch)

Regular Cab Models and Extended

Cab Models without Rear Seats

Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s frontal airbag.

Regular cab models and extended cab models without

rear seats have a switch on the instrument panel

that you can use to turn off the right front passenger’s

frontal airbag. See Airbag Off Switch on page 1-71

for more on this, including important safety information.

United States

Canada

1-57

Unless the right front passenger’s frontal airbag has

been turned off, never put a rear facing child restraint in

the right front passenger’s seat. Here is why:

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be

seriously injured or killed if the right front

passenger’s frontal airbag inﬂates. This is

because the back of the rear-facing child

restraint would be very close to the inﬂating

airbag. Do not use a rear-facing child restraint

in this vehicle unless the airbag has been

turned off.

Even though the airbag off switch is designed

to turn off the right front passenger’s frontal

airbag, no system is fail-safe, and no one can

guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under

some unusual circumstance, even though it is

turned off. We recommend that rear-facing

child restraints be transported in vehicles with

a rear seat that will accommodate a rear-facing

child restraint, whenever possible.

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light ever comes on

when you have turned off the airbag, it means

that something may be wrong with the airbag

system. The right front passenger’s frontal

airbag could inﬂate even though the switch is

off. If this ever happens, do not let anyone

whom the national government has identiﬁed

as a member of a passenger airbag risk group

sit in the right front passenger’s position

(for example, do not secure a rear-facing child

restraint in your vehicle) until you have your

vehicle serviced. See Airbag Off Switch on

page 1-71.

If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH

system, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for

Children (LATCH System) on page 1-46. See Top Strap

on page 1-42 if the child restraint has one.

1-58

If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,

you will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the

child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the

instructions that came with the child restraint.

Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the

instructions say.

1. Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s frontal

airbag. See Airbag Off Switch on page 1-71.If

your child restraint is forward-facing, always move

the seat as far back as it will go before securing

it in this seat. See Manual Seats on page 1-3

or Power Seats on page 1-4.

2. Put the child restraint on the seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder

portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or

around the restraint. The child restraint instructions

will show you how.

4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is

positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the

safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

1-59

5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of

the retractor to set the lock.

6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,

pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the

lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder

belt back into the retractor. If you are using a

forward-facing child restraint, you may ﬁnd it helpful

to use your knee to push down on the child

restraint as you tighten the belt.

7. Push and pull the child restraint in different

directions to be sure it is secure.

To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s

safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety

belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an

adult or larger child passenger.

1-60

If you were using a rear-facing child restraint, turn on

the right front passenger’s frontal airbag when you

remove the rear-facing child restraint from the vehicle

unless the person who will be sitting there is a member

of a passenger airbag risk group. See Airbag Off

Switch on page 1-71.

{CAUTION:

If the right front passenger’s frontal airbag is

turned off for a person who is not in a risk

group identiﬁed by the national government,

that person will not have the extra protection

of an airbag. In a crash, the airbag would not

be able to inﬂate and help protect the person

sitting there. Do not turn off the right front

passenger’s frontal airbag unless the person

sitting there is in a risk group. See Airbag Off

Switch on page 1-71 for more on this,

including important safety information.

Airbag System

Your vehicle has airbags — a frontal airbag for the

driver and a frontal airbag for the right front passenger.

Your vehicle may also have a roof-mounted side

impact airbag for the driver and the passenger directly

behind the driver and a roof-mounted side impact airbag

for the right front passenger and the person seated

directly behind that passenger.

Airbags are designed to help reduce the risk of injury

from the force of an inﬂating airbag. But these airbags

must inﬂate very quickly to do their job and comply with

federal regulations.

1-61

Here are the most important things to know about the

airbag system:

{CAUTION:

You can be severely injured or killed in a crash

if you are not wearing your safety belt — even

if you have airbags. Wearing your safety belt

during a crash helps reduce your chance of

hitting things inside the vehicle or being

ejected from it. Airbags are “supplemental

restraints” to the safety belts. All airbags are

designed to work with safety belts but do not

replace them.

CAUTION: (Continued)

Frontal airbags for the driver and right front

passenger are designed to deploy only in

moderate to severe frontal and near frontal

crashes. They are not designed to inﬂate in

rollover, rear or low-speed frontal crashes,

or in many side crashes. And, for some

unrestrained occupants, frontal airbags may

provide less protection in frontal crashes than

more forceful airbags have provided in the

past. The roof-mounted side impact airbags

are designed to inﬂate only in moderate to

severe crashes where something hits the side

of your vehicle. They are not designed to

inﬂate in frontal, in rollover or in rear crashes.

Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety

belt properly — whether or not there is an

airbag for that person.

1-62

{CAUTION:

Both frontal and side impact airbags inﬂate

with great force, faster than the blink of an

eye. If you are too close to an inﬂating airbag,

as you would be if you were leaning forward,

it could seriously injure you. Safety belts help

keep you in position for airbag inﬂation before

and during a crash. Always wear your safety

belt even with frontal airbags. The driver

should sit as far back as possible while still

maintaining control of the vehicle. Occupants

should not lean on or sleep against the door.

{CAUTION:

Anyone who is up against, or very close to,

any airbag when it inﬂates can be seriously

injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder

belts offer the best protection for adults, but

not for young children and infants. Neither the

vehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbag

system is designed for them. Young children

and infants need the protection that a child

restraint system can provide. Always secure

children properly in your vehicle. To read how,

see Older Children on page 1-32 or Infants and

Young Children on page 1-34.

1-63

There is an airbag

readiness light on the

instrument panel which

shows the airbag symbol.

The system checks the airbag electrical system for

malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical

problem. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-25

for more information.

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver’s airbag is in the middle of the steering wheel.

1-64

The right front passenger’s airbag is in the instrument

panel on the passenger’s side.

If your vehicle has a roof-mounted side impact airbag

for the driver and the person seated directly behind the

driver, it is located in the ceiling above the side windows.

1-65

If your vehicle has a roof-mounted side impact airbag

for the right front passenger and the person seated

directly behind that passenger, it is located in the ceiling

above the side windows.

{CAUTION:

If something is between an occupant and an

airbag, the bag might not inﬂate properly or it

might force the object into that person causing

severe injury or even death. The path of an

inﬂating airbag must be kept clear. Do not put

anything between an occupant and an airbag,

and do not attach or put anything on the

steering wheel hub or on or near any other

airbag covering. If your vehicle has side

impact airbags, never secure anything to the

roof of your vehicle by routing the rope or

tiedown through any door or window opening.

If you do, the path of an inﬂating side impact

airbag will be blocked. The path of an inﬂating

airbag must be kept clear.

1-66

When Should an Airbag Inﬂate?

The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal airbags

are designed to inﬂate in moderate to severe frontal

or near-frontal crashes. But they are designed to inﬂate

only if the impact exceeds a predetermined deployment

threshold. Deployment thresholds take into account

a variety of desired deployment and non-deployment

events and are used to predict how severe a crash

is likely to be in time for the airbags to inﬂate and help

restrain the occupants. Whether your frontal airbags

will or should deploy is not based on how fast your

vehicle is traveling. It depends largely on what you hit,

the direction of the impact and how quickly your

vehicle slows down.

In addition, your vehicle has “dual stage” frontal airbags,

which adjust the restraint according to crash severity.

Your vehicle is equipped with electronic frontal sensors

which help the sensing system distinguish between a

moderate and a more severe frontal impact.

For moderate frontal impacts, these airbags inﬂate at a

level less than full deployment. For more severe

frontal impacts, full deployment occurs. If the front of

your vehicle goes straight into a wall that doesn’t move

or deform, the threshold level for the reduced

deployment is about 12 to 16 mph (19.3 to 26 km/h),

and the threshold level for a full deployment is about

20 to 24 mph (32.2 to 38.5 km/h). (The threshold

level can vary, however, with speciﬁc vehicle design, so

that it can be somewhat above or below this range.)

Airbags may inﬂate at different crash speeds.

For example:

• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbag

could inﬂate at a different crash speed than if

the object were moving.

• If the object deforms, the airbag could inﬂate at a

different crash speed than if the object does not

deform.

• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole) the

airbag could inﬂate at a different crash speed

than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).

• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle the

airbag could inﬂate at a different crash speed

than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.

The frontal airbags (driver and right front passenger) are

not intended to inﬂate during vehicle rollovers, rear

impacts, or in many side impacts because inﬂation

would not likely help the occupants.

1-67

If your vehicle has side impact airbags, it has electronic

side sensors. The side impact airbags are designed

to inﬂate in moderate to severe side crashes. A side

impact airbag will inﬂate if the crash severity is above

the system’s designed “threshold level”. The threshold

level can vary with speciﬁc vehicle design. Side impact

airbags are not designed to inﬂate in frontal or

near-frontal impacts, rollovers or rear impacts, because

inﬂation would not likely help the occupant. A side

impact airbag will only deploy on the side of the vehicle

that is struck.

Your vehicle has seat position sensors which enable the

sensing system to monitor the position of the driver’s

seat and the right front passenger’s seat. Seat position

sensors provide information that is used to determine

if the airbags should deploy at a reduced level or

at full deployment.

In any particular crash, no one can say whether an

airbag should have inﬂated simply because of the

damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs

were. For frontal airbags, inﬂation is determined by

the angle of the impact and how quickly the vehicle

slows down in frontal or near-frontal impacts. For side

impact airbags, inﬂation is determined by the location

and severity of the impact.

What Makes an Airbag Inﬂate?

In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbag sensing

system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. For both

frontal and side impact airbags, the sensing system

triggers a release of gas from the inﬂator, which inﬂates

the airbag. The inﬂator, airbag, and related hardware

are all part of the airbag modules inside the steering

wheel and in the instrument panel in front of the

right front passenger. For vehicles with side impact

airbags, the airbag modules are located in the ceiling of

the vehicle, near the side windows.

How Does an Airbag Restrain?

In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,

even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or

the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side

collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside

of the vehicle. The airbag supplements the protection

provided by safety belts. Airbags distribute the force of

the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper

body, stopping the occupant more gradually. But the

frontal airbags would not help you in many types

of collisions, including rollovers, rear impacts, and many

side impacts, primarily because an occupant’s motion

is not toward the airbag. Side impact airbags would not

help you in many types of collisions, including frontal

1-68

or near frontal collisions, rollovers, and rear impacts,

primarily because an occupant’s motion is not toward

those airbags. Airbags should never be regarded

as anything more than a supplement to safety belts, and

then only in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal

collisions for the driver’s and right front passenger’s

frontal airbags, and only in moderate to severe

side collisions for side impact airbags.

What Will You See After an

Airbag Inﬂates?

After an airbag inﬂates, it quickly deﬂates, so quickly that

some people may not even realize the airbag inﬂated.

Some components of the airbag module — the steering

wheel hub for the driver’s airbag, the instrument panel for

the right front passenger’s bag or the ceiling of your

vehicle near the side windows — will be hot for a short

time. The parts of the bag that come into contact

with you may be warm, but not too hot to touch.

There will be some smoke and dust coming from the

vents in the deﬂated airbags. Airbag inﬂation does not

prevent the driver from seeing or being able to steer the

vehicle, nor does it stop people from leaving the vehicle.

{CAUTION:

When an airbag inﬂates, there is dust in the

air. This dust could cause breathing problems

for people with a history of asthma or other

breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in

the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe

to do so. If you have breathing problems but

can not get out of the vehicle after an airbag

inﬂates, then get fresh air by opening a

window or a door. If you experience breathing

problems following an airbag deployment,

you should seek medical attention.

1-69

Your vehicle may have a feature that will automatically

unlock the doors, turn the interior lamps on and ﬂash

the hazard warning ﬂashers when the airbag inﬂates

(if battery power is available). You can lock the doors

again by using the door lock. The interior lamps

and hazard warning ﬂashers will deactivate after

approximately 15 minutes.

In many crashes severe enough to inﬂate an airbag,

windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.

Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the

right front passenger airbag.

• Airbags are designed to inﬂate only once. After an

airbag inﬂates, you will need some new parts for

your airbag system. If you do not get them,

the airbag system will not be there to help protect

you in another crash. A new system will include

airbag modules and possibly other parts. The

service manual for your vehicle covers the need to

replace other parts.

• Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and

diagnostic module which records information after

a crash. See Vehicle Data Collection and Event

Data Recorders on page 7-9.

• Let only qualiﬁed technicians work on your airbag

system. Improper service can mean that your

airbag system will not work properly. See your

dealer for service.

Notice: If you damage the covering for the driver’s

or the right front passenger’s airbag, or the side

impact airbag covering on the ceiling near the

side windows, the airbag may not work properly.

You may have to replace the airbag module in

the steering wheel, both the airbag module and the

instrument panel for the right front passenger’s

airbag, or side impact airbag module and ceiling

covering for the roof-mounted side impact airbag.

Do not open or break the airbag coverings.

1-70

Airbag Off Switch

Regular Cab Models and Extended Cab

Models without Rear Seats

If your vehicle is a regular cab model or an extended

cab model without rear seats, it has a switch on

the instrument panel that you can use to turn off the

right front passenger’s frontal airbag.

This switch should only be turned to the off position if

the person in the right front passenger’s position is

a member of a passenger risk group identiﬁed by the

national government as follows:

Infant. An infant (less than 1 year old)

must ride in the front seat because:

•

my vehicle has no rear seat;

• my vehicle has a rear seat too small to

accommodate a rear-facing infant seat; or

• the infant has a medical condition which, according

to the infant’s physician, makes it necessary for the

infant to ride in the front seat so that the driver

can constantly monitor the child’s condition.

United States

Canada

1-71

Child age 1 to 12. A child age 1 to 12 must

ride in the front seat because:

•

my vehicle has no rear seat;

• although children ages 1 to 12 ride in the rear

seat(s) whenever possible, children ages 1 to

12 sometimes must ride in the front because no

space is available in the rear seat(s) of my vehicle;

• the child has a medical condition which, according

to the child’s physician, makes it necessary for the

child to ride in the front seat so that the driver

can constantly monitor the child’s condition.

Medical Condition. A passenger has a

medical condition which, according to his

or her physician:

•

causes the passenger airbag to pose a special risk

for the passenger; and

• makes the potential harm from the passenger

airbag in a crash greater than the potential

harm from turning off the airbag and allowing the

passenger, even if belted, to hit the dashboard

or windshield in a crash.

{CAUTION:

If the right front passenger’s frontal airbag is

turned off for a person who is not in a risk

group identiﬁed by the national government,

that person will not have the extra protection

of an airbag. In a crash, the airbag would not

be able to inﬂate and help protect the person

sitting there. Do not turn off the passenger’s

frontal airbag unless the person sitting there is

in a risk group.

1-72

To turn off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag,

insert your ignition key into the switch, push in,

and move the switch to the off position.

The airbag off light will come on to let you know that the

right front passenger’s frontal airbag is off. The light

will stay on to remind you that the airbag is off. The right

front passenger’s frontal airbag will remain off until you

turn it back on.

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light ever comes on

when you have turned off the airbag, it means

that something may be wrong with the airbag

system. The right front passenger’s frontal

airbag could inﬂate even though the switch is

off. If this ever happens, do not let anyone

whom the national government has identiﬁed

as a member of a passenger airbag risk group

sit in the right front passenger’s position

(for example, do not secure a rear-facing child

restraint in the right front passenger’s seat)

until you have your vehicle serviced.

United States

Canada

1-73

To turn on the right front passenger’s frontal airbag,

insert your ignition key into the switch, push in,

and move the switch to the on position.

Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped

Vehicle

Airbags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.

There are parts of the airbag system in several places

around your vehicle. Your dealer and the service manual

have information about servicing your vehicle and the

airbag system. To purchase a service manual, see

Service Publications Ordering Information on page 7-11.

{CAUTION:

For up to 10 seconds after the ignition key is

turned off and the battery is disconnected, an

airbag can still inﬂate during improper service.

You can be injured if you are close to an airbag

when it inﬂates. Avoid wires wrapped with

yellow tape or yellow connectors. They are

probably part of the airbag system. Be sure to

follow proper service procedures, and make

sure the person performing work for you is

qualiﬁed to do so.

The airbag system does not need regular maintenance.

United States

Canada

1-74

Adding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle

Q: Is there anything I might add to the front of

the vehicle that could keep the airbags from

working properly?

A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s

frame, bumper system, front end sheet metal or

height, they may keep the airbag system from

working properly. Also, the airbag system may not

work properly if you relocate any of the airbag

sensors. If you have any questions about this, you

should contact Customer Assistance before you

modify your vehicle. The phone numbers and

addresses for Customer Assistance are in

Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure

on page 7-2.

Restraint System Check

Checking Your Restraint Systems

Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light

and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors

and anchorages are working properly. Look for any other

loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see

anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing

its job, have it repaired.

Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a

crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt

is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.

Also look for any opened or broken airbag covers, and

have them repaired or replaced. (The airbag system

does not need regular maintenance.)

1-75

Replacing Restraint System Parts

After a Crash

{CAUTION:

A crash can damage the restraint systems in

your vehicle. A damaged restraint system

may not properly protect the person using it,

resulting in serious injury or even death in a

crash. To help make sure your restraint

systems are working properly after a crash,

have them inspected and any necessary

replacements made as soon as possible.

If you have had a crash, do you need new belts or

LATCH system parts?

After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.

But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if

worn during a more severe crash, then you need

new parts.

If the LATCH system was being used during a more

severe crash, you may need new LATCH system parts.

If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision

damage also may mean you will need to have LATCH

system, safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced.

New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt

or LATCH system was not being used at the time of

the collision.

If an airbag inﬂates, you will need to replace airbag

system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier

in this section.

If the frontal airbags inﬂate, you will also need to

replace the driver’s and right front passenger’s safety

belt retractor assembly. Be sure to do so. Then the new

retractor assembly will be there to help protect you in

a collision.

After a crash you may need to replace the driver and

front passenger’s safety belt retractor assemblies, even

if the frontal airbags have not deployed. The driver

and front passenger’s safety belt retractor assemblies

contain the safety belt pretensioners. Have your

safety belt pretensioners checked if your vehicle has

been in a collision, or if your airbag readiness light stays

on after you start your vehicle or while you are driving.

See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-25.

1-76

Keys ...............................................................2-2

Remote Keyless Entry System .........................2-4

Remote Keyless Entry System Operation ...........2-5

Doors and Locks .............................................2-7

Door Locks ....................................................2-7

Power Door Locks ..........................................2-8

Programmable Automatic Door Locks ................2-8

Rear Door Security Locks (Crew Cab) ...............2-9

Lockout Protection ........................................2-10

Rear Doors (Extended Cab) ...........................2-10

Tailgate .......................................................2-10

Windows ........................................................2-12

Manual Windows ..........................................2-12

Power Windows ............................................2-13

Sliding Rear Window .....................................2-14

Sun Visors ...................................................2-14

Theft-Deterrent Systems ..................................2-14

Content Theft-Deterrent .................................2-14

Passlock

....................................................2-16

Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ................2-16

New Vehicle Break-In ....................................2-16

Ignition Positions ..........................................2-17

Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................2-18

Starting Your Engine .....................................2-18

Engine Coolant Heater ..................................2-20

Automatic Transmission Operation ...................2-21

Manual Transmission Operation ......................2-24

Four-Wheel Drive ..........................................2-26

Parking Brake ..............................................2-29

Shifting Into Park (P)

(Automatic Transmission) ............................2-30

Shifting Out of Park (P)

(Automatic Transmission) ............................2-32

Parking Your Vehicle (Manual Transmission) .....2-33

Parking Over Things That Burn .......................2-33

Engine Exhaust ............................................2-34

Running Your Engine While You Are Parked

(Automatic Transmission) ............................2-34

Mirrors ...........................................................2-36

Manual Rearview Mirror .................................2-36

Manual Rearview Mirror with OnStar

..............2-36

Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with

Compass and Temperature Display ..............2-37

Outside Manual Mirrors ..................................2-39

Outside Power Mirrors ...................................2-39

Outside Convex Mirror ...................................2-40

OnStar

System .............................................2-40

Storage Areas ................................................2-42

Glove Box ...................................................2-42

Cupholder(s) ................................................2-42

Front Armrest Storage Area ...........................2-42

Assist Handles .............................................2-43

Rear Storage Area ........................................2-43

Section 2 Features and Controls

2-1

Keys

{CAUTION:

Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition

key is dangerous for many reasons. They could

operate the power windows or other controls or

even make the vehicle move. The children or

others could be badly injured or even killed.

Do not leave the keys in a vehicle with children.

2-2

There is one double-sided

key for the ignition, driver’s

door lock, and tailgate.

When a new vehicle is delivered, the dealer provides

the owner with a pair of identical keys and a key

code number.

The key code number tells your dealer or a qualiﬁed

locksmith how to make extra keys. Keep this number in

a safe place. If you lose your keys, you will be able

to have new ones made easily using this number.

Your dealer should also have this number.

Notice: If you ever lock your keys in your vehicle,

you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.

Be sure you have spare keys.

If you ever do get locked out of your vehicle call the

GM Roadside Assistance Center. See Roadside

Assistance Program on page 7-6.

If your vehicle is equipped with the OnStar system with

an active subscription and you lock your keys inside

the vehicle, OnStar may be able to send a command to

unlock your vehicle. See OnStar

System on page 2-40

for more information.

2-3

Remote Keyless Entry System

If equipped, the keyless entry system operates on a

radio frequency subject to Federal Communications

Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference.

2. This device must accept any interference received,

including interference that may cause undesired

operation of the device.

This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference.

2. This device must accept any interference received,

including interference that may cause undesired

operation of the device.

Changes or modiﬁcations to this system by other than

an authorized service facility could void authorization to

use this equipment.

At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is

normal for any remote keyless entry system. If the

transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer

to your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:

• Check the distance. You may be too far from your

vehicle. You may need to stand closer during

rainy or snowy weather.

• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may

be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the

left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and

try again.

• Check to determine if battery replacement is

necessary. See “Battery Replacement” under

Remote Keyless Entry System Operation on

page 2-5.

• If you are still having trouble, see your dealer or a

qualiﬁed technician for service.

2-4

Remote Keyless Entry System

Operation

If your vehicle has this feature you can lock and unlock

your doors and disarm or arm your theft-deterrent

system from about 3 feet (1 m) up to 30 feet (9 m) away

using the remote keyless entry transmitter. See Content

Theft-Deterrent on page 2-14 for additional information.

UNLOCK: Press this

button to unlock the driver’s

door and turn on the

interior lamps. The parking

lamps may also ﬂash,

and the horn may chirp,

when this button is pressed.

Press the unlock button again within three seconds and

all of the doors will unlock.

LOCK: Press this button to lock all the doors.

The parking lamps may also ﬂash and the horn may

chirp when this button is pressed. Press the button again

within three seconds and the horn may chirp.

If a door is open or ajar when the lock button is pressed,

the horn will chirp several times to let you know that

the doors did not lock and the content theft-deterrent

system is not armed. Pressing the lock button again

while the horn is chirping or within three seconds after

the horn stops sounding, the doors will lock but the

content theft-deterrent system will not arm until

the opened door is closed.

You can program different feedback modes through the

Driver Information Center (DIC). To program the

feedback modes, see “Remote Keyless Entry Feedback”

under DIC Controls and Displays on page 3-37.

L (Panic): Press this button to make the horn sound

and the headlamps and taillamps ﬂash for up to

30 seconds. To turn them off again, do one of these

three things: wait for 30 seconds; press the panic button

again; or start the vehicle.

2-5

Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle

Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to

prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.

If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can

be purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring

any remaining transmitters with you when you go to

your dealer. When the dealer matches the replacement

transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters

must also be matched. Once your dealer has coded the

new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock

your vehicle. Each vehicle can have a maximum

of four transmitters matched to it.

Battery Replacement

Under normal use, the battery in your remote keyless

entry transmitter should last about two years.

You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter will not

work at the normal range in any location. If you have

to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works,

it is probably time to change the battery.

Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not to

touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body

transferred to these surfaces may damage the

transmitter.

To replace the battery, do the following:

1. Insert a thin coin, or similar object, in the slot

between the covers of the transmitter housing.

Gently pry the transmitter apart.

2. Remove and replace the battery with a three-volt

CR2032 or equivalent battery.

3. Align the covers and snap them together.

4. Check the operation of the transmitter.

2-6

Doors and Locks

Door Locks

{CAUTION:

Unlocked doors can be dangerous.

• Passengers — especially children — can

easily open the doors and fall out of a

moving vehicle. When a door is locked,

the handle will not open it. You increase

the chance of being thrown out of the

vehicle in a crash if the doors are not

locked. So, wear safety belts properly and

lock the doors whenever you drive.

• Young children who get into unlocked

vehicles may be unable to get out. A child

can be overcome by extreme heat and can

suffer permanent injuries or even death

from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle

whenever you leave it.

• Outsiders can easily enter through an

unlocked door when you slow down or

stop your vehicle. Locking your doors can

help prevent this from happening.

There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.

To unlock the door from the outside, use the key or

the remote keyless entry transmitter (if equipped).

To lock a door from the inside, push the manual lever

on your door forward. To unlock a door from the inside,

push the lever on the door rearward.

You will see a colored area on the lever when the door

is unlocked.

2-7

Power Door Locks

If your vehicle has power

door locks, the switches

are located on the driver’s

and the front passenger’s

armrests.

Remove the ignition key and press L (lock) to lock

all the doors at once. To unlock all the doors,

press U (unlock).

On crew cab models, use the manual door lock lever

on each rear door to lock or unlock the doors from

the rear seating area.

Programmable Automatic

Door Locks

If your vehicle has power door locks and the remote

keyless entry system, it will be equipped with an

auto lock/unlock feature which enables you to program

your vehicle’s power door locks from the driver’s

seating position.

If your vehicle has an automatic transmission, it will be

programmed to have all the doors lock automatically

when the shift lever is moved out of PARK (P). All the

doors will unlock when the shift lever is moved back

into PARK (P).

If your vehicle has a manual transmission, it will be

programmed to have all the doors lock when the vehicle

speed is greater than 15 mph (24 km/h). The doors

will unlock when the key is removed from the ignition.

To personalize the automatic door locks, see “Automatic

Door Locks” under DIC Controls and Displays on

page 3-37.

2-8

Rear Door Security Locks

(Crew Cab)

If you have the crew cab model, your vehicle may be

equipped with rear door security locks. With this feature,

you can lock the rear doors so they cannot be opened

from the inside by passengers.

The security lock lever is

located on the inside edge

of each rear door.

To use the security locks, do the following:

1. Open one of the rear doors.

2. Using your ignition key, turn the lock clockwise on

the driver’s side rear door, and counterclockwise on

the passenger’s side rear door to engage the

rear door security lock.

3. Close the door.

4. Repeat these steps on the opposite rear door.

If you want to open the rear door when the security lock

is on, unlock the door and open the door from the

outside. To return the rear doors to normal use,

disengage the locks by inserting the ignition key and

turning the lock counterclockwise for the driver’s

side rear door, and clockwise for the passenger’s side

rear door.

2-9

Lockout Protection

If you have power door locks, this feature protects you

from locking your key in the vehicle when the key is

in the ignition and a door is open.

If the power door lock switch is pressed when a door is

open and the key is in the ignition, all of the doors

will lock and then the driver’s door will unlock.

Rear Doors (Extended Cab)

If you have an extended cab, your vehicle has rear

doors for convenience in loading and unloading cargo.

To open a rear door, open the front door. Then, use

the handle located on the front edge of the rear

door panel to open it. You must close the rear door

before closing the front door.

Tailgate

You can open the tailgate by pulling up on the handle

while pulling the tailgate down.

When you put the tailgate back up, be sure it latches

securely.

You can lock the tailgate using your ignition key.

Turn the key counterclockwise to lock the tailgate.

Turn the key clockwise to unlock the tailgate.

2-10

Removing the Tailgate

Follow these steps if you want to remove the tailgate:

1. Lift up slightly on the entire tailgate assembly.

Remove the retaining

cables from both ends of

the tailgate by pulling

upward on the clip.

Then, push forward so

the larger part of the hole

on the bracket is over

the bolt. Pull the end over

the bolt.

2. With the tailgate partially down, pull the tailgate

toward you at the passenger’s side and then

move the tailgate to the right to release the driver’s

side. You can then remove the entire tailgate

assembly.

Reverse the procedure to reinstall the tailgate.

Make sure it is secure.

To partially lower the tailgate do the following:

1. Lift up slightly on the entire tailgate assembly.

2. Pull upward on each

clip. Then, push

forward so the larger

part of the hole on

the bracket is over the

bolt. Pull the end

over the bolt.

3. Slide the end ﬁtting off the bottom bolt and onto the

top bolt. The tailgate will now stay in the partially

opened position.

If you would like to close the tailgate, the bracket cannot

be in the partially opened position and must be

anchored on the bottom bolt, using the secondary

position on the end ﬁtting.

Tailgate Partially Down

2-11

Windows

{CAUTION:

Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a

vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.

They can be overcome by the extreme heat and

suffer permanent injuries or even death from

heat stroke. Never leave a child, a helpless

adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle, especially with

the windows closed in warm or hot weather.

Manual Windows

On a vehicle with manual windows, use the handle on

each door to open and close each window.

2-12

Power Windows

The power window

controls are located on the

armrest of each door.

The driver’s door has switches for the passenger

windows as well. Your power windows will work when

the ignition has been turned to ACC (Accessory) or ON

or when Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active.

See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on page 2-18.

Pull up the forward edge of the control with the

power window symbol on it to raise the window.

Press the forward edge of the control down to lower

the window.

Do not hold all four power window switches down for

several seconds after the windows have been

completely lowered or raised, because the vehicle may

blow a fuse.

Express Down Windows

The driver’s window also has an express-down feature

that allows the windows to be lowered without holding

the switch. Press the front edge of the switch past

the ﬁrst position to activate the express-down mode.

The express-down mode can be canceled at any time by

pulling up on the switch. To open the window partway,

press the front of the switch to the ﬁrst position until

the window is at the desired position.

Window Lockout

If you have a crew cab vehicle with power windows,

you will also have a window lockout button located

above the window switches. This feature disables the

passenger’s window switches when the window lockout

button is pressed. To turn the lockout feature on or

off, press the window lockout button. A red band on the

side of the button can be seen when the windows

are not locked out.

Crew cab switches

shown

2-13

Sliding Rear Window

If your vehicle has this feature, squeeze the latch in the

center of the window and slide the glass to open it.

When you close the window, be sure the latch is engaged.

Sun Visors

To block glare, pull the visor down. It can also be

detached from the center mount and moved to the side

to block glare from that direction.

Visor Vanity Mirror

The passenger’s side sun visor has a mirror on it.

Pull down the visor to access the mirror.

Theft-Deterrent Systems

Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.

Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent

features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it

impossible to steal. However, there are ways you

can help.

Content Theft-Deterrent

If your vehicle has the

remote keyless entry

system, the vehicle has a

content theft-deterrent

alarm system.

To activate the content theft-deterrent system,

do the following:

1. Close all the doors.

2. Lock the door with the remote keyless entry

transmitter. The security light ﬂashes.

If the lock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter

is pressed, but a door is open, the horn will chirp

six times. Close the open door and the system will be

activated.

2-14

If a locked door is not opened using the remote keyless

entry transmitter, or by OnStar

, the alarm will go off.

The front turn signal lamps will ﬂash for two minutes,

and the horn will sound for two minutes, then will turn off

to save the battery power.

Remember, the theft-deterrent system won’t activate if

you lock the doors with a key, the manual door lock,

or power door lock switch. The system can only

be activated using the remote keyless entry transmitter,

or by OnStar

. You should also remember that you

can start your vehicle with the correct ignition key if the

alarm has been set off.

Here’s how to avoid setting off the alarm by accident:

• If you don’t want to activate the theft-deterrent

system, the vehicle should be locked with the door

key after the doors are closed.

• Always unlock a door with the remote keyless entry

transmitter. Unlocking a door any other way will set

off the alarm.

If you set off the alarm by accident, you can turn off the

alarm by pressing unlock on the remote keyless

entry transmitter. The alarm won’t stop if you try to

unlock a door any other way.

Testing the Alarm

The alarm can be tested by following these steps:

1. From inside the vehicle, activate the system by

locking the doors with the remote keyless entry

transmitter.

2. Unlock the door with the manual door lock and

open the door. This should set off the alarm.

3. To turn the alarm off, press the unlock button

on the remote keyless entry transmitter or start

the engine.

If the alarm does not sound when it should but the lights

ﬂash, check to see if the horn works. The horn fuse

may be blown. To replace the fuse, see Fuses

and Circuit Breakers on page 5-99.

If the alarm does not sound or the headlamps do not

ﬂash, see your dealer for service.

2-15

Passlock

Your vehicle is equipped with the Passlock

theft-deterrent system.

Passlock

is a passive theft-deterrent system. Passlock

enables fuel if the ignition lock cylinder is turned with

a valid key. If a correct key is not used or the ignition

lock cylinder is tampered with, the fuel system is

disabled and the vehicle will not start.

During normal operation, the security light will turn off

approximately ﬁve seconds after the key is turned to ON.

See Security Light on page 3-35.

If the engine stalls and the security light ﬂashes, wait

about 10 minutes until the light stops ﬂashing before

trying to restart the engine. Remember to release

the key from START as soon as the engine starts.

If the engine does not start after three tries, the vehicle

needs service.

If the engine is running and the security light comes on,

you will be able to restart the engine if you turn the

engine off. However, your Passlock

system is

not working properly and must be serviced by your

dealer. Your vehicle is not protected by Passlock

at this

time. See your GM dealer for service.

In an emergency, call the GM Roadside Assistance

Center. See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-6.

Starting and Operating

Your Vehicle

New Vehicle Break-In

Notice: Your vehicle does not need an elaborate

break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if

you follow these guidelines:

• Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or less

for the ﬁrst 500 miles (805 km).

• Do not drive at any one speed — fast or

slow — for the ﬁrst 500 miles (805 km).

Do not make full-throttle starts.

• Avoid making hard stops for the ﬁrst 200 miles

(322 km) or so. During this time your new brake

linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops with new

linings can mean premature wear and earlier

replacement. Follow this breaking-in guideline

every time you get new brake linings.

• Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See Towing a

Trailer on page 4-56 for more information.

2-16

Ignition Positions

With the key in the ignition

switch, you can turn to four

different positions.

LOCK (A): This position locks your ignition and

transmission on manual transmission vehicles. It is a

theft-deterrent feature. You will only be able to remove

your key when the ignition is turned to LOCK.

If you have a manual transmission, the ignition switch

cannot be turned to LOCK unless the shift lever is

in PARK (P).

Notice: Using a tool to force the key from the

ignition switch could cause damage or break the

key. Use the correct key and turn the key only with

your hand. Make sure the key is all the way in.

If it is, turn the steering wheel left and right while

you turn the key hard. If none of this works,

then your vehicle needs service.

ACC (ACCESSORY) (B): This is the position in which

you can operate your electrical accessories or items

plugged into the accessory power outlets. It also unlocks

the steering wheel and ignition. Use this position if

your vehicle must be pushed or towed.

ON (C): This is the position that the switch returns to

after you start your engine and release the switch.

The switch stays in ON when the engine is running.

But even when the engine is not running, you can use

ON to operate your electrical accessories and to

display some instrument panel cluster warning and

indicator lights.

START (D): This is the position that starts the engine.

When the engine starts, release the key. The ignition

switch will return to ON for normal driving.

When the engine is not running, ACC and ON allow you

to operate your electrical accessories, such as the

radio or items plugged into the accessory power outlets.

A warning tone will sound if you open the driver’s

door when the ignition is in ACC or LOCK and the key

is in the ignition.

2-17

Retained Accessory Power (RAP)

Your vehicle is equipped with Retained Accessory

Power (RAP) which will allow certain features of your

vehicle to continue working for up to 20 minutes after the

ignition key is turned to LOCK.

Your radio and power windows will work when the

ignition key is in ON or ACC. Once the key is turned

from ON to LOCK, these features will continue to work

for up to 20 minutes or until a door is opened.

Starting Your Engine

Automatic Transmission

Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).

Your engine will not start in any other position — that is

a safety feature. To restart when you are already

moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.

Notice: Do not try to shift to PARK (P) if your

vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage the

transmission. Shift to PARK (P) only when your

vehicle is stopped.

Manual Transmission

The gear selector should be in NEUTRAL and the

parking brake engaged. Hold the clutch pedal to the

ﬂoor and start the engine. Your vehicle will not start if

the clutch pedal is not all the way down — that is a

safety feature.

Starting Your Engine

1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the

ignition key to START. When the engine starts,

let go of the key. The idle speed will go down as

your engine gets warm.

Notice: Holding your key in START for longer than

15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to

be drained much sooner. And the excessive heat

can damage your starter motor. Wait about

15 seconds between each try to help avoid draining

your battery or damaging your starter.

2. If the engine does not start within 10 seconds, push

the accelerator pedal all the way to the ﬂoor, while

you hold the ignition key in START. When the

engine starts, let go of the key and let up on the

accelerator pedal. Wait about 15 seconds between

each try.

2-18

Depending on the outside temperature, the engine

starter may continue cranking the engine up to

approximately four seconds after you release the

ignition key. This is normal.

When starting your engine in very cold weather

(below 0°F or 18°C), do this:

1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the

ignition key to START and hold it there up to

15 seconds. When the engine starts, let go

of the key.

2. If your engine still will not start, or starts but then

stops, it could be ﬂooded with too much gasoline.

Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the

ﬂoor and holding it there as you hold the key in

START for about three seconds. When the

engine starts, let go of the key and accelerator.

If the vehicle starts brieﬂy but then stops again,

do the same thing, but this time keep the pedal

down for ﬁve or six seconds. This clears the extra

gasoline from the engine.

Notice: Your engine is designed to work with the

electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical

parts or accessories, you could change the way the

engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,

check with your dealer. If you do not, your engine

might not perform properly.

2-19

Engine Coolant Heater

Your vehicle may be equipped with this feature.

In very cold weather, 0°F (–18°C) or colder, the engine

coolant heater can help. You will get easier starting

and better fuel economy during engine warm-up.

Usually, the coolant heater should be plugged in a

minimum of four hours prior to starting your vehicle.

At temperatures above 32°F (0°C), use of the coolant

heater is not required.

To Use the Engine Coolant Heater

1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.

The cord is located in the engine compartment

behind the underhood fuse block on the driver’s side

of the vehicle.

3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.

{CAUTION:

Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet

could cause an electrical shock. Also, the

wrong kind of extension cord could overheat

and cause a ﬁre. You could be seriously

injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded

three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will

not reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong

extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.

4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and

store the cord as it was before to keep it away

from moving engine parts. If you do not, it could be

damaged.

How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged

in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the

kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead

of trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact

your dealer in the area where you will be parking

your vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice

for that particular area.

2-20

Automatic Transmission Operation

Your automatic transmission has a shift lever on the

steering column.

It features an electronic shift position indicator within the

instrument cluster. This display must be powered

anytime the shift lever is capable of being moved out of

PARK (P). This means that if your key is turned off,

but not in LOCK, there will be a small current drain on

your battery which could discharge your battery over

a period of time. If you need to leave your key in

the ignition but not in LOCK for an extended period, it is

recommended that you disconnect the battery cable

from the battery to prevent discharging your battery.

There are several different positions for your shift lever.

PARK (P): This position locks your rear wheels. It is

the best position to use when you start your engine

because your vehicle cannot move easily.

{CAUTION:

It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the

shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the

parking brake ﬁrmly set. Your vehicle can roll.

Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is

running unless you have to. If you have left the

engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.

You or others could be injured. To be sure your

vehicle will not move, even when you are on

fairly level ground, always set your parking

brake and move the shift lever to PARK (P). See

Shifting Into Park (P) (Automatic Transmission)

on page 2-30. If you are pulling a trailer, see

Towing a Trailer on page 4-56.

2-21

Make sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before

starting the engine. Your vehicle has an automatic

transmission shift lock control system. You have to fully

apply your regular brakes before you can shift from

PARK (P) when the ignition key is in ON. If you cannot

shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on the shift

lever by pushing the shift lever all the way into PARK (P)

as you maintain brake application. Then move the

shift lever into the gear you want. See Shifting Out of

Park (P) (Automatic Transmission) on page 2-32.

REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.

Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle

is moving forward could damage the transmission.

The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.

Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is

stopped.

To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,

ice or sand without damaging your transmission,

see If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow on

page 4-42.

NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine does not

connect with the wheels. To restart when you are

already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.

{CAUTION:

Shifting into a drive gear while your engine is

running at high speed is dangerous. Unless

your foot is ﬁrmly on the brake pedal, your

vehicle could move very rapidly. You could

lose control and hit people or objects. Do not

shift into a drive gear while your engine is

running at high speed.

Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)

with the engine running at high speed may damage

the transmission. The repairs would not be

covered by your warranty. Be sure the engine is not

running at high speed when shifting your vehicle.

2-22

DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving. If you

need more power for passing, and you are:

• Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h), push your

accelerator pedal about halfway down.

• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the

accelerator all the way down.

You will shift down to the next gear and have more

power.

DRIVE (D) should not be used when towing a trailer,

carrying a heavy load, driving on steep hills, or for

off-road driving. Select THIRD (3) when operating the

vehicle under any of these conditions.

THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal driving.

However, it offers more power and lower fuel economy

than DRIVE (D). You should use THIRD (3) when towing

a trailer, carrying a heavy load, driving on steep hills

or winding roads or for off-road driving.

SECOND (2): This position gives you more power but

lower fuel economy than THIRD (3). You can use

SECOND (2) on hills. It can help control your speed as

you go down steep mountain roads, but then you

would also want to use your brakes off and on. You can

also use SECOND (2) for starting your vehicle from a

stop on slippery road surfaces.

FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power

but lower fuel economy than SECOND (2). You can use

it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the

shift lever is put in FIRST (1) while the vehicle is moving

forward, the transmission will not shift into FIRST (1)

until the vehicle is going slowly enough.

Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in

one place on a hill using only the accelerator

pedal may damage the transmission. If you are

stuck, do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill,

use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.

2-23

Manual Transmission Operation

Five-Speed

This is your shift pattern.

Here is how to operate your manual transmission:

FIRST (1): Press the clutch pedal and shift into

FIRST (1). Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as

you slowly press down on the accelerator pedal.

You can shift into FIRST (1) when you are going less

than 20 mph (30 km/h). If you have come to a complete

stop and it is hard to shift into FIRST (1), put the shift

lever in NEUTRAL and let up on the clutch. Then press

the clutch pedal back down and shift into FIRST (1).

SECOND (2): Press the clutch pedal as you let up on

the accelerator pedal and shift into SECOND (2).

Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the

accelerator pedal.

THIRD, FOURTH AND FIFTH (3, 4 and 5): Shift into

THIRD (3), FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5) the same

way you do for SECOND (2). Slowly let up on the

clutch pedal as you press the accelerator pedal.

To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and press the

brake pedal. Just before the vehicle stops, press

the clutch pedal and the brake pedal, and shift to

NEUTRAL.

NEUTRAL: Use this position when you start or idle

your engine.

REVERSE (R): To back up, press the clutch pedal.

After the vehicle stops, shift into REVERSE (R). Slowly

let up on the clutch pedal as you press the accelerator

pedal. If it is hard to shift, let the shift lever return

to NEUTRAL and release the clutch pedal. Then press

the clutch again and shift into REVERSE (R). Do not

attempt to shift into the ﬁfth gear position prior to shifting

into REVERSE (R). Your transmission has a lock out

feature which prevents a ﬁfth gear to reverse gear shift.

2-24

Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle

is moving forward could damage the transmission.

The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.

Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is

stopped.

Use REVERSE (R), along with the parking brake,

for parking your vehicle.

Up-Shift Light

This light will show you

when to shift to the next

higher gear for best

fuel economy.

When this light comes on, you can shift to the next

higher gear if weather, road and traffic conditions permit.

For the best fuel economy, accelerate slowly and shift

when the light comes on.

While you accelerate, it is normal for the light to go on

and off if you quickly change the position of the

accelerator. Ignore the shift light when you downshift.

If your vehicle has four-wheel drive and is equipped with

a manual transmission, disregard the shift light when

the transfer case is in four-wheel low.

For more information, see Up-Shift Light (Manual

Transmission) on page 3-28.

Shift Speeds

{CAUTION:

If you skip a gear when you downshift, you

could lose control of your vehicle. You could

injure yourself or others. Don’t shift down

more than one gear at a time when you

downshift.

2-25

Four-Wheel Drive

If your vehicle has four-wheel drive, you can send your

engine’s driving power to all four wheels for extra

traction. To get the most satisfaction out of four-wheel

drive, you must be familiar with its operation. Read the

part that follows before using four-wheel drive.

You should use two-wheel-drive high for most normal

driving conditions.

Notice: Driving on clean, dry pavement in

four-wheel drive for an extended period of time may

cause premature wear on your vehicle’s powertrain.

Do not drive on clean, dry pavement in four-wheel

drive on pavement for extended periods of time.

The transfer case buttons are located to the right of the

steering wheel on the instrument panel.

Use these buttons to shift into and out of four-wheel drive.

You can choose from the following:

m(Two-Wheel High): This setting is for driving in

most street and highway situations. Your front axle is not

engaged in two-wheel drive.

N (Neutral): Shift the vehicle’s transfer case to

NEUTRAL only when towing your vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL can cause

your vehicle to roll even if the transmission is

in PARK (P). You or someone else could be

seriously injured. Be sure to set the parking

brake before placing the transfer case in

NEUTRAL. See Parking Brake on page 2-29.

4m(Four-Wheel High): This setting engages your

front axle to help drive your vehicle. Use four-wheel high

when you need extra traction, such as on snowy or

icy roads, or in most off-road situations.

n(Four-Wheel Low): This setting also engages your

front axle to give you extra traction. It sends the

maximum power to all four wheels. You might choose

four-wheel low if you were driving off-road in sand, mud

or deep snow and climbing or descending steep hills.

2-26

Indicator lights in the buttons show you which setting

you are in. The indicator lights will come on brieﬂy when

you turn on the ignition and one will stay on. If the

lights do not come on, you should take your vehicle in

for service. An indicator light will ﬂash while shifting.

It will remain illuminated when the shift is completed.

If for some reason the transfer case cannot make

a requested shift, it will return to the last chosen setting.

Shifting from Two-Wheel High to

Four-Wheel High

Press and release the four-wheel high button. This can

be done at any speed, and the front axle will lock

automatically.

Shifting from Four-Wheel High to

Two-Wheel High

Press and release the two-wheel high button. This can

be done at any speed, and the front axle will unlock

automatically.

Shifting from Two-Wheel High or

Four-Wheel High to Four-Wheel Low

To shift from two-wheel high or four-wheel high to

four-wheel low, the vehicle must be stopped or moving

less than 1.2 mph (2 km/h) with the transmission in

NEUTRAL (N) in vehicles equipped with an automatic

transmission or the clutch pedal engaged in vehicles

equipped with a manual transmission. The preferred

method for shifting into four-wheel low is to have your

vehicle moving 1.2 mph (2 km/h). Press and release the

four-wheel low button. You must wait for the four-wheel

low indicator light to stop ﬂashing and remain

illuminated before shifting your transmission into gear or

releasing the clutch pedal.

If the four-wheel low button is pressed when your

vehicle is in gear and/or moving faster than 1.2 mph

(2 km/h), the four-wheel low indicator light will ﬂash for

30 seconds and not complete the shift.

On automatic transmission equipped vehicles, if your

transfer case does not shift into four-wheel low,

your transmission indicator switch may require

adjustment. With your transmission in NEUTRAL (N),

press and release the four-wheel low button.

While the four-wheel low indicator light is ﬂashing,

shift your transmission into PARK (P). Press the

four-wheel low button again. Wait until the four-wheel

low indicator light remains illuminated before shifting

your transmission into gear. Press the four-wheel

low button again to complete the shift. This will get you

into four-wheel low, but you should take your vehicle

in for service to restore normal operation.

2-27

Shifting from Four-Wheel Low to

Two-Wheel High or Four-Wheel High

To shift from four-wheel low to two-wheel high or

four-wheel high, your vehicle must be stopped or

moving less than 1.2 mph (2 km/h) with the transmission

in NEUTRAL (N) or the clutch pedal engaged.

The preferred method for shifting out of four-wheel low

is to have your vehicle moving 1.2 mph (2 km/h).

Press and release the four-wheel high button. You must

wait for the four-wheel high indicator light to stop

ﬂashing and remain illuminated before shifting your

transmission into gear or releasing the clutch pedal.

If the four-wheel high button is pressed when your

vehicle is in gear and/or moving faster than 1.2 mph

(2 km/h), the four-wheel high indicator light will ﬂash for

30 seconds but not complete the shift.

On vehicles with an automatic transmission, if your

transfer case does not shift into four-wheel high, your

transmission indicator switch may require adjustment.

With your transmission in NEUTRAL (N), press and

release the four-wheel high button. While the four-wheel

high indicator light is ﬂashing, shift your transmission

into PARK (P). Wait until the four-wheel high indicator

light remains illuminated before shifting your

transmission into gear. Press the four-wheel high button

again to complete the shift. This will get you into

four-wheel high, but you should take your vehicle in for

service to restore normal operation.

Shifting to NEUTRAL

Use NEUTRAL when you plan to tow your vehicle.

See Recreational Vehicle Towing on page 4-50

for towing instructions. To shift the transfer case into

NEUTRAL do the following:

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Start the vehicle.

3. Shift the transmission in NEUTRAL (N), or press in

the clutch for vehicles with a manual transmission.

4. Shift the transfer case to two-wheel high.

5. Press and hold the two-wheel high and four-wheel

low buttons at the same time for 10 seconds. The

NEUTRAL (N) light will come on when the

transfer case shift to NEUTRAL (N) is complete.

6. Shift the transmission to REVERSE (R) for one

second, then shift the transmission to DRIVE (D)

for one second, or FIRST (1) for vehicles with

manual transmissions.

7. Turn the ignition to LOCK.

8. Place the transmission shift lever in PARK (P), or

FIRST (1) for vehicles equipped with a manual

transmission.

2-28

Shifting Out of NEUTRAL

After towing your vehicle, you will have to shift out of

NEUTRAL in order to drive. To shift out of NEUTRAL,

do the following:

1. Set the parking brake and apply the regular brake

pedal. See Parking Brake on page 2-29 for

more information.

2. Start a vehicle with an automatic transmission in

PARK (P). Use FIRST (1) for vehicles with a

manual transmission.

3. Put an automatic transmission in NEUTRAL (N) or

press the clutch pedal for vehicles with a manual

transmission.

4. Press the button for the desired transfer case

position (two-wheel high, four-wheel high or

four-wheel low).

5. After the transfer case has shifted out of NEUTRAL,

the indicator light will go out.

6. Release the parking brake.

7. Shift the transmission to the desired gear.

It is normal for your vehicle to exhibit a signiﬁcant

engagement noise and bump when shifting in and out

of Neutral (N) and four-wheel low.

Parking Brake

The parking brake pedal is

located to the left of the

regular brake pedal,

near the driver’s door.

To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal

down with your right foot. Push down the parking

brake pedal with your left foot.

A chime will activate and the warning light will ﬂash

when the parking brake is applied and the vehicle

is moving at least 3 mph (5 km/h) for at least three

seconds. The chime will deactivate and the light will turn

off when the parking brake is set and the vehicle is

moving below 3 mph (5 km/h). See Brake System

Warning Light on page 3-28.

2-29

To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake

pedal down. Pull the bottom edge of the lever, located

above the parking brake pedal, with the parking

brake symbol, to release the parking brake.

If the ignition is on when the parking brake is released,

the brake system warning light will go off.

Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can

overheat the brake system and cause premature

wear or damage to brake system parts. Verify that

the parking brake is fully released and the brake

warning light is off before driving.

If you are towing a trailer and are parking on any hill,

see Towing a Trailer on page 4-56.

Shifting Into Park (P)

(Automatic Transmission)

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle

if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with

the parking brake ﬁrmly set. Your vehicle can

roll. If you have left the engine running, the

vehicle can move suddenly. You or others

could be injured. To be sure your vehicle will

not move, even when you are on fairly level

ground, use the steps that follow. If you are

pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on

page 4-56.

1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot

and set the parking brake.

2-30

{CAUTION:

If you have four-wheel drive, your vehicle

will be free to roll — even if your shift lever

is in PARK (P) — if your transfer case is in

NEUTRAL. So, be sure the transfer case is in a

drive gear, two-wheel high (2H) or four-wheel

high (4H) or four-wheel low (4L) — not in

NEUTRAL.

2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by pulling

the lever toward you and moving it up as far

as it will go.

3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.

4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can

leave your vehicle with the key, your vehicle is in

PARK (P).

Leaving Your Vehicle With the

Engine Running

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with

the engine running. Your vehicle could move

suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in

PARK (P) with the parking brake ﬁrmly set.

And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine

running, it could overheat and even catch ﬁre.

You or others could be injured. Do not leave

your vehicle with the engine running.

If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine

running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and your

parking brake is ﬁrmly set before you leave it. After you

have moved the shift lever into PARK (P), hold the

regular brake pedal down. Then, see if you can move

the shift lever away from PARK (P) without ﬁrst pulling it

toward you. If you can, it means that the shift lever

was not fully locked into PARK (P).

2-31

Torque Lock

If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift your

transmission into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the

vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl

in the transmission. You may ﬁnd it difficult to pull the

shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque

lock.” To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and

then shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave

the driver’s seat. To ﬁnd out how, see Shifting

Into Park (P) (Automatic Transmission) on page 2-30.

When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of

PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.

If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another

vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the

pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission,

so you can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).

Shifting Out of Park (P)

(Automatic Transmission)

Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock

control system which locks the shift lever in PARK (P)

when the ignition is in the LOCK position. In addition,

you have to fully apply the regular brakes before you

can shift from PARK (P) when the ignition is in ON.

See Automatic Transmission Operation on page 2-21.

If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure

on the shift lever by pushing the shift lever all the way

into PARK (P) as you maintain brake application.

Then, move the shift lever into the gear you want.

If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still cannot

shift out of PARK (P), try this:

1. Turn the key to ACC. There is no shift interlock in

this key position.

2. Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4.

3. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL (N).

4. Start the vehicle and then shift to the gear you want.

5. Have the system ﬁxed as soon as you can.

2-32

Parking Your Vehicle

(Manual Transmission)

Your vehicle has a manual transmission. Before you

get out of your vehicle, move the shift lever into

REVERSE (R), and ﬁrmly apply the parking brake.

Once the shift lever has been placed into REVERSE (R)

with the clutch pedal pressed in, you can turn the

ignition key to LOCK, remove the key and release

the clutch.

If you are parking on a hill, or if your vehicle is pulling a

trailer, see Towing a Trailer on page 4-56.

Parking Over Things That Burn

{CAUTION:

Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust

parts under your vehicle and ignite. Do not

park over papers, leaves, dry grass or other

things that can burn.

2-33

Engine Exhaust

{CAUTION:

Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas

carbon monoxide (CO), which you cannot

see or smell. It can cause unconsciousness

and death.

You might have exhaust coming in if:

• Your exhaust system sounds strange or

different.

• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.

• Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.

• Your vehicle was damaged when driving

over high points on the road or over

road debris.

• Repairs were not done correctly.

• Your vehicle or exhaust system had been

modiﬁed improperly.

If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into

your vehicle:

• Drive it only with all the windows down to

blow out any CO; and

• Have your vehicle ﬁxed immediately.

Running Your Engine While You Are

Parked (Automatic Transmission)

It is better not to park with the engine running. But if you

ever have to, here are some things to know.

{CAUTION:

Idling the engine with the climate control

system off could allow dangerous exhaust into

your vehicle. See the earlier caution under

Engine Exhaust on page 2-34.

Also, idling in a closed-in place can let

deadly carbon monoxide (CO) into your

vehicle even if the climate control fan is at

the highest setting. One place this can happen

is a garage. Exhaust — with CO — can come

in easily. NEVER park in a garage with the

engine running.

Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.

See Winter Driving on page 4-38.

2-34

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle

if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with

the parking brake ﬁrmly set. Your vehicle can

roll. Do not leave your vehicle when the engine

is running unless you have to. If you have

left the engine running, the vehicle can move

suddenly. You or others could be injured.

To be sure your vehicle will not move, even

when you are on fairly level ground, always set

your parking brake and move the shift lever

to PARK (P).

{CAUTION:

If you have four-wheel drive, your vehicle will

be free to roll — even if your shift lever is

in PARK (P) — if your transfer case is in

NEUTRAL. So be sure the transfer case is in a

drive gear — not in NEUTRAL. See Four-Wheel

Drive on page 2-26.

Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle

will not move. See Shifting Into Park (P)

(Automatic Transmission) on page 2-30.

If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on

page 4-56.

2-35

Mirrors

Manual Rearview Mirror

While sitting in a comfortable driving position, adjust the

outside rearview mirror so you can see clearly behind

your vehicle. Grip the mirror in the center to move it up

or down and side to side. The control at the bottom

of the mirror is the day/night feature that allows

adjustment to the mirror so that the glare of headlamps

from behind is reduced. Push the control for daytime

use; pull it for night use.

The mirror may have lamps. Press the button next to

each lamp to turn it on or off.

Manual Rearview Mirror with

OnStar

Your vehicle may have a manual rearview mirror with

the OnStar

System and map lamps.

Mirror Operation

You can adjust the mirror for day or night driving.

Press the tab forward (away from you) for day driving.

Pull the tab back (toward you) for night driving.

There are also three OnStar

buttons located at the

bottom of the mirror. See your dealer for more

information on the system and how to subscribe to

OnStar

. See OnStar

System on page 2-40 for more

information about the services OnStar

provides.

Map Lamps

The mirror has map lamps located at the bottom of the

mirror. To manually turn the lamps on or off, press

the button next to each lamp.

Cleaning the Mirror

When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar

material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray

glass cleaner directly on the mirror housing.

2-36

Automatic Dimming Rearview

Mirror with Compass and

Temperature Display

The vehicle may have an automatic dimming rearview

mirror with a compass, temperature display, and

map lamps.

Mirror Operation

The mirror automatically changes to reduce glare from

headlamps behind you. A time delay feature prevents

rapid changing from the day to night positions while

driving under lights and through traffic.

P (On/Off): The automatic dimming feature is

automatically activated when the vehicle is started.

The automatic dimming feature is turned on or off by

pressing this button located on the lower part of

the mirror. Press and hold the button for up to three

seconds to turn this feature on or off.

T (Indicator Light): This light will turn on when the

automatic dimming feature is active.

Map Lamps

The mirror has map lamps located at the bottom of the

mirror. To manually turn the lamps on or off, press

the button next to each lamp.

Compass Operation

The mirror has an eight-point compass display in the

bottom of the mirror face.

When the ignition and the compass feature are on,

the compass will show two character boxes for

approximately two seconds. After two seconds, the

mirror will display the current compass heading.

For example, NE is displayed for north-east.

Compass Calibration

If after two seconds the display does not show a

compass heading, there may be a strong magnetic ﬁeld

interfering with the compass. Such interference may

be caused by a magnetic antenna mount, note

pad holder or similar object. If the letter C appears in

the compass window, the compass needs calibration.

The mirror compass can be calibrated by driving

the vehicle in circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the

display reads a direction.

The compass can be placed in calibration mode by

pressing and holding the left map light button until

a C appears on the compass display.

2-37

Compass Variance

Compass variance is the difference between earth’s

magnetic north and true geographic north. If the mirror

is not adjusted for compass variance, your compass

could give false readings.

The mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving the factory.

It will be necessary to adjust the compass to

compensate for compass variance if you live outside

zone eight. Under certain circumstances, such as a long

distance, cross-country trip, it will be necessary to

adjust the compass variance.

To adjust for compass variance, do the following:

1. Find your current location and variance zone

number on the zone map that follows.

2. Press and hold the left map light button until a zone

number appears on the display.

3. Once the zone number appears on the display,

press the on/off button quickly until you reach

the correct zone number. Stop pressing the button

and the mirror will return to normal operation.

If C appears in the compass window, the compass

may need calibration. See “Compass Calibration”

listed previously.

2-38

Temperature Display Operation

The outside air temperature is displayed in the window

located at the lower center of the mirror face.

Press and hold the far right button for four seconds and

release. This will change the temperature reading

between degrees Fahrenheit, degrees Celsius, or turn

the display off.

Cleaning the Mirror

When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar

material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray

glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause

the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.

Outside Manual Mirrors

If the vehicle has manual outside mirrors, adjust them

by hand so that the side of the vehicle can be seen while

you are sitting in a comfortable driving position.

The mirrors can be folded inward to prevent damage

when going through an automatic car wash. To fold,

push the mirror toward the vehicle. To return the mirror

to its original position, push outward. Return both

mirrors to the unfolded position before driving.

Outside Power Mirrors

If your vehicle has this

feature, the controls are

located on the driver’s

door armrest.

To adjust the power mirrors, do the following:

1. Move the selector switch to the L (left) or R (right)

to choose the driver’s or passenger’s mirror.

2. Use the arrows located on the four-way control pad

to move the mirror in the direction you want the

mirror to go.

3. Return the selector switch to the center position

once the mirrors are adjusted.

2-39

If the mirror begins making a ratcheting sound, the

mirror has reached the end of its travel and can go no

farther in that direction. To stop the sound, reverse

the mirror direction using the control pad.

The mirrors can be manually folded inward to prevent

damage when going through an automatic car wash.

To fold, push the mirror toward the vehicle. To return the

mirror to its original position, push outward. Be sure to

return both mirrors to the unfolded position before driving.

Outside Convex Mirror

Your passenger’s outside rearview mirror is convex.

A convex mirror’s surface is curved so you can see more

from the driver’s seat.

{CAUTION:

A convex mirror can make things (like other

vehicles) look farther away than they really are.

If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you

could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your

inside mirror or glance over your shoulder

before changing lanes.

OnStar

System

OnStar

uses global positioning system (GPS) satellite

technology, wireless communications, and call centers

to provide you with a wide range of safety, security,

information, and convenience services.

A complete OnStar

user’s guide and the terms and

conditions of the OnStar

Subscription Service

Agreement are included in the vehicle’s glove box

literature. For more information, visit www.onstar.com

or www.onstarcanada.com. Contact OnStar

1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827), or press the

OnStar

button to speak to an OnStar

advisor

24 hours a day, 7 days a week.

Terms and conditions of the Subscription Service

Agreement can be found at www.onstar.com or

www.onstarcanada.com.

OnStar

Services

For new vehicles equipped with OnStar

, the Safe and

Sound Plan is included for the ﬁrst year. You can

extend this plan beyond the ﬁrst year, or upgrade to the

Directions and Connections Plan to meet your needs.

For more information, press the OnStar

button to speak

with an advisor.

2-40

Safe and Sound Plan

•

Automatic Notiﬁcation of Airbag Deployment

• Emergency Services

• Roadside Assistance

• Stolen Vehicle Tracking

• AccidentAssist

• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert

• Remote Diagnostics

• Online Concierge

Directions and Connections Plan

•

All Safe and Sound Plan Services

• Driving Directions

• RideAssist

• Information and Convenience Services

OnStar

Personal Calling

As an OnStar

subscriber, the Personal Calling

capability is available if your hand-held cell phone is

lost, forgotten, or has a low battery. It is a hands-free

wireless phone that is integrated into the vehicle.

Calls can be placed nationwide using simple voice

commands with no additional contracts and no additional

roaming charges. To ﬁnd out more about OnStar

Personal Calling, refer to the OnStar

user’s guide in

the vehicle’s glove box or visit www.onstar.com or

www.onstarcanada.com; or speak with an OnStar

advisor by pressing the OnStar

button or by calling

1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).

OnStar

Virtual Advisor

Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar

Personal Calling

that uses minutes to access up-to-date weather and

traffic reports for your area, news and sports updates,

stock quotes, entertainment and more. You are also able

to listen and reply to your E-mail through your vehicle’s

audio system. Customize your information proﬁle at

www.myonstar.com. See the OnStar

user’s guide for

more information.

2-41

Storage Areas

Glove Box

To open the glove box, pull on the lever.

Cupholder(s)

Your vehicle may have two cupholders located on the

lower part of the front doors as well as two cupholders

located at the front end of the console. Vehicles

with bench seats may have cupholders attached to the

front of the center seat.

If your vehicle is an extended cab or crew cab model,

your vehicle also has two rear cupholders. On crew cab

models, the cupholders are located at the front end

of the rear center seat cushion. On extended cab

models, the rear seat cupholders are located on top of

the rear center console.

Front Armrest Storage Area

For vehicles with bench seats, you may have a center

armrest storage area. Lift up on the upper tab located at

the front of the armrest to release the latch. Lift the lid

to open the storage area.

For vehicles with bucket seats or uplevel packages,

your vehicle may have a two-tiered center armrest

storage area. Lift up on the upper tab located at the

front of the armrest to release the latch. Lift the lid to

the top storage area. A second tab is located below the

top one and allows you to access the bottom storage

area. Lift up on the lower tab to release the latch.

Then, raise the lid of the lower storage area.

The upper storage area will lift up with the lid of the

lower storage area.

To close the storage area(s), lower the lid(s) until you

feel the latch close.

2-42

Assist Handles

Your vehicle may have assist handles to be used when

getting out of your vehicle. If your vehicle has assist

handles, they may be located above the front passenger

door if you have a regular cab, or above the front and

rear passenger doors if you have an extended cab

or crew cab.

If your vehicle is equipped with roof-mounted side

impact air bags, there will be assist handles located

above both the driver’s and front passenger’s doors.

Rear Storage Area

If your vehicle is an extended cab model, it may be

equipped with storage compartments under the

rear seats.

To access the storage compartments you will need to

lift the cushion on the bottom of the rear seats. This will

expose the storage boxes under the seat.

2-43

To open a storage box, unhook the bottom of the

latches and lift the two latches on each side of the

storage box.

Lift the lid to access the storage box.

2-44

Instrument Panel Overview ...............................3-4

Hazard Warning Flashers ................................3-6

Other Warning Devices ...................................3-6

Horn .............................................................3-6

Tilt Wheel .....................................................3-7

Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .........................3-7

Turn and Lane-Change Signals ........................3-8

Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer ..................3-9

Flash-to-Pass .................................................3-9

Windshield Wipers ........................................3-10

Windshield Washer .......................................3-10

Cruise Control ..............................................3-11

Exterior Lamps .............................................3-14

Headlamps on Reminder ................................3-15

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) .......................3-15

Automatic Headlamp System ..........................3-15

Fog Lamps ..................................................3-16

Exterior Cargo Lamps ....................................3-17

Interior Lamps ..............................................3-17

Instrument Panel Brightness ...........................3-17

Dome Lamp .................................................3-17

Dome Lamp Override ....................................3-17

Exit Lighting .................................................3-18

Battery Run-Down Protection ..........................3-18

Accessory Power Outlets ...............................3-18

Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter ........................3-19

Climate Controls ............................................3-19

Climate Control System .................................3-19

Outlet Adjustment .........................................3-21

Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ............3-22

Instrument Panel Cluster ................................3-23

Speedometer and Odometer ...........................3-24

Trip Odometer ..............................................3-24

Tachometer .................................................3-24

Safety Belt Reminder Light .............................3-24

Airbag Readiness Light ..................................3-25

Airbag Off Light ............................................3-26

Battery Warning Light ....................................3-27

Up-Shift Light (Manual Transmission) ...............3-28

Brake System Warning Light ..........................3-28

Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light .............3-29

Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ..................3-30

Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............................3-30

Oil Pressure Light .........................................3-34

Security Light ...............................................3-35

Cruise Control Light ......................................3-35

Highbeam On Light .......................................3-35

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)

Indicator Light ...........................................3-36

Fuel Gage ...................................................3-36

Section 3 Instrument Panel

3-1

Driver Information Center (DIC) .......................3-37

DIC Controls and Displays .............................3-37

DIC Warnings and Messages .........................3-41

Audio System(s) .............................................3-44

Setting the Time for Radios without Radio

Data Systems (RDS) ..................................3-44

Setting the Time for Radios with Radio

Data Systems (RDS) ..................................3-45

AM-FM Radio ...............................................3-45

Radio with CD (MP3) ....................................3-48

Radio with Six-Disc CD .................................3-63

Theft-Deterrent Feature (Non-RDS Radios) .......3-74

Theft-Deterrent Feature (RDS Radios) .............3-74

Radio Reception ...........................................3-74

Care of Your CDs .........................................3-74

Care of Your CD Player ................................3-75

Fixed Mast Antenna ......................................3-75

XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System .............3-75

Chime Level Adjustment ................................3-75

Section 3 Instrument Panel

3-2

✍ NOTES

3-3

Instrument Panel Overview

Manual Transmission shown, Automatic Transmission similar

3-4

The main components of your vehicle’s instrument panel are the following:

A. Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment on page 3-21.

B. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See Turn

Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-7.

C. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument Panel

Cluster on page 3-23.

D. Hazard Warning Flasher Button. See Hazard

Warning Flashers on page 3-6.

E. Passenger Side Airbag. See Airbag System on

page 1-61.

F. Exterior Lamp Controls. See Exterior Lamps on

page 3-14. Fog Lamps (If Equipped). See Fog

Lamps on page 3-16. Exterior Cargo Lamps.

See Exterior Cargo Lamps on page 3-17.

G. Parking Brake Release. See Parking Brake on

page 2-29.

H. Horn. See Horn on page 3-6.

I. Traction Control Button or Four-Wheel Drive Buttons.

See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-9

and Four-Wheel Drive on page 2-26.

J. Audio System. See Audio System(s) on page 3-44.

K. Cigarette Lighter (If Equipped). See Ashtrays

and Cigarette Lighter on page 3-19.

L. Climate Control System. See Climate Control

System on page 3-19.

M. Accessory Power Outlet. See Accessory Power

Outlets on page 3-18.

N. Airbag Off Switch (Regular cab and rear seat delete

only). See Airbag Off Switch on page 1-71.

O. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 2-42.

3-5

Hazard Warning Flashers

Your hazard warning ﬂashers let you warn others. They

also let police know you have a problem. Your front

and rear turn signal lamps will ﬂash on and off.

The hazard warning

ﬂasher button is located

on the instrument

panel, between the

two air vents in the center.

Your hazard warning ﬂashers work no matter what

position your key is in, and even if the key isn’t in.

Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal

lamps ﬂash on and off. Press the button again to

turn the ﬂashers off.

When the hazard warning ﬂashers are on, your turn

signals won’t work.

Other Warning Devices

If you carry reﬂective triangles, you can set one up at

the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind

your vehicle.

Horn

To sound the horn, press the horn symbol on the

steering wheel pad.

3-6

Tilt Wheel

A tilt wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheel

before you drive. If you have the tilt steering wheel,

you can raise it to the highest level to allow more room

for the driver to enter and exit the vehicle.

The tilt lever is located on the left side of the steering

column, under the turn signal lever.

To tilt, hold the steering wheel and pull the tilt lever

toward you. Move the wheel to a comfortable level,

then release the tilt lever to lock the wheel in place.

Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.

Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever

The lever on the left side of the steering column

includes the following:

• G Turn and Lane Change Signals. See Turn

Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-7.

• 53 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer. See

Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-9.

• Flash-to-Pass. See Flash-to-Pass on page 3-9.

• N Windshield Wipers. See Windshield Wipers on

page 3-10.

• L Windshield Washer. See Windshield Washer

on page 3-10.

• J Cruise Control. See Cruise Control on

page 3-11.

3-7

Turn and Lane-Change Signals

The turn signal has two upward (for right) and two

downward (for left) positions. These positions allow you

to signal a turn or a lane change.

To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or down.

When the turn is ﬁnished, the lever will return

automatically.

To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the lever

until the arrow starts to ﬂash. Hold it there until you

complete your lane change. The lever will return by itself

when you release it.

An arrow on the instrument

panel cluster will ﬂash in

the direction of the

turn or lane change.

As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrows

ﬂash more quickly than normal, a signal bulb may

be burned out and other drivers won’t see your

turn signal.

If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an

accident. If the arrows don’t go on at all when you signal

a turn, check for burned-out bulbs and a blown fuse.

See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-99

Fuses and Circuit Breakers.

Turn Signal On Chime

If your turn signal is left on for more than 3/4 of a mile

(1.2 km), a chime will sound at each ﬂash of the

turn signal and the message TURN SIGNAL will also

appear in the DIC. To turn the chime and message off,

move the turn signal lever to the off position.

See “TURN SIGNAL” under DIC Warnings and

Messages on page 3-41 DIC Warnings and Messages

for more information.

3-8

Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer

53(Headlamp High/Low Beam Changer):

To change the headlamps from low to high beam,

push the lever toward the instrument panel. To return

to low-beam headlamps, pull the multifunction lever

toward you. Then release it.

When the high beams are

on, this indicator light on

the instrument panel

cluster will also be on.

Flash-to-Pass

This feature lets you use your high-beam headlamps to

signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass.

It works even if your headlamps are in the automatic

position.

To use it, pull the turn signal lever toward you, then

release it.

If your headlamps are in the automatic position or on

low beam, your high-beam headlamps will turn on.

They’ll stay on as long as you hold the lever toward you.

The high-beam indicator on the instrument panel

cluster will come on. Release the lever to return to

normal operation.

3-9

Windshield Wipers

You control the windshield wipers by turning the band

with the wiper symbol on it.

8(Mist): For a single wiping cycle, turn the band to

mist. Hold it there until the wipers start. Then let go.

The wipers will stop after one wipe. If you want

more wipes, hold the band on mist longer.

N(Delay): You can set the wiper speed for a long or

short delay between wipes. This can be very useful

in light rain or snow. Turn the band to choose the delay

time. The closer to the top of the lever, the shorter

the delay.

6 (Low Speed): For steady wiping at low speed,

turn the band away from you to the ﬁrst solid position

past the delay settings.

1 (High Speed): For high-speed wiping, turn the

band to the second solid position past the delay settings.

9(Off): To stop the wipers, move the band to off.

Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades

before using them. If they’re frozen to the windshield,

carefully loosen or thaw them. If your blades do become

worn or damaged, get new blades or blade inserts.

Windshield Washer

{CAUTION:

In freezing weather, do not use your washer

until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the

washer ﬂuid can form ice on the windshield,

blocking your vision.

QL(Washer Fluid): There is a paddle marked

with the windshield washer symbol at the top of

the multifunction lever. To spray washer ﬂuid on the

windshield, push the paddle. The wipers will clear

the window and then either stop or return to your

preset speed.

3-10

Cruise Control

Your vehicle may be equipped with cruise control.

9(Off): This position

turns the system off.

R(On): This position activates the system.

+ (Resume/Accelerate): Move the lever to this symbol

to make the vehicle accelerate or resume to a

previously set speed.

rT(Set): Press this button to set the speed.

With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about

25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot

on the accelerator. This can really help on long

trips. Cruise control does not work at speeds below

about 25 mph (40 km/h).

Cruise control will not work if your parking brake is set,

or if the master cylinder brake ﬂuid level is low.

If you apply your brakes, the cruise control will shut off.

{CAUTION:

Cruise control can be dangerous where you

cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do

not use your cruise control on winding roads

or in heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery

roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire

traction can cause needless wheel spinning,

and you could lose control. Do not use cruise

control on slippery roads.

If your vehicle is in cruise control when the traction

control system (if equipped) begins to limit wheel spin,

the cruise control will automatically disengage. See

Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-9. When road

conditions allow you to safely use it again, you may

turn cruise control back on.

3-11

Setting Cruise Control

{CAUTION:

If you leave your cruise control on when you

are not using cruise, you might hit a button

and go into cruise when you do not want to.

You could be startled and even lose control.

Keep the cruise control switch off until you

want to use cruise control.

1. Move the cruise control switch to on.

2. Get up to the speed you want.

3. Press in the set button at the end of the lever and

release it.

4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.

The cruise symbol on the

instrument panel will

illuminate when the cruise

control is engaged.

Resuming a Set Speed

Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed

and then you apply the brake. This, of course,

disengages the cruise control. But you don’t need to

reset it.

Once you’re going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more,

you can move the cruise control switch brieﬂy from on

to resume/accelerate.

You’ll go right back up to your chosen speed and

stay there.

If you hold the switch at resume/accelerate the vehicle

will keep going faster until you release the switch or

apply the brake. So unless you want to go faster, don’t

hold the switch at resume/accelerate.

3-12

Increasing Speed While Using Cruise

Control

There are two ways to go to a higher speed:

• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher

speed. Press the set button at the end of the lever,

then release the button and the accelerator pedal.

You’ll now cruise at the higher speed. If the

accelerator pedal is held longer than 60 seconds,

cruise control will turn off.

• Move the cruise switch from on to

resume/accelerate. Hold it there until you get up to

the speed you want, and then release the switch.

To increase your speed in very small amounts,

move the switch brieﬂy to resume/accelerate.

Each time you do this, your vehicle will go about

1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.

Reducing Speed While Using Cruise

Control

•

Press and hold the set button until you reach the

lower speed you want, then release it.

• To slow down in very small amounts, brieﬂy press

the set button. Each time you do this, you’ll go

about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.

Passing Another Vehicle While Using

Cruise Control

Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.

When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will

slow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.

Using Cruise Control on Hills

How well your cruise control will work on hills depends

upon your speed, load and the steepness of the

hills. When going up steep hills, you may want to step

on the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed.

When going downhill, you may have to brake or shift to

a lower gear to keep your speed down. Of course,

applying the brake takes you out of cruise control.

Many drivers ﬁnd this to be too much trouble and don’t

use cruise control on steep hills.

Ending Cruise Control

To turn off the cruise control, do one of the following:

• Step lightly on the brake pedal.

• Move the cruise control switch to off.

• Lightly tap or press the clutch, if you have a

manual transmission.

Erasing Speed Memory

When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition,

your cruise control set speed memory is erased.

3-13

Exterior Lamps

The control on the driver’s side of your instrument panel

operates the exterior lamps.

O(Exterior Lamps): Turn the knob, located to the

right of this symbol, to choose one of the four exterior

lamp positions.

9(Off): Turn the knob to this position to turn off all

exterior lamps including the DRLs.

AUTO: Turn the knob to this position to automatically

turn on the headlamps at normal brightness, together

with the following:

• Sidemarker Lamps

• Taillamps

• Parking Lamps

• Instrument Panel Lights

See Automatic Headlamp System on page 3-15 for

more information.

;(Parking Lamps): Turn the knob to this position to

turn on the parking lamps, together with the following:

• Sidemarker Lamps

• Taillamps

• License Plate Lamps

• Instrument Panel Lights

2(Headlamps): Turn the knob to this position to turn

on the headlamps, together with the previously listed

lamps and lights.

You can switch your headlamps from low to high beam

by pushing the turn signal/multifunction lever toward

the instrument panel.

3-14

Headlamps on Reminder

If a door is open, a reminder chime will sound when

your headlamps or parking lamps are manually turned

on and your key is out of the ignition. To turn off

the chime, turn the headlamp switch to off and then

back on. In the automatic mode, the headlamps turn off

once the ignition is in LOCK.

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for

others to see the front of your vehicle during the

day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving

conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the short

periods after dawn and before sunset. Fully functional

daytime running lamps are required on all vehicles

ﬁrst sold in Canada.

The DRL system will come on when the following

conditions are met:

• The ignition is on.

• The exterior lamps control is in AUTO.

• The transmission is not in PARK (P) if you have an

automatic transmission or the parking brake is not

set if you have a manual transmission.

• The light sensor determines it is daytime.

When the DRL are on, only your DRL lamps will be on.

The taillamps, sidemarkers and other lamps will not

be on. The instrument panel will not be lit up either.

When it begins to get dark, the automatic headlamp

system will switch from DRL to the headlamps.

As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular

headlamp system when you need it.

Automatic Headlamp System

When it is dark enough outside, your automatic

headlamp system will turn on your headlamps at the

normal brightness along with other lamps such as

the taillamps, sidemarker, parking lamps, roof marker

lamps and the instrument panel lights. The radio

lights will also be dim.

Your vehicle has a light sensor located on the top of the

instrument panel. Be sure it is not covered, or the

system will be on whenever the ignition is on.

The system may also turn on your headlamps when

driving through a parking garage, heavy overcast

weather or a tunnel. This is normal.

3-15

There is a delay in the transition between the daytime

and nighttime operation of the Daytime Running

Lamps (DRL) and the automatic headlamp system so

that driving under bridges or bright overhead street lights

does not affect the system. The DRL and automatic

headlamp system will only be affected when the

light sensor sees a change in lighting lasting longer than

the delay.

If you start your vehicle in a dark garage, the automatic

headlamp system will come on immediately. Once

you leave the garage, it will take approximately

one minute for the automatic headlamp system to

change to DRL if it is light outside. During that delay,

your instrument panel cluster may not be as bright

as usual. Make sure your instrument panel brightness

control is in the full bright position. See Instrument Panel

Brightness on page 3-17.

Fog Lamps

If your vehicle has fog lamps, you can use them for

better vision in foggy or misty conditions. Your parking

lamps and/or low-beam headlamps must be on for

your fog lamps to work.

The fog lamp button is

located near the exterior

lamps control.

Press the button to turn the fog lamps on while the

headlamps or parking lamps are on. Press the button

again to turn them off. An indicator light will glow in the

button when the fog lamps are on.

Remember, fog lamps alone will not give off as much

light as your headlamps. Never use your fog lamps

in the dark without turning on the headlamps.

The fog lamps will go off whenever your high-beam

headlamps come on. When the high beams go off, the

fog lamps will come on again.

3-16

Exterior Cargo Lamps

You can use the cargo lamps if you need more light in

the cargo area of your vehicle or in the top-box

storage units.

Press this button, located

on the driver side of the

instrument panel near

the exterior lamp control to

turn the cargo lamps on

and off. You must

have your dome lamps on

for your cargo lamps to

come on. See Dome Lamp

on page 3-17.

Interior Lamps

The thumbwheel for the interior lamps is located next to

the exterior lamps control. See Exterior Lamps on

page 3-14 for additional information on location.

Instrument Panel Brightness

D (Instrument Panel Lights): Turn the thumbwheel

up or down to brighten or dim the instrument panel

lights and the radio display. This will only work if

the headlamps or parking lamps are on. See Exterior

Lamps on page 3-14.

Dome Lamp

The dome lamp will come on when you open a door

and will slowly dim to off when all doors are closed.

You can also turn the dome lamp on manually by turning

the interior lamps thumbwheel all the way up. In this

position, the dome lamp will remain on whether a door

is opened or closed. See Interior Lamps on page 3-17

for additional information on location.

Dome Lamp Override

E (Dome Override): Press this button, located below

the exterior lamp control, to turn the dome lamp off

even when a door is opened. See Exterior Lamps on

page 3-14 for more information on location.

To return the lamp to automatic operation, press the

button again.

3-17

Exit Lighting

With exit lighting, the interior lamps will come on when

you remove the key from the ignition. The lamps will

not come on if the dome override button is pressed in.

Battery Run-Down Protection

This feature shuts off the dome lamp if it is left on for

more than 20 minutes when the ignition is in LOCK.

This will keep your battery from running down.

Accessory Power Outlets

Your vehicle may have accessory power outlets.

With accessory power outlets you can plug in auxiliary

electrical equipment such as a cellular telephone or

CB radio.

Your vehicle may have two accessory power outlets

located on the lower part of the instrument panel below

the climate control system and there may be one

located on the rear of the center console. A small cap

must be pulled down to access an accessory power

outlet. When not using an outlet be sure to cover it with

the protective cap.

Notice: Leaving electrical equipment on for

extended periods will drain the battery. Always turn

off electrical equipment when not in use and do

not plug in equipment that exceeds the maximum

amperage rating.

Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible

with the accessory power outlet and could result

in blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a

problem, see your dealer for additional information

on accessory power outlets.

Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to your

vehicle may damage it or keep other components

from working as they should. The repairs would not

be covered by your warranty. Check with your

dealer before adding electrical equipment.

When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow the

proper installation instructions included with the

equipment.

Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause

damage not covered by your warranty. Do not

hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket

from the plug because the power outlets are

designed for accessory power plugs only.

3-18

Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter

Your vehicle may have an ashtray and cigarette lighter.

Your ashtray is located at the front of your center

console area. The ashtray can be removed for cleaning.

When the ashtray is removed, this area can also be

used as a cupholder.

Notice: If you put papers or other ﬂammable items

in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other smoking

materials could ignite them and possibly damage

your vehicle. Never put ﬂammable items in the

ashtray.

To use the lighter, press it in all the way, and let go.

When it’s ready, it will pop back out by itself.

Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is

heating will not allow the lighter to back away from

the heating element when it is hot. Damage from

overheating may occur to the lighter or heating

element, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold a

cigarette lighter in while it is heating. Do not

use anything other than the cigarette lighter in the

heating element.

Climate Controls

Climate Control System

With this system you can control the heating, cooling,

and ventilation for your vehicle.

Temperature Knob

The left knob on the control panel is used to adjust the

temperature of the air in the vehicle. Turn the knob

clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease

the temperature.

Uplevel Climate Controls shown, Base similar

3-19

Fan Knob

(Fan): The center knob on the control panel is used

to control the fan speed. Turn the knob clockwise or

counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed.

If the knob is set on “0” (zero), some outside air will still

enter the vehicle and will be directed according to

the position of the mode knob.

Mode Knob

The right knob on the control panel is used to direct the

airﬂow inside your vehicle. Turn the knob to select

one of the following modes:

H (Vent): Select this mode to direct air to the

instrument panel outlets.

\(Bi-Level): Select this mode to direct approximately

half of the air to the instrument panel outlets, and the

remaining air to the ﬂoor outlets and the defroster

and side window outlets. Cooler air is directed to the

upper outlets and warmer air to the ﬂoor outlets.

[ (Floor): Select this mode to direct air to the ﬂoor

outlets. Enabling recirculation in heat mode may

cause interior window fogging under some conditions.

If this occurs, see “Defogging and Defrosting” following.

Mode Buttons

(Recirculation): If your vehicle has air

conditioning, you will have the recirculation feature.

This mode recirculates air inside the cabin, and prevents

outside air from coming in the vehicle. It can be used

to prevent outside odors from entering your vehicle and

cool the air inside your vehicle more quickly. Press this

button to turn the recirculation mode on or off.

An indicator light on the button will come on to let you

know the recirculation mode is activated.

Recirculation is available in the bi-level, vent and ﬂoor

(heat) modes. It should only be used while in bi-level

and vent modes. Recirculation is not available, and

the light will not come on, while in ﬂoor/defog or

defrost modes.

#(Air Conditioning): Your vehicle may have air

conditioning. Press this button to turn the air-conditioning

system on or off. An indicator light on the button will

come on to let you know the air conditioning is activated.

When the system is on, this setting cools and

dehumidiﬁes the air entering your vehicle.

The air conditioning will not function if the fan is

turned off.

You may notice a slight change in engine performance

when the air conditioning compressor shuts off and

turns on again. This is normal. The system is designed

3-20

to make adjustments to help with fuel economy while

still maintaining the selected temperature.

The air conditioning system removes moisture from the

air, so you may sometimes notice a small amount of

water dripping underneath your vehicle while idling

or after turning off the engine. This is normal.

Defogging and Defrosting

Fog on the inside of windows is a result of high humidity

(moisture) condensing on the cool window glass.

This can be minimized if the climate control system is

used properly. There are two modes to clear fog or frost

from your windshield and side windows. Use the

defog mode to clear the windows of fog or moisture and

warm the passengers. Use the defrost mode to

remove fog or frost from the windshield more quickly.

For best results, clear all snow and ice from the

windshield before defrosting.

Turn the mode knob on the climate control panel

clockwise to select the defog or defrost modes.

/(Floor/Defog): This mode directs the air to the

windshield, the side window outlets, and to the

ﬂoor outlets. When you select this mode, the system

runs the air conditioning compressor unless the outside

temperature is near freezing or below. Recirculation

is not available in this mode.

0 (Defrost): This mode directs most of the air to the

windshield, and the side window outlets. When you

select this mode, the system runs the air conditioning

compressor unless the outside temperature is near,

or below freezing. Recirculation is not available in

this mode.

Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.

Outlet Adjustment

Use the thumbwheel on the outlets to change the

direction of the air ﬂow.

Lift up or push down on the thumbwheel located in the

center of the outlet to direct the air up or down, or

slide the thumbwheel to the left or right to direct the

airﬂow from side-to-side.

Operation Tips

•

Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the air

inlets at the base of the windshield that may

block the ﬂow of air into your vehicle.

• Use of non-GM approved hood deﬂectors may

adversely affect the performance of the system.

• Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects

to help circulate the air inside of your vehicle more

effectively.

3-21

Warning Lights, Gages,

and Indicators

This part describes the warning lights and gages that

may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you

locate them.

Warning lights and gages can signal that something is

wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause

an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to

your warning lights and gages could also save you

or others from injury.

Warning lights come on when there may be or is a

problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you

will see in the details on the next few pages, some

warning lights come on brieﬂy when you start the

engine just to let you know they are working. If you are

familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed

when this happens.

Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem

with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages

and warning lights work together to let you know when

there is a problem with your vehicle.

When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on

when you are driving, or when one of the gages

shows there may be a problem, check the section

that tells you what to do about it. Please follow this

manual’s advice. Waiting to do repairs can be

costly — and even dangerous. So please get to know

your warning lights and gages. They are a big help.

Your vehicle may also have a DIC that works along with

the warning lights and gages. See Driver Information

Center (DIC) on page 3-37 for more information.

3-22

Instrument Panel Cluster

Your instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You will know

how fast you are going, about how much fuel you have used, and many other things you will need to know to drive

safely and economically.

United States automatic transmission version shown, Canada similar

3-23

Speedometer and Odometer

Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both

miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).

Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has

been driven, in either miles (used in the United States)

or kilometers (used in Canada).

The odometer mileage can be checked without the

vehicle running. Simply press the trip information stem.

See “Odometer” under DIC Controls and Displays

on page 3-37 for more information.

You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs a

new odometer installed. If the new one can be set to

the mileage total of the old odometer, then it must

be. But if it cannot, then it is set at zero, and a label

must be put on the driver’s door to show the old mileage

reading when the new odometer was installed.

Trip Odometer

Your vehicle has a trip odometer that can tell you how

far your vehicle has been driven since you last set

the trip odometer to zero.

See “Trip Odometer” under DIC Controls and Displays

on page 3-37 for more information.

Tachometer

The tachometer displays the engine speed in revolutions

per minute (rpm).

Notice: If you operate the engine with the

tachometer in the shaded warning area, your vehicle

could be damaged, and the damages would not

be covered by your warranty. Do not operate

the engine with the tachometer in the shaded

warning area.

Safety Belt Reminder Light

When the key is turned to ON or START, a chime will

be provided for several seconds to remind people

to buckle their safety belts. The driver safety belt light

will also be provided and stay on for several seconds,

then it will ﬂash for several more. You should buckle

your seat belt.

This chime and light will be

repeated if the driver

remains unbuckled and the

vehicle is in motion.

If the driver’s belt is buckled, neither the chime nor the

light will be provided.

3-24

Airbag Readiness Light

There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument

panel, which shows the airbag symbol. The system

checks the airbag’s electrical system for malfunctions.

The light tells you if there is an electrical problem.

The system check includes the airbag sensors, the

airbag modules, the wiring and the crash sensing and

diagnostic module. For more information on the

airbag systems, see Airbag System on page 1-61.

This light will come on

when you start your

vehicle, and it will ﬂash

for a few seconds.

Then the light should go

out. This means the

system is ready.

If the airbag readiness light stays on after you start

the vehicle or comes on when you are driving,

your airbag system may not work properly. Have your

vehicle serviced right away.

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light stays on after you

start your vehicle, it means the airbag system

may not be working properly. The airbags in

your vehicle may not inﬂate in a crash, or they

could even inﬂate without a crash. To help

avoid injury to yourself or others, have your

vehicle serviced right away if the airbag

readiness light stays on after you start your

vehicle.

The airbag readiness light should ﬂash for a few

seconds when you turn the ignition key to ON. If the

light does not come on then, have it ﬁxed so it will

be ready to warn you if there is a problem.

3-25

Airbag Off Light

Regular Cab Models and Extended Cab

Models without Rear Seats

When you turn the airbag off switch to the off position,

the off indictor will come on and stay on to remind

you that the airbag has been turned off. When you

turn the airbag off switch to the on position, the

on indicator will come on. See Airbag Off Switch on

page 1-71 for more on this, including important safety

information.

{CAUTION:

If the right front passenger’s frontal airbag is

turned off for a person who is not in a risk

group identiﬁed by the national government,

that person will not have the extra protection

of an airbag. In a crash, the frontal airbag

would not be able to inﬂate and help protect

the person sitting there.

Do not turn off the right front passenger’s

frontal airbag unless the person sitting there

is in a risk group identiﬁed by the national

government. See Airbag Off Switch on

page 1-71 for more on this, including important

safety information.

United States

Canada

3-26

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light ever comes on

when you have turned off the airbag, it means

that something may be wrong with the airbag

system. The right front passenger’s frontal

airbag could inﬂate even though the switch is

off. If this ever happens, do not let anyone

whom the national government has identiﬁed

as a member of a passenger airbag risk group

sit in the right front passenger’s position

(for example, do not secure a rear-facing child

restraint in the right front passenger’s seat)

until you have your vehicle serviced.

Battery Warning Light

This light will come on

brieﬂy when you start the

vehicle, as a check to

show you it is working;

then it should go out.

If it stays on, or comes on while you are driving, you

may have a problem with the electrical charging system.

Have it checked right away. Driving while this light is

on could drain your battery and result in a vehicle that

may stall. See DIC Warnings and Messages on

page 3-41 for more information.

If you must drive a short distance with the light on, be

certain to turn off all your accessories, such as the radio

and climate control system.

3-27

Up-Shift Light

(Manual Transmission)

This light appears when

you need to shift to the

next higher gear on

a manual transmission

vehicle.

Shifting when the indicator light is on will help you get

the best fuel economy. See “Up-Shift Light” under

Manual Transmission Operation on page 2-24 for

more information.

Brake System Warning Light

Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into

two parts. If one part is not working, the other part can

still work and stop you. For good braking, though,

you need both parts working well.

If the warning light comes on, there could be a brake

problem. Have your brake system inspected right away.

This light should come on brieﬂy when you turn the

ignition key to ON. If it does not come on then,

have it ﬁxed so it will be ready to warn you if there is

a problem.

United States Canada

3-28

When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light

will also come on when you set your parking brake.

See Parking Brake on page 2-29 for more information.

The light will stay on if your parking brake does not

release fully. If it stays on after your parking brake is

fully released, it means you have a brake problem.

If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the

road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is

harder to push, or the pedal may go closer to the

ﬂoor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on,

have the vehicle towed for service. See Towing

Your Vehicle on page 4-50.

{CAUTION:

Your brake system may not be working properly

if the brake system warning light is on. Driving

with the brake system warning light on can lead

to an accident. If the light is still on after you

have pulled off the road and stopped carefully,

have the vehicle towed for service.

Anti-Lock Brake System

Warning Light

With the anti-lock brake

system, this light will come

on brieﬂy when you

start your engine to show it

is working. Then it will

turn off. This is normal.

If the light stays on, or comes on when you’re driving,

your vehicle needs service. If the regular brake

system warning light isn’t on, you still have brakes, but

you don’t have anti-lock brakes. If the regular brake

system warning light is also on, you don’t have anti-lock

brakes and there’s a problem with your regular brakes.

See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-28.

The anti-lock brake system warning light should come

on brieﬂy when you turn the ignition key to ON. If

the light doesn’t come on then, have it ﬁxed so it will be

ready to warn you if there is a problem.

3-29

Engine Coolant Temperature Gage

This gage shows the

engine coolant

temperature.

If the gage pointer is near the top of the gage, the

engine is too hot. It means that your engine coolant has

overheated. If you have been operating your vehicle

under normal driving conditions, you should pull off the

road, stop your vehicle and turn off the engine as

soon as possible.

See Engine Overheating on page 5-28 for more

information.

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Check Engine Light

Your vehicle is equipped

with a computer which

monitors operation of the

fuel, ignition, and emission

control systems.

This system is called OBD II (On-Board Diagnostics-

Second Generation) and is intended to assure that

emissions are at acceptable levels for the life of

the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner environment.

The check engine light comes on to indicate that

there is a problem and service is required. Malfunctions

often will be indicated by the system before any

problem is apparent. This may prevent more serious

damage to your vehicle. This system is also designed to

assist your service technician in correctly diagnosing

any malfunction.

3-30

Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with this

light on, after awhile, your emission controls

may not work as well, your fuel economy may not

be as good, and your engine may not run as

smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that may

not be covered by your warranty.

Notice: Modiﬁcations made to the engine,

transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of

your vehicle or the replacement of the original tires

with other than those of the same Tire Performance

Criteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission

controls and may cause this light to come on.

Modiﬁcations to these systems could lead to costly

repairs not covered by your warranty. This may

also result in a failure to pass a required Emission

Inspection/Maintenance test.

This light should come on, as a check to show you it is

working, when the ignition is on and the engine is

not running. If the light does not come on, have it

repaired. This light will also come on during a

malfunction in one of two ways:

• Light Flashing — A misﬁre condition has been

detected. A misﬁre increases vehicle emissions

and may damage the emission control system on

your vehicle. Diagnosis and service may be

required.

• Light On Steady — An emission control system

malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.

Diagnosis and service may be required.

3-31

If the Light is Flashing

The following may prevent more serious damage to

your vehicle:

• Reducing vehicle speed

• Avoiding hard accelerations

• Avoiding steep uphill grades

• If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of

cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible

If the light stops ﬂashing and remains on steady,

see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.

If the light continues to ﬂash, when it is safe to do so,

stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.

Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart

the engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If the

Light Is On Steady” following. If the light is still ﬂashing,

follow the previous steps, and see your dealer for

service as soon as possible.

If the Light Is On Steady

You may be able to correct the emission system

malfunction by considering the following:

Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?

If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully

install the cap. See Filling Your Tank on page 5-8.

The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has

been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing

fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.

A few driving trips with the cap properly installed

should turn the light off.

Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?

If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition

will usually be corrected when the electrical system

dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.

3-32

Have you recently changed brands of fuel?

If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel.

See Gasoline Octane on page 5-5. Poor fuel quality will

cause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed.

You may notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling

when you put the vehicle into gear, misﬁring, hesitation

on acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration. (These

conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)

This will be detected by the system and cause the

light to turn on.

If you experience one or more of these conditions,

change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least

one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.

If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,

your dealer can check the vehicle. Your dealer has

the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to ﬁx

any mechanical or electrical problems that may

have developed.

Emissions Inspection and

Maintenance Programs

Some state/provincial and local governments have or

may begin programs to inspect the emission control

equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this

inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle

registration.

Here are some things you need to know to help your

vehicle pass an inspection:

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check

engine light is on or not working properly.

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD

(on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical

emission control systems have not been completely

diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be

considered not ready for inspection. This can happen if

you have recently replaced your battery or if your

battery has run down. The diagnostic system is

designed to evaluate critical emission control systems

during normal driving. This may take several days

of routine driving. If you have done this and your vehicle

still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD

system readiness, your GM dealer can prepare the

vehicle for inspection.

3-33

Oil Pressure Light

{CAUTION:

Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low.

If you do, your engine can become so hot that

it catches ﬁre. You or others could be burned.

Check your oil as soon as possible and have

your vehicle serviced.

Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance

may damage the engine. The repairs would not be

covered by your warranty. Always follow the

maintenance schedule in this manual for changing

engine oil.

This light tells you if there

could be a problem with

your engine oil pressure.

The light goes on when you turn your key to ON or

START. It goes off once you start your engine. That’s a

check to be sure the light works. If it doesn’t come

on, be sure to have it ﬁxed so it will be there to warn

you if something goes wrong.

When the light comes on and stays on, it means that oil

isn’t ﬂowing through your engine properly. You could

be low on oil and you might have some other system

problem. See Engine Oil on page 5-13 and “OIL” under

DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-41 for more

information.

3-34

Security Light

This light will come on

brieﬂy when you turn the

key to START. The light

will stay on until the

engine starts.

If the ignition is turned on, and the light ﬂashes, the

Passlock

system has entered a tamper mode. If the

vehicle fails to start, see Passlock

on page 2-16.

If the light comes on continuously while driving and stays

on, there may be a problem with the Passlock

system. Your vehicle will not be protected by Passlock

and you should see your dealer.

Also, see Content Theft-Deterrent on page 2-14 for

additional information regarding the security light.

Cruise Control Light

This light comes on

whenever you set your

cruise control.

The light will go out when the cruise control is turned

off. See Cruise Control on page 3-11 for more

information.

Highbeam On Light

This light comes on

whenever the high-beam

headlamps are on.

See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-9

for more information.

3-35

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)

Indicator Light

This light turns on

whenever the Daytime

Running Lamps are on.

See Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) on page 3-15 for

more information.

Fuel Gage

When the ignition is on,

the fuel gage tells you

about how much fuel you

have remaining in the

fuel tank.

Here are four things that some owners ask about.

None of these indicate a problem with your fuel gage:

• At the gas station, the gas pump shuts off before

the gage reads full.

• It takes a little more or less fuel to ﬁll up than the

gage indicated. For example, the gage may have

indicated the tank was half full, but it actually took a

little more or less than half the tank’s capacity to

ﬁll the tank.

• The gage moves a little when you turn a corner or

speed up.

• The gage does not go back to empty when you turn

off the ignition.

When the fuel in the fuel tank is low, you will see a

LOW FUEL message on the Driver Information

Center (DIC) display. See DIC Warnings and Messages

on page 3-41 for more information.

3-36

Driver Information Center (DIC)

The DIC display is located on the instrument panel

cluster. The DIC can display information such as the

trip odometer and personalization features.

DIC Controls and Displays

The Driver Information Center (DIC) comes on when the

ignition is on. After a short delay, the DIC will display

the information that was last displayed before the engine

was turned off.

If a problem is detected, a warning message will appear

on the display. Pressing and releasing the trip odometer

reset stem on the DIC will acknowledge some current

warnings or service messages. Some messages will only

clear once the required action has been taken.

The DIC has different modes which can be accessed by

pressing the trip odometer reset stem on the DIC.

These modes are explained following. The DIC trip

odometer reset stem is located on the instrument panel

cluster next to the DIC display. To scroll through the

available functions, press and release the reset stem.

Trip Information

Odometer

The odometer is automatically displayed on the DIC

when you start the vehicle. The odometer shows

the total distance the vehicle has been driven in either

miles or kilometers.

Trip Odometer

Press and release the reset stem until TRIP appears

on the DIC display. This shows the current distance

traveled since the last reset of the trip odometer in either

miles or kilometers.

Press and hold the reset stem for approximately four

seconds to reset the trip odometer.

3-37

Engine Oil Life System

Press the reset stem until OIL LIFE RESET appears

(alternating between OIL LIFE and RESET) on the

DIC display. The engine oil life system calculates an

estimate of the oil’s remaining useful life. The CHANGE

OIL message will alert you to change your oil on a

schedule consistent with your driving conditions.

Always reset the OIL LIFE message after an oil change.

To reset the message, see Engine Oil Life System on

page 5-16.

In addition to the engine oil life system monitoring the

oil life, additional maintenance is recommended in

the Maintenance Schedule in this manual. See Engine

Oil on page 5-13 and Scheduled Maintenance on

page 6-4 for more information.

Automatic Door Locks

This feature allows you to program your door locks to a

preferred setting.

To set your choice for this feature, perform the

following steps:

1. With the engine off, turn the key to LOCK.

2. Press and hold the power door lock button for

approximately three seconds until the DIC

display shows the current door lock mode.

3. To view the next available mode, press and hold

the reset stem for approximately two seconds.

Release the reset stem and press and hold again

to view each mode.

4. Once the desired mode is shown on the DIC

display, brieﬂy press the reset stem to set your

choice. The DIC display will then clear.

3-38

The following are the available modes:

Lock 1 (default): On vehicles with an automatic

transmission, this mode locks all of the doors when the

vehicle is shifted out of PARK (P) and unlocks all of

the doors when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).

On vehicles with a manual transmission, this mode locks

all of the doors when the vehicle speed is greater

than 15 mph (24 km/h) and unlocks all of the doors

when the key is removed from the ignition.

Lock 2: On vehicles with an automatic transmission,

this mode locks all of the doors when the vehicle

is shifted out of PARK (P) and unlocks the driver’s door

when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).

On vehicles with a manual transmission, this mode

locks all of the doors when the vehicle speed is greater

than 15 mph (24 km/h) and unlocks the driver’s door

when the key is removed from the ignition.

Lock 3: On vehicles with an automatic transmission,

this mode locks all of the doors when the vehicle

is shifted out of PARK (P). The doors will not

automatically unlock.

On vehicles with a manual transmission, this mode

locks all of the doors when the vehicle speed is

greater than 15 mph (24 km/h). The doors will not

automatically unlock.

Remote Keyless Entry Feedback

This feature allows you to program your remote keyless

entry feedback to a preferred setting.

To set your choice for this feature, perform the

following steps:

1. With the engine off, turn the key to LOCK.

2. Press and hold the lock and unlock buttons on the

remote keyless entry transmitter at the same time.

Hold both buttons until the DIC display shows

the current remote keyless entry feedback mode.

3. To view the next available mode, press and hold

the reset stem for approximately two seconds.

Release the reset stem and press and hold again to

view each mode.

4. Once the desired mode is shown on the DIC

display, brieﬂy press the reset stem to set your

choice. The DIC display will then clear.

3-39

The following are the available modes:

RFA 1 (default): This mode ﬂashes the parking lamps

when you press the lock or unlock buttons on the

remote keyless entry transmitter.

RFA 2: This mode ﬂashes the parking lamps and

sounds the horn when you press the lock button on the

remote keyless entry transmitter. This mode also

ﬂashes the parking lamps when you press the unlock

button on the remote keyless entry transmitter.

RFA 3: This mode ﬂashes the parking lamps and

sounds the horn when you press the lock or unlock

buttons on the remote keyless entry transmitter.

RFA 4: This mode disables remote keyless entry

feedback. There will be no feedback when you press

the lock or unlock buttons on the remote keyless

entry transmitter.

Language

This feature allows you to choose the language in which

the DIC display will show information.

To set your choice for this feature, perform the

following steps:

1. With the engine off, turn the key to ON.

2. Press and release the reset stem until the language

is shown on the DIC display.

3. To view the next available language, press and

hold the reset stem for approximately two seconds.

Release the reset stem and press and hold

again to view each language. You can choose from

English (default), Spanish (United States only) or

French (Canada only).

4. Once the desired language is shown on the

DIC display, brieﬂy press the reset stem to set

your choice.

3-40

DIC Warnings and Messages

Warning messages are displayed on the DIC to notify

the driver that the status of the vehicle has changed and

that some action may be needed by the driver to

correct the condition. More than one message may

appear at one time. They will appear one after the other.

The messages are displayed for three seconds each.

Some messages may not require immediate action

but you should press and release the trip odometer reset

stem to acknowledge that you received the message

and clear it from the display. Each message must

be acknowledged individually. Some messages cannot

be cleared from the display because they are more

urgent. These messages require action before they can

be removed from the DIC display. The following are

the possible messages that can be displayed and some

information about them.

AC (Air Conditioning) OFF

This message will be displayed when the engine coolant

temperature is too high and the air conditioning in

your vehicle needs to be turned off. See Engine

Overheating on page 5-28 and Climate Control System

on page 3-19 for more information. It will be displayed

along with the ENG HOT message.

ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System)

This message will be displayed if there is a problem

with your anti-lock brake system. Check your anti-lock

brake system as soon as possible and have your vehicle

serviced by your GM dealer. See Brakes on page 5-37

and Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light on

page 3-29 for more information. Press and release the

reset stem to acknowledge the message and clear

it from the DIC display.

BATTERY

This message will be displayed when there is a problem

with your vehicle’s battery. See Battery on page 5-40

and Battery Warning Light on page 3-27 for more

information.

BRAKES

This message will be displayed if there is a problem

with your brakes. Check your brakes as soon as

possible and have your vehicle serviced by your

GM dealer. See Brakes on page 5-37 and Brake System

Warning Light on page 3-28 for more information.

Press and release the reset stem to acknowledge the

message and clear it from the DIC display.

3-41

CHANGE OIL

This message will be displayed when the oil needs to

be changed. Check the oil in your vehicle as soon

as possible and have your vehicle serviced by your

GM dealer. See Engine Oil on page 5-13 and Scheduled

Maintenance on page 6-4 for more information. Press

the reset stem to acknowledge the message and clear it

from the display.

DOORS

This message will be displayed on your DIC when one

or more of your doors is ajar. You should check all

the doors on your vehicle to make sure they are closed.

The message will clear from the display after all of

the doors are closed.

ENG (Engine) HOT

This message will be displayed when your engine

coolant temperature is hot. Check your engine coolant

temperature gage. See Engine Coolant Temperature

Gage on page 3-30 for more information. You should

have your vehicle serviced by your GM dealer as soon

as possible if you suspect your engine is overheating.

See Engine Overheating on page 5-28 for more

information.

FLUID

This message will be displayed if your brake ﬂuid is low.

Check the brake ﬂuid as soon as possible and have

your vehicle serviced by your GM dealer. See Brakes on

page 5-37 for more information. Press the reset stem

to acknowledge the message and clear it from the

DIC display.

FUEL CAP

This message will be displayed if your vehicle’s fuel cap

is either off or loose. You should pull over and check

to see if your vehicle’s fuel cap is secure as soon

as possible. You may also see the check engine light

on the instrument panel cluster. See Malfunction

Indicator Lamp on page 3-30 for more information.

Press the reset stem to acknowledge the message and

clear it from the display.

LOW FUEL

This message will be displayed if the level of fuel in

your vehicle is low. You should also check your

fuel gage. See Fuel Gage on page 3-36 for more

information. You should ﬁll your vehicle’s tank as soon

as possible.

3-42

LOW TRAC (Traction)

If you have the Traction Control System (TCS), you will

see this message when a low traction condition is

detected. See Traction Control System (TCS) on

page 4-9 for more information. Press and release the

reset stem to acknowledge the message and clear it

from the DIC display.

OIL

This message will be displayed when your oil pressure

is low. See Oil Pressure Light on page 3-34 and

Engine Oil on page 5-13 for more information.

OIL LIFE

This message will be displayed when you need to check

your engine oil life system. Press the reset stem to

acknowledge the message. For more information,

see “Engine Oil Life System” under DIC Controls and

Displays on page 3-37, Engine Oil on page 5-13

and Engine Oil Life System on page 5-16.

PARK BRK (Brake)

This message will be displayed when your vehicle’s

parking brake is active. See Parking Brake on page 2-29

and Brake System Warning Light on page 3-28 for

more information. The message will clear from

the display after the parking brake is released.

REDUCED POWER

This message will be displayed when your vehicle’s

engine power is reduced. Press the reset stem to

acknowledge the message and clear it from the display.

SERV (Service) 4WD

(Four-Wheel Drive)

This message will be displayed when there is a problem

with your transfer case control system. Check the

transfer case on your vehicle and have it serviced by

your GM dealer. See Four-Wheel Drive on page 2-26 for

more information about your transfer case. Press the

reset stem to acknowledge the message and clear

it from the display.

3-43

TRACTION FAULT

If you have the Traction Control System (TCS),

you may see this message if there is a problem with

your Traction Control System (TCS). Check your TCS

as soon as possible and have your vehicle serviced

by your GM dealer. See Traction Control System (TCS)

on page 4-9 for more information. Press the reset

stem to acknowledge the message and clear it from

the display.

SERV VEH (Service Vehicle)

This message will be displayed if your vehicle needs

service. You should have your vehicle serviced by your

GM dealer as soon as possible.

TURN SIGNAL

This message will be displayed when your turn signal

is on for approximately 0.75 miles (1.2 km) of travel.

Press the reset stem to acknowledge the message and

clear it from the display.

Audio System(s)

Notice: Before adding any sound equipment to

your vehicle, like a tape player, CB radio, mobile

telephone, or two-way radio, make sure that it can

be added by checking with your dealer. Also,

check federal rules covering mobile radio and

telephone units. If sound equipment can be added,

it is very important to do it properly. Added sound

equipment may interfere with the operation of

your vehicle’s engine, radio, or other systems, and

even damage them. Your vehicle’s systems may

interfere with the operation of sound equipment that

has been added improperly.

Figure out which audio system is in your vehicle, ﬁnd

out what your audio system can do, and how to operate

all of its controls.

Setting the Time for Radios without

Radio Data Systems (RDS)

Press and hold HR until the correct hour appears on the

display. Press and hold MIN until the correct minute

appears on the display. There is an initial two-second

delay before the clock goes into time-set mode.

Display the time with the ignition off, by pressing RCL,

HR, or MIN.

3-44

Setting the Time for Radios with

Radio Data Systems (RDS)

The radio may have a button marked with an H or HR

to represent hours and an M or MN to represent

minutes.

Press and hold the hour button until the correct hour

appears on the display. Press and hold the minute

button until the correct minute appears on the display.

The time can be set with the ignition on or off.

To synchronize the time with an FM station broadcasting

Radio Data System (RDS) information, press and

hold the hour and minute buttons at the same time until

RDS TIME appears on the display. To accept this

time, press and hold the hour and minute buttons, at the

same time, for another two seconds. If the time is not

available from the station, NO UPDAT will appear

on the display.

RDS time is broadcast once a minute. After tuning to an

RDS broadcast station, it may take a few minutes for

the time to update.

AM-FM Radio

Playing the Radio

PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system

on and off.

VOL (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to

decrease the volume.

RCL (Recall): Press this knob to switch the display

between the radio station frequency and the time.

When the ignition is off, press this knob to display

the time.

3-45

Finding a Station

AM FM: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,

or AM. The display will show the selection.

TUNE: Turn this knob to select radio stations.

o SEEK p: Press the right or the left arrow to go to

the next or to the previous station and stay there.

To scan stations, press and hold either SEEK arrow for

two seconds until you hear a beep. The radio will go

to a station, play for a few seconds, then go on to

the next station. Press either SEEK arrow again to

stop scanning.

To scan preset stations, press and hold either SEEK

arrow for more than four seconds until you hear

two beeps. The radio will go to the ﬁrst preset station

stored on the pushbuttons, play for a few seconds, then

go on to the next preset station. Press either SEEK

arrow again to stop scanning presets.

The radio will only seek and scan stations with a strong

signal that are in the selected band.

Setting Preset Stations

Up to 18 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM)

can be programmed on the six numbered pushbuttons,

by performing the following steps:

1. Turn the radio on.

2. Press AM FM to select FM1, FM2, or AM.

3. Tune in the desired station.

4. Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons

until you hear a beep. Whenever that numbered

pushbutton is pressed, the station that was set

will return.

5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.

Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)

AUDIO: To adjust bass and treble, press and release

AUDIO until BAS or TRE appears on the display.

Then press and hold the up or the down arrow to

increase or to decrease. If a station is weak or noisy,

decrease the treble.

To adjust bass or treble to the middle position, select

BAS or TRE. Then press and hold AUDIO for more than

two seconds until you hear a beep. B and a zero or T

and a zero will appear on the display.

3-46

To adjust both tone controls and both speaker controls

to the middle position, ﬁrst end out of audio mode

by pressing another button, causing the radio to perform

that function or by waiting ﬁve seconds for the display

to return to time of day. Then press and hold AUDIO for

more than two seconds until you hear a beep. CEN will

appear on the display.

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)

AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the right

and the left speakers, press and release AUDIO until

BAL appears on the display. Then press and hold the up

or the down arrow to move the sound toward the right

or the left speakers.

To adjust the fade between the front and the rear

speakers, press and release AUDIO until FAD appears

on the display. Then press and hold the up or the

down arrow to move the sound toward the front or the

rear speakers.

To adjust balance or fade to the middle position, select

BAL or FAD. Then press and hold AUDIO for more

than two seconds until you hear a beep. L (balance) and

a zero or F and a zero will appear on the display.

To adjust both tone controls and both speaker controls

to the middle position, ﬁrst end out of audio mode

by pressing another button, causing the radio to perform

that function or by waiting ﬁve seconds for the display

to return to time of day. Then press and hold AUDIO for

more than two seconds until you hear a beep. CEN will

appear on the display.

Fade may not be available if the vehicle is a regular

cab model.

Radio Messages

CAL (Calibrated): The audio system has been

calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If CAL

appears on the display it means that the radio has not

been conﬁgured properly for your vehicle and must

be returned to your GM dealer for service.

LOC (Locked): This message is displayed when the

THEFTLOCK

system has locked up. Take the vehicle

to your GM dealer for service.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be

corrected, contact your GM dealer.

3-47

Radio with CD (MP3)

Radio Data System (RDS)

The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).

RDS features are available for use only on FM stations

that broadcast RDS information.

With RDS, the radio can do the following:

• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of

programming

• Receive announcements concerning local and

national emergencies

• Display messages from radio stations

• Seek to stations with traffic announcements

This system relies upon receiving speciﬁc information

from these stations and will only work when the

information is available. In rare cases, a radio station

may broadcast incorrect information that will cause

the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,

contact the radio station.

While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, the station

name or call letters will appear on the display instead of

the frequency. RDS stations may also provide the time of

day, a program type (PTY) for current programming, and

the name of the program being broadcast.

3-48

XM™ Satellite Radio Service

XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the

48 contiguous United States. XM™ offers 100 coast to

coast channels including music, news, sports, talk, and

children’s programming. XM™ provides digital quality

audio and text information that includes song title and

artist name. A service fee is required in order to receive

the XM™ service. For more information, contact XM™ at

www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).

Playing the Radio

PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system

on and off.

o VOL p (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to

decrease the volume.

DISPL (Display): Press this knob to switch the display

between the radio station frequency and the time.

When the ignition is turned off, press this knob to display

the time.

For RDS, press the DISPL knob to change what

appears on the display while using RDS. The display

options are station name, RDS station frequency, PTY,

and the name of the program (if available).

For XM™ (if equipped), press the DISPL knob while in

XM™ mode to retrieve four different categories of

information related to the current song or channel:

Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY, Channel

Number/Channel Name.

To change the default on the display, press the DISPL

knob until you see the display you want, then hold

this knob for two seconds. The radio will produce one

beep and the selected display will now be the default.

AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): With automatic

volume, the audio system adjusts automatically to make

up for road and wind noise as you drive.

Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to

select LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH. AVOL will appear

on the display. Each higher setting will allow for more

volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds. Then as

you drive, automatic volume increases the volume,

as necessary, to overcome noise at any speed.

The volume level should always sound the same to you

as you drive. NONE will appear on the display if the

radio cannot determine the vehicle speed. To turn

automatic volume off, press this button until OFF

appears on the display.

3-49

Finding a Station

BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,

AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). The display will

show the selection.

o TUNE p: Turn this knob to select radio stations.

o SEEK p: Press the right or the left arrow to

go to the next or to the previous station and stay there.

The radio will only seek stations with a strong signal

that are in the selected band.

o SCAN p: Press and hold either arrow for more

than two seconds. SCAN will appear on the display and

the radio will produce one beep. The radio will go to

a station, play for a few seconds, then go on to the

next station. Press either arrow again or one of

the pushbuttons to stop scanning presets.

To scan preset stations, press and hold either arrow for

more than four seconds. PSCN will appear on the display

and the radio will produce one beep. The radio will go to a

preset station, play for a few seconds, then go on to the

next preset station. Press either arrow again or one of the

pushbuttons to stop scanning presets.

The radio will only scan stations with a strong signal that

are in the selected band.

Setting Preset Stations

Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,

six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can be programmed

on the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing the

following steps:

1. Turn the radio on.

2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1

or XM2.

3. Tune in the desired station.

4. Press AUTO EQ to select the equalization.

5. Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons

until you hear a beep. Whenever that numbered

pushbutton is pressed, the station that was set will

return and the equalization that was selected will be

stored for that pushbutton.

6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.

3-50

Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)

AUDIO: Push and release the AUDIO knob until BASS

or TREB appears on the display. Turn the knob to

increase or to decrease. The display will show the bass

or the treble level. If a station is weak or noisy,

decrease the treble.

To adjust the bass and the treble to the middle position,

push and hold the AUDIO knob. The radio will produce

one beep.

To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle

position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone

or speaker control is displayed. ALL will appear on

the display and you will hear a beep.

AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press this button

to select customized equalization settings designed

for country/western, jazz, talk, pop, rock, and classical.

To return the bass and treble to the manual mode,

push and release the AUDIO knob until MANUAL

appears on the display.

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)

AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the right

and the left speakers, push and release the AUDIO

knob until BAL appears on the display. Turn the knob to

move the sound toward the right or the left speakers.

To adjust the fade between the front and the rear

speakers, push and release the AUDIO knob until FADE

appears on the display. Turn the knob to move the

sound toward the front or the rear speakers.

To adjust the balance and the fade to the middle

position, push the AUDIO knob, then push it again and

hold it until you hear one beep.

To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle

position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone

or speaker control is displayed. ALL will appear on

the display and you will hear a beep.

3-51

Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station

(RDS and XM™)

To select and ﬁnd a desired PTY perform the following:

1. Press the P-TYPE knob to activate program

type select mode. TYPE and a PTY will appear on

the display.

2. Turn the P-TYPE knob to select a PTY.

3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press the

SEEK TYPE button to select and to take you to the

PTY’s ﬁrst station.

4. To go to another station within that PTY and the

PTY is displayed, press the SEEK TYPE button

once. If the PTY is not displayed, press the SEEK

TYPE button twice to display the PTY and then

to go to another station.

5. Press P-TYPE to exit program type select mode.

IF PTY times out and is no longer on the display,

go back to Step 1.

If both PTY and TRAF are on, the radio will search for

stations with the selected PTY and traffic announcements.

If the radio cannot ﬁnd the desired program type, NONE

will appear on the display and the radio will return to

the last station you were listening to.

BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency

allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the

same program type. To turn alternate frequency on,

press and hold BAND for two seconds. AF ON will

appear on the display. The radio may switch to stations

with a stronger frequency.

To turn alternate frequency off, press and hold BAND

again for two seconds. AF OFF will appear on the

display. The radio will not switch to other stations.

This function does not apply for XM™ Satellite

Radio Service.

RDS Messages

ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies.

When an alert announcement comes on the current

radio station, ALERT! will appear on the display. You will

hear the announcement, even if the volume is low or

a CD is playing. If a CD is playing, play will stop during

the announcement. Alert announcements cannot be

turned off.

ALERT! will not be affected by tests of the emergency

broadcast system. This feature is not supported by

all RDS stations.

3-52

INFO (Information): If the current station has a

message, the information symbol will appear on the

display. Press this button to see the message. The

message may display the artist, song title, call in phone

numbers, etc.

If the entire message is not displayed, parts of the

message will appear every three seconds. To scroll

through the message, press and release the INFO

button. A new group of words will appear on the display

after every press of this button. Once the complete

message has been displayed, the information symbol

will disappear from the display until another new

message is received. The last message can be

displayed by pressing the INFO button. You can view

the last message until a new message is received

or a different station is tuned to.

When a message is not available from a station,

NO INFO will appear on the display.

TRAF (Traffic): If TRAF appears on the display, the

tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements

and when a traffic announcement comes on the tuned

radio station you will hear it.

If the station does not broadcast traffic announcements,

press the TRAF button and the radio will seek to a

station that does. When a station that broadcasts traffic

announcements is found, the radio will stop seeking and

TRAF will appear on the display. If no station is found

that broadcasts traffic announcements, NO TRAF

will appear on the display.

If TRAF is on the display, press the TRAF button to turn

of the traffic announcements.

The radio will play the traffic announcement if the

volume is low. The radio will interrupt the play of a CD if

the last tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements.

This function does not apply to XM™ Satellite Radio

Service.

Radio Messages

CAL ERR (Calibration Error): The audio system has

been calibrated for your vehicle from the factory.

If CAL ERR appears on the display it means that the

radio has not been conﬁgured properly for your vehicle

and it must be returned to your GM dealer for service.

LOCKED: This message is displayed when the

THEFTLOCK

system has locked up. Take your vehicle

to your GM dealer for service.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be

corrected, contact your GM dealer.

3-53

XM™ Radio Messages

Radio Display

Message

Condition Action Required

XL (Explicit Language

Channels)

XL on the radio display,

after the channel name,

indicates content with

explicit language.

These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a

customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).

Updating Updating encryption code The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, and no

action is required. This process should take no longer than

30 seconds.

No Signl Loss of signal The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in a

location that is blocking the XM signal. When the vehicle is

moved into an open area, the signal should return.

Loading Acquiring channel audio

(after 4 second delay)

The radio system is acquiring and processing audio and text

data. No action is needed. This message should disappear

shortly.

Off Air Channel not in service This channel is not currently in service. Tune to another

channel.

CH Unavl Channel no longer

available

This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.

Tune to another station. If this station was one of the presets,

choose another station for that preset button.

No Info Artist Name/Feature

not available

No artist information is available at this time on this channel.

The system is working properly.

No Info Song/Program Title

not available

No song title information is available at this time on this

channel. The system is working properly.

3-54

XM™ Radio Messages (cont’d)

Radio Display

Message

Condition Action Required

No Info Category Name not

available

No category information is available at this time on this

channel. The system is working properly.

No Info No Text/Informational

message available

No text or informational messages are available at this time

on this channel. The system is working properly.

Not Found No channel available for

the chosen category

There are no channels available for the selected category.

The system is working properly.

XM Lock Theft lock active The XM receiver in your vehicle may have previously been

in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM receivers

cannot be swapped between vehicles. If this message is

received after having your vehicle serviced, check with your

GM dealer.

Radio ID Radio ID label

(channel 0)

If tuned to channel 0, this message will alternate with the

XM Radio 8 digit radio ID label. This label is needed to

activate the service.

Unknown Radio ID not known

(should only be if

hardware failure)

If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, there

may be a receiver fault. Consult with your GM dealer.

Check XM Hardware failure If this message does not clear within a short period of time,

the receiver may have a fault. Consult with your GM dealer.

3-55

Playing a CD

Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.

The player will pull it in, and READING will appear on

the display. The CD should begin playing. If you

want to insert a CD with the ignition off, ﬁrst press the

EJT button or the DISPL knob.

If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the

player it will stay in the player. When the ignition or radio

is turned on, the CD will start to play where it stopped,

if it was the last selected audio source.

When the CD is inserted, the CD symbol will appear on

the display. As each new track starts to play, the

track number will appear on the display.

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)

single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the

smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.

If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced

due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality

of the music that has been recorded, and the way the

CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase

in skipping, difficulty in ﬁnding tracks, and/or difficulty in

loading and ejecting. If these problems occur try a

known good CD.

Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caught

in the CD player.

If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”

later in this section.

1 FLD

x(Previous): Press this pushbutton to go to the

start of the current track if more than eight seconds

have played. TRACK and the track number will appear

on the display. If this pushbutton is held or pressed

more than once, the player will continue moving

backward through the CD.

2 FLD

w(Next): Press this pushbutton to go to the next

track. TRACK and the track number will appear on

the display. If this pushbutton is held or pressed more

than once, the player will continue moving forward

through the CD.

3 REV (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to

reverse quickly within a track. Press and hold this

pushbutton for less than two seconds to reverse at

10 times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it for

more than two seconds to reverse at 20 times the

normal playing speed. Release this pushbutton to play

the passage. REV and the elapsed time of the track

will appear on the display.

3-56

4 FWD (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton to

advance quickly within a track. Press and hold this

pushbutton for less than two seconds to advance at six

times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it for

more than two seconds to advance at 17 times the

normal playing speed. Release this pushbutton to play

the passage. ET and the elapsed time of the track

will appear on the display.

6 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the

tracks in random, rather than sequential, order. RDM ON

will appear on the display. RDM T and the track

number will appear on the display when each track

starts to play. Press RDM again to turn off random play.

RDM OFF will appear on the display.

o SEEK p: Press the left arrow to go to the start

of the current or the previous track. Press the right

arrow to go to the start of the next track. Pressing

either arrow for more than two seconds will search the

previous or next tracks at two tracks per second.

Release the button to stop searching and to play

the track.

o TUNE p: Turning the TUNE knob will fast track

reverse or advance through tracks. The track number

will appear on the display for each track.

DISPL (Display): Press this knob to see how long the

current track has been playing. ET and the elapsed

time of the track will appear on the display. To change

the default on the display, track or elapsed time,

press this knob until you see the display you want, then

hold the knob for two seconds. The radio will produce

one beep and the selected display will now be the

default.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when

a CD is playing. The inactive CD will remain safely

inside the radio for future listening.

CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD

when listening to the radio. The CD symbol will appear

on the display when a CD is loaded.

Z EJT (Eject): Press this button to eject a CD.

Eject may be activated with either the ignition or radio

off. CDs may be loaded with the ignition and radio

off if this button is pressed ﬁrst.

3-57

Using an MP3 CD

MP3 Format

This MP3 player will accept MP3 ﬁles that were recorded

on an up to 700 MB CD-R CD. The ﬁles can be

recorded with the following ﬁxed bit rates: 32 kbps,

40 kpbs, 56 kpbs, 64 kpbs, 80 kpbs, 96 kpbs, 112 kpbs,

128 kpbs, 160 kpbs, 192 kpbs, 224 kpbs, 256 kpbs,

and 320 kpbs or a variable bit rate. Song title, artist

name, and album will be available when recorded using

ID3 tags versions 1 and 2.

The player will be able to read and play a maximum of

50 folders, 50 playlists, 10 sessions, and 255 ﬁles.

Long ﬁle, folder, or playlist names or a combination

of a large number of ﬁles and folders or playlists may

cause the player to be unable to play up to the

maximum number of ﬁles, folders, playlists, or sessions.

If you wish to play large numbers of ﬁles, folders,

playlists or sessions minimize the length of the ﬁle,

folder or playlist name. You can also play an MP3 CD

that was recorded using no ﬁle folders. The system can

support up to 11 folders in depth, though, keep the

depth of the folders to a minimum in order to keep down

the complexity and confusion in trying to locate a

particular folder during playback. If a CD contains

more than the maximum of 50 folders, 50 playlists,

10 sessions, and 255 ﬁles the player will let you access

and navigate up to the maximum, but all items over

the maximum will be ignored.

Root Directory

The root directory will be treated as a folder. If the root

directory has compressed audio ﬁles, the directory

will be displayed as F1 ROOT. All ﬁles contained directly

under the root directory will be accessed prior to any

root directory folders. However, playlists (Px) will always

be accessed before root folders or ﬁles.

Empty Directory or Folder

If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the

ﬁle structure that contains only folders/subfolders and no

compressed ﬁles directly beneath them, the player will

advance to the next folder in the ﬁle structure that

contains compressed audio ﬁles and the empty folder

will not be displayed or numbered.

No Folder

When the CD contains only compressed ﬁles, the ﬁles will

be located under the root folder. The next and previous

folder functions will have no function on a CD that was

recorded without folders or playlists. When displaying the

name of the folder the radio will display ROOT.

When the CD contains only playlists and compressed

audio ﬁles, but no folders, all ﬁles will be located under

the root folder. The folder down and the folder up

buttons will search playlists (Px) ﬁrst and then go to the

root folder. When the radio displays the name of the

folder the radio will display ROOT.

3-58

Order of Play

Tracks will be played in the following order:

• Play will begin from the ﬁrst track in the ﬁrst playlist

and will continue sequentially through all tracks in

each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist

has been played, play will continue from the ﬁrst

track of the ﬁrst playlist.

• If the CD does not contain any playlists, then play

will begin from the ﬁrst track under the root

directory. When all tracks from the root directory

have been played, play will continue from ﬁles

according to their numerical listing. After playing the

last track from the last folder, play will begin

again at the ﬁrst track of the ﬁrst folder or root

directory.

When play enters a new folder, the display will not

automatically show the new folder name unless

you have chosen the folder mode as the default display.

See DISPL later in this section for more information.

The new track name will appear on the display.

File System and Naming

The song name that will be displayed will be the

song name that is contained in the ID3 tag. If the song

name is not present in the ID3 tag, then the radio

will display the ﬁle name without the extension

(such as .mp3) as the track name.

Track names longer than 32 characters or 4 pages

will be shortened. The display will not show parts

of words on the last page of text and the extension of

the ﬁlename will not be displayed.

Preprogrammed Playlists

You can access preprogrammed playlists which

were created by WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or

Real Jukebox™ software, however, you will not have

editing capability. These playlists will be treated as

special folders containing compressed audio song ﬁles.

3-59

Playing an MP3

Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.

The player will pull it in, and READING will appear on

the display. The CD should begin playing and the

CD symbol will appear on the display. If you want to

insert a CD with the ignition off, ﬁrst press the EJT

button or the DISPL knob.

If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the

player it will stay in the player. When the ignition or radio

is turned on, the CD will start to play where it stopped,

if it was the last selected audio source.

As each new track starts to play, the track number will

appear on the display.

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)

single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the

smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.

If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced

due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality

of the music that has been recorded, and the way the

CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase

in skipping, difficulty in ﬁnding tracks, and/or difficulty in

loading and ejecting. If these problems occur try a

known good CD.

Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caught

in the CD player.

If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”

later in this section.

1 FLD

x (Previous Folder): Press this pushbutton to

go to the ﬁrst track in the previous folder. Pressing this

button while in folder random mode will take you to

the previous folder and random the tracks in that folder.

2 FLD

w (Next Folder): Press this pushbutton to go

to the ﬁrst track in the next folder. Pressing this

button while in folder random mode will take you to the

next folder and random the tracks in that folder.

3 REV (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to

reverse quickly within a track. Press and hold this

pushbutton for less than two seconds to reverse at

10 times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it

for more than two seconds to reverse at 20 times

the normal playing speed. Release this pushbutton to

play the passage. REV and the elapsed time of the track

will appear on the display.

3-60

4 FWD (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton to

advance quickly within a track. Press and hold this

pushbutton for less than two seconds to advance

at 10 times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it

for more than two seconds to advance at 20 times

the normal playing speed. Release this pushbutton to

play the passage. FWD and the elapsed time of

the track will appear on the display.

6 RDM (Random): To random the tracks in the current

folder or playlist, press and release this pushbutton.

FLDR RDM will appear on the display. Once all of the

tracks in the current folder or playlist have been

played the system will move on to the next folder or

playlist and play all of the tracks in random order.

To random all the tracks on the CD, press and hold this

pushbutton for two seconds. You will hear a beep

and CD RDM will appear on the display. This feature

will not work with playlists.

When in random, pressing and releasing either SEEK

arrow will take you to the next or previous random track.

Press and release this pushbutton again to turn off

random play. NO RDM will appear on the display.

o SEEK p: Press the left arrow to go to the start of

the previous track. Press the right arrow to go to the

start of the next track. Pressing either arrow for

more than two seconds will search the previous or next

tracks at two tracks per second. Release the button

to stop searching and to play the track.

o TUNE p: Turning the TUNE knob will fast track

reverse or advance through the tracks in all folders

or playlists. The track number and ﬁle name will appear

on the display for each track. Turning this knob while

in random will fast track reverse or advance the tracks in

sequential order.

DISPL (Display): Press this knob to switch between

track mode, folder/playlist mode, and time of day mode.

The display will show only eight characters, but there

can be up to four pages of text. If there are more

than eight characters in the song, folder, or playlist

name, pressing this knob within two seconds will take

you to the next page of text. If there are no other pages

to be shown, pressing this knob within two seconds

will take you to the next display mode.

• Track mode will display the current track number

and the ID3 tag song name.

• Folder/playlist mode will display the current folder or

playlist number and the folder/playlist name.

• Time of day mode will display the time of day and

the ID3 tag song name.

3-61

To change the default on the display, press the DISPL

knob until you see the display you want, then hold

this knob for two seconds. The radio will produce one

beep and the selected display will now be the default.

INFO (Information): INFO will appear on the display

whenever a current track has ID3 tag information. Press

this button to display the artist name and album

contained in the tag. INFO will disappear from the

display when the information in the ID3 tag has ﬁnished.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a

CD is playing. The inactive CD will remain safely

inside the radio for future listening.

CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD

when listening to the radio. The CD symbol will appear

on the display when a CD is loaded.

Z EJT (Eject): Press this button to eject a CD. Eject

may be activated with either the ignition or radio off.

CDs may be loaded with the ignition and radio off if this

button is pressed ﬁrst.

CD Messages

CHECK CD: If this message appears on the display

and/or the CD comes out, it could be for one of the

following reasons:

• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to

normal, the CD should play.

• You are driving on a very rough road. When the

road becomes smoother, the CD should play.

• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.

• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour

and try again.

• The format of the CD may not be compatible.

See “MP3 Format” earlier in this section.

• There may have been a problem while burning

the CD.

• The label may be caught in the CD player.

If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,

try a known good CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be

corrected, contact your GM dealer. If the radio displays

an error message, write it down and provide it to

your GM dealer when reporting the problem.

3-62

Radio with Six-Disc CD

Playing the Radio

PWR (Power): Push this knob to turn the system on

and off.

o VOLUME p: Turn this knob to increase or to

decrease the volume.

INFO (Information): Press this knob to switch the

display between the radio station frequency and

the time. When the ignition is off, press this knob to

display the time.

For RDS, press the INFO knob to change what appears

on the display while using RDS. The display options

are station name, RDS station frequency, PTY, and the

name of the program (if available).

To change the default on the display, press the INFO

knob until you see the display you want, then hold

the knob until you hear a beep. The selected display will

now be the default.

AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): With automatic

volume, the audio system will adjust automatically to

make up for road and wind noise as you drive by

increasing the volume as vehicle speed increases.

Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to

select MID, MED, or MAX. AUTO VOL will appear on

the display. Each higher setting will provide more

volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds.

To turn automatic volume off, press this button until

AUTO VOL OFF appears on the display.

3-63

Finding a Station

BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,

or AM. The display will show the selection.

o TUNE p: Turn this knob to select radio stations.

arrows to go to the next or to the previous station and

stay there.

The radio will only seek stations with a strong signal

that are in the selected band.

TYPE arrows for two seconds until SCN appears on

the display and you hear a beep. The radio will go to a

station, play for a few seconds, then go on to the next

station. Press either the SCAN or the TYPE arrows

again to stop scanning.

To scan preset stations, press and hold either the

SCAN or the TYPE arrows for more than four seconds.

PSC will appear on the display and you will hear a

double beep. The radio will go to a preset station, play

for a few seconds, then go on to the next preset

station. Press either the SCAN or the TYPE arrows

again to stop scanning presets.

The radio will only scan stations with a strong signal

that are in the selected band.

Setting Preset Stations

Up to 18 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM),

can be programmed on the six numbered pushbuttons,

by performing the following steps:

1. Turn the radio on.

2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, or AM.

3. Tune in the desired station.

4. Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons

until you hear a beep. Whenever that numbered

pushbutton is pressed, the station that was set will

return for that pushbutton.

5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.

To store an equalization setting to a preset station

perform the following:

1. Tune to the preset station.

2. Press and release the AUTO EQ button to select

the equalization setting.

Once the equalization no longer appears on the

display, the equalization will be set for that

preset station.

3-64

Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)

AUDIO: Push and release the AUDIO knob until BASS,

MID, or TREB appears on the display. Turn the knob

to increase or to decrease. The display will show

the bass, midrange, or treble level. If a station is weak

or noisy, decrease the treble.

To adjust the bass, midrange, and treble to the middle

position, push and hold the AUDIO knob. The radio

will produce one beep and adjust the display level to the

middle position.

To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle

position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone

or speaker controls are displayed. ALL CENTERED

will appear on the display and you will hear a beep.

AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press this button

to select customized equalization settings designed

for country/western, jazz, talk, pop, rock, and classical.

To return to the manual mode, press the AUTO EQ

button until CUSTOM appears on the display. Then

manually adjust the bass, midrange, and treble using the

AUDIO knob.

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)

AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the right

and the left speakers, push and release the AUDIO

knob until BAL appears on the display. Turn the knob to

move the sound toward the right or the left speakers.

To adjust the fade between the front and rear speakers,

push and release the AUDIO knob until FAD appears

on the display. Turn the knob to move the sound toward

the front or the rear speakers.

To adjust the balance and fade to the middle position,

push and hold the AUDIO knob. The radio will produce

one beep and adjust the display level to the middle

position.

To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle

position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone

or speaker controls are displayed. ALL CENTERED

will appear on the display and you will hear a beep.

3-65

Radio Data System (RDS)

The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).

RDS features are available for use only on FM stations

that broadcast RDS information.

With RDS, the radio can do the following:

• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type

of programming

• Receive announcements concerning local and

national emergencies

• Display messages from radio stations

This system relies upon receiving speciﬁc information

from these stations and will only work when the

information is available. In rare cases, a radio station

may broadcast incorrect information that will cause

the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,

contact the radio station.

While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, the station

name or call letters will appear on the display instead of

the frequency. RDS stations may also provide the

time of day, a program type (PTY) for current

programming, and the name of the program being

broadcast.

Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station

To select and ﬁnd a desired PTY perform the

following:

1. Press the TYPE button to activate program type

select mode. P-TYPE and the last selected PTY

will appear on the display.

2. Turn the TYPE knob or press and release the

TYPE button to select a PTY.

3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press either the

TYPE or the SEEK arrows to select and to take you

to the PTY’s ﬁrst station.

4. To go to another station within that PTY and the

PTY is displayed, press either the TYPE or the

SEEK arrows once. If the PTY is not displayed,

go back to Step 1.

5. Press either the TYPE or the SEEK arrows to exit

program type select mode.

3-66

SCAN: Scan the stations within a PTY by performing

the following:

1. Press the TYPE button to activate program type

select mode. P-TYPE and the last selected PTY

will appear on the display.

2. Turn the TYPE knob or press and release the

TYPE button to select a PTY.

3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press and hold

either the TYPE or the SCAN arrows for two

seconds, and the radio will begin scanning the

stations in the PTY.

4. Press either the TYPE or the SCAN arrows to stop

at a station.

BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency

allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the

same program type. To turn alternate frequency on,

press and hold BAND for two seconds. AF ON will

appear on the display. The radio may switch to stations

with a stronger frequency.

To turn alternate frequency off, press and hold BAND

again for two seconds. AF OFF will appear on the

display. The radio will not switch to other stations.

Setting Preset PTYs (RDS Only)

These pushbuttons have factory PTY presets. Up to

12 PTYs (six FM1 and six FM2), can be programmed

on the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing

the following steps:

1. Press BAND to select FM1 or FM2.

2. Press the TYPE button to activate program type

select mode. P-TYPE and the last selected PTY

will appear on the display.

3. Turn the TYPE knob or press and release the

TYPE button to select a PTY.

4. Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons

until you hear a beep. Whenever that numbered

pushbutton is pressed, the PTY that was set

will return.

5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.

3-67

RDS Messages

INFO (Information): If the current station has a

message, INFO will appear on the display. Press this

button to see the message. The message may display

the artist, song title, call in phone numbers, etc.

If the entire message is not displayed, parts of the

message will appear every three seconds. To scroll

through the message, press and release the INFO button.

A new group of words will appear on the display after

every press of this button. Once the complete message

has been displayed, INFO will disappear from the display

until another new message is received. The last message

can be displayed by pressing the INFO button. You can

view the last message until a new message is received or

a different station is tuned to.

Radio Messages

CAL ERR (Calibration Error): The audio system has

been calibrated for your vehicle from the factory.

If CAL ERR appears on the display, it means that the

radio has not been conﬁgured properly for the vehicle

and must be returned to your GM dealer for service.

LOCKED: This message is displayed when the

THEFTLOCK

system has locked up. Take the vehicle

to your GM dealer for service.

If any error occurs repeatedly, or if an error cannot be

corrected, contact your GM dealer.

Playing a CD

If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in the

player, it will stay in the player. When the ignition

or radio is turned on, the CD will start playing where it

stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.

When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol will appear on

the display. As each new track starts to play, the

track number will appear on the display.

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)

single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the

smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.

If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced

due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality

of the music that has been recorded, and the way the

CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase

in skipping, difficulty in ﬁnding tracks, and/or difficulty in

loading and ejecting. If these problems occur try a

known good CD.

Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caught

in the CD player.

If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”

later in this section.

3-68

LOAD: Press this button to load CDs into the

CD player. This CD player will hold up to six CDs.

To insert one CD, do the following:

1. Turn the ignition on.

2. Press and release the LOAD button.

3. Wait for the indicator light, located to the right of

the slot, to turn green.

4. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,

label side up. The player will pull the CD in.

To insert multiple CDs, do the following:

1. Turn the ignition on.

2. Press and hold the LOAD button for two seconds.

You will hear a beep and the indicator light, located

to the right of the slot, will begin to ﬂash and

MULTI LOAD # will appear on the display.

3. Once the light stops ﬂashing and turns green,

INSERT CD # will appear on the display, load

a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot, label

side up. The player will pull the CD in.

Once the CD is loaded, the indicator light will

begin ﬂashing again. Once the light stops ﬂashing

and turns green, you can load another CD.

The CD player takes up to six CDs. Do not try to

load more than six.

To load more than one CD but less than six, complete

Steps 1 through 3. When ﬁnished loading CDs,

press the LOAD button to cancel the loading function.

The radio will begin to play the last CD loaded.

If more than one CD has been loaded, a number for

each CD will appear on the display.

Playing a Speciﬁc Loaded CD

For every CD loaded, a number will appear on the

display. To play a speciﬁc CD, ﬁrst press the CD AUX

button, then press the numbered pushbutton that

corresponds to the CD. A small bar will appear under

the CD number that is playing and the track number will

appear on the display.

If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”

later in this section.

Z (Eject): Press this button to eject CD(s).

To eject the CD that is currently playing, press and

release this button.

3-69

To eject multiple CDs, do the following:

1. Press and hold the CD eject button for ﬁve seconds.

You will hear a beep and the indicator light, located

to the right of the slot, will begin to ﬂash and

EJECT ALL will appear on the display.

2. Once the light stops ﬂashing and turns green,

REMOVE CD # will appear on the display.

The CD will eject and can be removed.

Once the CD is removed, the indicator light will

begin ﬂashing again and another CD will eject.

To stop ejecting the CDs, press the LOAD or the

eject button.

If the CD is not removed, after 25 seconds, the CD will

be automatically pulled back into the player. If CD is

pushed back into the player, before the 25 second time

period is complete, the player will sense an error and will

try to eject the CD several times before stopping.

Do not repeatedly press the CD eject button to eject

a CD after you have tried to push it in manually.

The player’s 25-second eject timer will reset at each

press of eject, causing the player to not eject the

CD until the 25-second time period has elapsed.

{ REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button to

reverse quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a

reduced volume. Release the button to play the

passage. The elapsed time of the track will appear on

the display.

FWD

| (Forward): Press and hold this button to

advance quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a

reduced volume. Release the button to play the

passage. The elapsed time of the track will appear on

the display.

RPT (Repeat): With repeat, one track or an entire CD

can be repeated.

To use repeat, do the following:

• To repeat the track you are listening to, press and

release the RPT button. RPT will appear on the

display. Press RPT again to turn off repeat play.

• To repeat the CD you are listening to, press and

hold the RPT button for two seconds. RPT will

appear on the display. Press RPT again to turn off

repeat play.

3-70

RDM (Random): With random, you can listen to the

tracks in random, rather than sequential, order, on one

CD or on all of the CDs. To use random, do one of

the following:

• To play the tracks on the CD you are listening to in

random order, press and release the RDM button.

RANDOM ONE will appear on the display.

Press RDM again to turn off random play.

• To play the tracks on all of the CDs that are loaded

in random order, press and hold RDM for more

than two seconds. You will hear a beep and

RANDOM ALL will appear on the display.

Press RDM again to turn off random play.

AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press AUTO EQ

to select the equalization setting while playing a CD.

The equalization will be stored whenever a CD is played.

For more information on AUTO EQ, see “AUTO EQ”

listed previously in this section.

©SEEK ¨: Press the left arrow to go to the start of

the current track, if more than ten seconds have played.

Press the right arrow to go to the next track. If either

arrow is held or pressed more than once, the player will

continue moving backward or forward through the CD.

©SCAN ¨: To scan one CD, press and hold either

SCAN arrow for more than two seconds until SCAN

appears on the display and you hear a beep. The radio

will go to the next track, play for 10 seconds, then go

on to the next track. Press either SCAN arrow

again, to stop scanning.

To scan all loaded CDs, press and hold either SCAN

arrow for more than four seconds until CD SCAN

appears on the display and you hear a beep. Use this

feature to listen to 10 seconds of the ﬁrst track of

each loaded CD. Press either SCAN arrow again,

to stop scanning.

INFO (Information): Press this knob to see how long

the current track has been playing. To change the

default on the display, track or elapsed time, press the

knob until you see the display you want, then hold

the knob until the display ﬂashes. The selected display

will now be the default.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a

CD is playing. The inactive CD(s) will remain safely

inside the radio for future listening.

3-71

Using Song List Mode

The six-disc CD changer has a feature called song list.

This feature is capable of saving 20 track selections.

To save tracks into the song list feature, perform

the following steps:

1. Turn the CD player on and load it with at least one

CD. See “LOAD CD” listed previously in this section

for more information.

2. Check to see that the CD changer is not in song list

mode. S-LIST should not appear on the display.

If S-LIST is present, press the SONG LIST button to

turn it off.

3. Select the desired CD by pressing the numbered

pushbutton and then use the SEEK or TYPE right

arrow to locate the track to be saved. The track will

begin to play.

4. Press and hold the SONG LIST button to save

the track into memory. When SONG LIST is

pressed, one beep will be heard immediately.

After two seconds of continuously pressing the

SONG LIST button, two beeps will sound to conﬁrm

the track has been saved.

5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for saving other selections.

S-LIST FULL will appear on the display if you try to save

more than 20 selections.

To play the song list, press the SONG LIST button.

One beep will be heard and S-LIST will appear on the

display. The recorded tracks will begin to play in

the order they were saved.

Seek through the song list by using the SEEK or TYPE

arrows. Seeking past the last saved track will return

to the ﬁrst saved track.

To delete tracks from the song list, perform the

following steps:

1. Turn the CD player on.

2. Press the SONG LIST button to turn song list on.

S-LIST will appear on the display.

3. Press either SEEK or TYPE arrow to select the

desired track to be deleted.

4. Press and hold the SONG LIST button for two

seconds. When SONG LIST is pressed, one

beep will be heard immediately. After two seconds

of continuously pressing the SONG LIST button,

two beeps will be heard to conﬁrm that the track has

been deleted.

After a track has been deleted, the remaining tracks are

moved up the list. When another track is added to the

song list, the track will be added to the end of the list.

3-72

To delete the entire song list, perform the

following steps:

1. Turn the CD player on.

2. Press the SONG LIST button to turn song list on.

S-LIST will appear on the display.

3. Press and hold the SONG LIST button for more

than four seconds. One beep will be heard,

followed by two beeps after two seconds, and a

ﬁnal beep will be heard after four seconds.

S-LIST EMPTY will appear on the display indicating

the song list has been deleted.

If a CD is ejected, and the song list contains saved

tracks from that CD, those tracks are automatically

deleted from the song list. Any tracks saved to the

song list again are added to the bottom of the list.

To end song list mode, press the SONG LIST button.

One beep will be heard and S-LIST will be removed from

the display.

CD Messages

CHECK CD: If this message appears on the display

and/or the CD comes out, it could be for one of the

following reasons:

• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to

normal, the CD should play.

• You are driving on a very rough road. When the

road becomes smoother, the CD should play.

• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.

• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour

and try again.

• There may have been a problem while burning

the CD.

• The label may be caught in the CD player.

If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,

try a known good CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be

corrected, contact your GM dealer. If the radio displays

an error message, write it down and provide it to

your GM dealer when reporting the problem.

3-73

Theft-Deterrent Feature

(Non-RDS Radios)

THEFTLOCK

is designed to discourage theft of your

vehicle’s radio. The feature works automatically by

learning a portion of the Vehicle Identiﬁcation Number

(VIN). If the radio is moved to a different vehicle,

it will not operate and LOC will appear on the display.

With THEFTLOCK

activated, the radio will not operate

if stolen.

Theft-Deterrent Feature

(RDS Radios)

THEFTLOCK

is designed to discourage theft of your

vehicle’s radio. The feature works automatically by

learning a portion of the Vehicle Identiﬁcation Number

(VIN). If the radio is moved to a different vehicle,

it will not operate and LOCKED will appear on the

display.

When the radio and vehicle are turned off, the blinking

red light indicates that THEFTLOCK

is armed.

With THEFTLOCK

activated, the radio will not operate

if stolen.

Radio Reception

The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,

especially at night. The longer range, however, can

cause stations to interfere with each other. AM can pick

up noise from things like storms and power lines.

Try reducing the treble to reduce this noise.

FM stereo will give you the best sound, but FM signals

will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).

Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals,

causing the sound to come and go.

Care of Your CDs

Handle CDs carefully. Store them in their original cases

or other protective cases and away from direct

sunlight and dust. If the surface of a CD is soiled,

dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent

solution and clean it, wiping from the center to the edge.

Be sure never to touch the side without writing when

handling CDs. Pick up CDs by grasping the outer edges

or the edge of the hole and the outer edge.

3-74

Care of Your CD Player

The use of CD lens cleaners for CD players is not

advised, due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the

CD optics with lubricants internal to the CD mechanism.

Fixed Mast Antenna

The ﬁxed mast antenna can withstand most car washes

without being damaged. If the mast should ever

become slightly bent, straighten it out by hand. If the

mast is badly bent, replace it.

Check occasionally to make sure the mast is still

tightened to the fender. If tightening is required, tighten

by hand, then with a wrench one quarter turn.

XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna

System

The XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof

of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear of snow and

ice build up for clear radio reception.

Chime Level Adjustment

The radio is the vehicle chime producer. To change the

volume level, press and hold pushbutton 6 with the

ignition on and the radio power off. The chime volume

level will change from the normal level to loud, and

LOUD will appear on the radio display. To change back

to the default or normal setting, press and hold

pushbutton 6 again. The chime level will change from

the loud level to normal, and NORMAL will appear

on the radio display. Each time the chime volume is

changed, three chimes will sound as an example of the

new volume selected. Removing the radio and not

replacing it with a factory radio or chime module will

disable vehicle chimes.

3-75

✍ NOTES

3-76

Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ..........4-2

Defensive Driving ...........................................4-2

Drunken Driving .............................................4-3

Control of a Vehicle ........................................4-6

Braking .........................................................4-6

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .........................4-7

Braking in Emergencies ...................................4-8

Traction Control System (TCS) .........................4-9

Steering ......................................................4-10

Off-Road Recovery .......................................4-12

Passing .......................................................4-12

Loss of Control .............................................4-14

Off-Road Driving with Your

Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicle ...........................4-15

Driving at Night ............................................4-28

Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ..................4-29

City Driving ..................................................4-32

Freeway Driving ...........................................4-33

Before Leaving on a Long Trip .......................4-34

Highway Hypnosis ........................................4-35

Hill and Mountain Roads ................................4-36

Winter Driving ..............................................4-38

If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud,

Ice or Snow ..............................................4-42

Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out .................4-42

Recovery Hooks ...........................................4-43

Loading Your Vehicle ....................................4-44

Truck-Camper Loading Information ..................4-49

Pickup Conversion to Chassis Cab ..................4-49

Towing ..........................................................4-50

Towing Your Vehicle .....................................4-50

Recreational Vehicle Towing ...........................4-50

Trailer Connections .......................................4-56

Trailer Recommendations ...............................4-56

Towing a Trailer ...........................................4-56

Section 4 Driving Your Vehicle

4-1

Your Driving, the Road, and

Your Vehicle

Defensive Driving

The best advice anyone can give about driving is:

Drive defensively.

Please start with a very important safety device in your

vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They Are for

Everyone on page 1-11.

Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.”

On city streets, rural roads, or freeways, it means

“always expect the unexpected.”

Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to

be careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what

they might do. Be ready for their mistakes.

Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable of

accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough following

distance. It is the best defensive driving maneuver,

in both city and rural driving. You never know when

the vehicle in front of you is going to brake or

turn suddenly.

Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate on

the driving task. Anything that distracts from the

driving task — such as concentrating on a cellular

telephone call, reading, or reaching for something on

the ﬂoor — makes proper defensive driving more difficult

and can even cause a collision, with resulting injury.

Ask a passenger to help do things like this, or pull off the

road in a safe place to do them yourself. These simple

defensive driving techniques could save your life.

4-2

Drunken Driving

Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is

a national tragedy. It is the number one contributor

to the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims

every year.

Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive

a vehicle:

• Judgment

• Muscular Coordination

• Vision

• Attentiveness

Police records show that almost half of all motor

vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,

these deaths are the result of someone who was

drinking and driving. In recent years, more than

16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been

associated with the use of alcohol, with more than

300,000 people injured.

Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half the adult

population — choose never to drink alcohol, so they

never drive after drinking. For persons under 21,

it is against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.

There are good medical, psychological and

developmental reasons for these laws.

The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway

safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and

then drive. But what if people do? How much is

“too much” if someone plans to drive? It is a lot less

than many might think. Although it depends on

each person and situation, here is some general

information on the problem.

The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone

who is drinking depends upon four things:

• The amount of alcohol consumed

• The drinker’s body weight

• The amount of food that is consumed before and

during drinking

• The length of time it has taken the drinker to

consume the alcohol

4-3

According to the American Medical Association, a 180 lb

(82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce (355 ml)

bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a BAC

of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the

same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce (120 ml) glasses

of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces

(45 ml) of liquors like whiskey, gin, or vodka.

It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example,

if the same person drank three double martinis

(3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the

person’s BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person

who consumes food just before or during drinking will

have a somewhat lower BAC level.

There is a gender difference, too. Women generally

have a lower relative percentage of body water

than men. Since alcohol is carried in body water, this

means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC

level than a man of her same body weight will when

each has the same number of drinks.

The law in most U.S. states, and throughout Canada,

sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent. In some other

countries, the limit is even lower. For example, it is

0.05 percent in both France and Germany. The BAC

limit for all commercial drivers in the United States

is 0.04 percent.

The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to six

drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we have seen,

it depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks, and

how quickly the person drinks them.

4-4

But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of

0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills

of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching

0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night.

All drivers are impaired at BAC levels above

0.05 percent. Statistics show that the chance of being

in a collision increases sharply for drivers who have

a BAC of 0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC

level of 0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance

of having a collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent,

the chance of this driver having a collision is 12 times

greater; at a level of 0.15 percent, the chance is

25 times greater!

The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol

in one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold

showers will speed that up. “I will be careful” is not the

right answer. What if there is an emergency, a need

to take sudden action, as when a child darts into

the street? A person with even a moderate BAC

might not be able to react quickly enough to avoid

the collision.

There is something else about drinking and driving that

many people do not know. Medical research shows

that alcohol in a person’s system can make crash

injuries worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal

cord, or heart. This means that when anyone who has

been drinking — driver or passenger — is in a crash,

that person’s chance of being killed or permanently

disabled is higher than if the person had not been

drinking.

{CAUTION:

Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.

Your reﬂexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and

judgment can be affected by even a small

amount of alcohol. You can have a serious — or

even fatal — collision if you drive after drinking.

Please do not drink and drive or ride with a

driver who has been drinking. Ride home in a

cab; or if you are with a group, designate a

driver who will not drink.

4-5

Control of a Vehicle

You have three systems that make your vehicle go where

you want it to go. They are the brakes, the steering, and

the accelerator. All three systems have to do their work at

the places where the tires meet the road.

Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow or ice,

it is easy to ask more of those control systems than the

tires and road can provide. That means you can lose

control of your vehicle.

Braking

Braking action involves perception time and

reaction time.

First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.

That is perception time. Then you have to bring up your

foot and do it. That is reaction time.

Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a

second. But that is only an average. It might be less

with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or

more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,

coordination and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,

drugs and frustration. But even in three-fourths of a

second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels

66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an

emergency, so keeping enough space between

your vehicle and others is important.

And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly

with the surface of the road (whether it is pavement

or gravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy);

tire tread; the condition of your brakes; the weight of the

vehicle and the amount of brake force applied.

Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in

spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy

braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is

a mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool

between hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much

faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace

with the traffic and allow realistic following distances,

you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking.

That means better braking and longer brake life.

If your engine ever stops while you are driving, brake

normally but do not pump your brakes. If you do,

the pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine

stops, you will still have some power brake assist.

But you will use it when you brake. Once the power

assist is used up, it may take longer to stop and

the brake pedal will be harder to push.

4-6

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)

Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes. ABS is an advanced

electronic braking system that will help prevent a

braking skid.

When you start your engine and begin to drive away,

your anti-lock brake system will check itself. You may

hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while this test

is going on. This is normal.

If there is a problem with

the anti-lock brake system,

this warning light will

stay on. See Anti-Lock

Brake System Warning

Light on page 3-29.

Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.

Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam

on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what

happens with ABS:

A computer senses that wheels are slowing down.

If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer

will separately work the brakes at each front wheel

and at both rear wheels.

4-7

The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure

faster than any driver could. The computer is

programmed to make the most of available tire and road

conditions. This can help you steer around the obstacle

while braking hard.

As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates

on wheel speed and controls braking pressure

accordingly.

Remember: Anti-lock does not change the time you

need to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always

decrease stopping distance. If you get too close to

the vehicle in front of you, you will not have time to apply

your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops.

Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even

though you have anti-lock brakes.

Using Anti-Lock

Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal

down ﬁrmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may feel

the brakes vibrate, or you may notice some noise,

but this is normal.

Braking in Emergencies

With anti-lock, you can steer and brake at the same

time. In many emergencies, steering can help you more

than even the very best braking.

4-8

Traction Control System (TCS)

Your vehicle may have a Traction Control System (TCS)

that limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in

slippery road conditions. The system operates only if it

senses that one or both of the rear wheels are

spinning or beginning to lose traction. When this

happens, the system reduces engine power and may

also upshift the transmission to limit wheel spin.

You may feel or hear the system working, but this

is normal.

The TCS button is located

on your instrument panel.

Press this button to

turn the TCS off and on.

When the traction control system is turned off,

an indicator light on the button will illuminate.

If your vehicle is in cruise control when the traction

control system begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise

control will automatically disengage. When road

conditions allow you to safely use it again, you may

re-engage the cruise control. See Cruise Control on

page 3-11.

TCS operates in all transmission shift lever positions.

But the system can upshift the transmission only as high

as the shift lever position you have chosen, so you

should use the lower gears only when necessary.

See Automatic Transmission Operation on page 2-21

and/or Manual Transmission Operation on page 2-24 for

more information.

If there is a problem with TCS, TRACTION FAULT will

be displayed on your Driver Information Center (DIC).

See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-41

for more information.

When this warning is displayed, the system will not limit

wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.

To limit wheel spin, especially in slippery road conditions,

you should always leave TCS on. But you can turn the

system off if you ever need to. You should turn the

system off if your vehicle ever gets stuck in sand, mud or

snow and rocking the vehicle is required. See “Rocking

Your Vehicle To Get It Out” under If You Are Stuck:

In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow on page 4-42.

4-9

Steering

Power Steering

If you lose power steering assist because the engine

stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but

it will take much more effort.

Steering Tips

Driving on Curves

It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.

A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on

the news happen on curves. Here is why:

Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to

the same laws of physics when driving on curves.

The traction of the tires against the road surface makes

it possible for the vehicle to change its path when

you turn the front wheels. If there is no traction, inertia

will keep the vehicle going in the same direction.

If you have ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice,

you will understand this.

The traction you can get in a curve depends on the

condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at

which the curve is banked, and your speed. While you are

in a curve, speed is the one factor you can control.

Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.

Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control

systems — steering and acceleration — have to do

their work where the tires meet the road. Adding the

sudden acceleration can demand too much of those

places. You can lose control.

What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on

the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you

want it to go, and slow down.

Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should

adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds

are based on good weather and road conditions.

Under less favorable conditions you will want to

go slower.

If you need to reduce your speed as you approach a

curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front

wheels are straight ahead.

Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the

curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to

accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then

accelerate gently into the straightaway.

4-10

Steering in Emergencies

There are times when steering can be more effective

than braking. For example, you come over a hill and ﬁnd

a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls

out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between

parked cars and stops right in front of you. You can

avoid these problems by braking — if you can stop in

time. But sometimes you cannot; there is not room.

That is the time for evasive action — steering around

the problem.

Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like

these. First apply your brakes.

See Braking on page 4-6. It is better to remove as much

speed as you can from a possible collision. Then steer

around the problem, to the left or right depending on the

space available.

An emergency like this requires close attention and a

quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at

the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you

can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without

removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steer

quickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel

once you have avoided the object.

The fact that such emergency situations are always

possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving

at all times and wear safety belts properly.

4-11

Off-Road Recovery

You may ﬁnd that your right wheels have dropped off the

edge of a road onto the shoulder while you are driving.

If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the

pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the

accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,

steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of

the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up to

one-quarter turn until the right front tire contacts

the pavement edge. Then turn your steering wheel to go

straight down the roadway.

Passing

The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a

two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,

accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then

goes back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?

Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane

highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the

passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming

traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in

judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger

can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the

worst of all traffic accidents — the head-on collision.

So here are some tips for passing:

• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to the sides

and to crossroads for situations that might affect

your passing patterns. If you have any doubt

whatsoever about making a successful pass,

wait for a better time.

• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and

lines. If you can see a sign up ahead that might

indicate a turn or an intersection, delay your pass.

A broken center line usually indicates it is all

right to pass, providing the road ahead is clear.

Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane or

a double solid line, even if the road seems empty

of approaching traffic.

4-12

• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to

pass while you are awaiting an opportunity. For one

thing, following too closely reduces your area of

vision, especially if you are following a larger

vehicle. Also, you will not have adequate space if

the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops.

Keep back a reasonable distance.

• When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,

start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and

do not get too close. Time your move so you will be

increasing speed as the time comes to move into

the other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you

will have a running start that more than makes up

for the distance you would lose by dropping

back. And if something happens to cause you to

cancel your pass, you need only slow down

and drop back again and wait for another

opportunity.

• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow vehicle,

wait your turn. But take care that someone is not

trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow

vehicle. Remember to glance over your shoulder

and check the blind spot.

• Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and

start your left lane change signal before moving out

of the right lane to pass. When you are far enough

ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in

your inside mirror, activate your right lane change

signal and move back into the right lane. Remember

that your right outside mirror is convex. The

vehicle you just passed may seem to be farther

away from you than it really is.

• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on

two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the

next vehicle.

• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.

Even though the brake lamps are not ﬂashing, it

may be slowing down or starting to turn.

• If you are being passed, make it easy for the

following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps

you can ease a little to the right.

4-13

Loss of Control

Let us review what driving experts say about what

happens when the three control systems — brakes,

steering, and acceleration — do not have enough friction

where the tires meet the road to do what the driver

has asked.

In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to

steer and constantly seek an escape route or area of

less danger.

Skidding

In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.

Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable

care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving

those conditions. But skids are always possible.

The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s

three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels

are not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too

much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip

and lose cornering force. And in the acceleration skid,

too much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.

A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off

the accelerator pedal.

If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the

accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want

the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,

your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready

for a second skid if it occurs.

Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,

gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety,

you will want to slow down and adjust your driving to

these conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery

surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and

vehicle control more limited.

While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try

your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration,

or braking, including engine braking by shifting to a

lower gear. Any sudden changes could cause the tires

to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery

until your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning

clues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow

on the road to make a mirrored surface — and

slow down when you have any doubt.

Remember: Any anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps

avoid only the braking skid.

4-14

Off-Road Driving with Your

Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicle

This off-road guide is for vehicles that have

four-wheel drive.

Also, see Anti-Lock Brakes under Braking on page 4-6.

If your vehicle does not have four-wheel drive, you

should not drive off-road unless you are on a level,

solid surface.

Off-road driving can be great fun. But it does have

some deﬁnite hazards. The greatest of these is

the terrain itself.

“Off-roading” means you have left the great North

American road system behind. Traffic lanes are not

marked. Curves are not banked. There are no

road signs. Surfaces can be slippery, rough, uphill or

downhill. In short, you have gone right back to nature.

Off-road driving involves some new skills. And that

is why it is very important that you read this guide.

You will ﬁnd many driving tips and suggestions.

These will help make your off-road driving safer and

more enjoyable.

Before You Go Off-Roading

There are some things to do before you go out.

For example, be sure to have all necessary maintenance

and service work done. Check to make sure all

underbody shields (if so equipped) are properly

attached. Be sure you read all the information about

your four-wheel-drive vehicle in this manual. Is

there enough fuel? Is the spare tire fully inﬂated?

Are the ﬂuid levels up where they should be? What are

the local laws that apply to off-roading where you

will be driving? If you do not know, you should check

with law enforcement people in the area. Will you be on

someone’s private land? If so, be sure to get the

necessary permission.

4-15

Loading Your Vehicle for Off-Road

Driving

There are some important things to remember about

how to load your vehicle.

• The heaviest things should be on the load ﬂoor and

forward of your rear axle. Put heavier items as far

forward as you can.

• Be sure the load is secured properly, so driving on

the off-road terrain does not toss things around.

{CAUTION:

• Cargo on the load ﬂoor piled higher than

the seatbacks can be thrown forward

during a sudden stop. You or your

passengers could be injured. Keep cargo

below the top of the seatbacks.

• Unsecured cargo on the load ﬂoor can be

tossed about when driving over rough

terrain. You or your passengers can be

struck by ﬂying objects. Secure the cargo

properly.

• Heavy loads on the roof raise the vehicle’s

center of gravity, making it more likely to

roll over. You can be seriously or fatally

injured if the vehicle rolls over. Put heavy

loads inside the cargo area, not on the

roof. Keep cargo in the cargo area as far

forward and low as possible.

You will ﬁnd other important information in this manual.

See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-44 and Tires

on page 5-54.

4-16

Environmental Concerns

Off-road driving can provide wholesome and satisfying

recreation. However, it also raises environmental

concerns. We recognize these concerns and urge every

off-roader to follow these basic rules for protecting

the environment:

• Always use established trails, roads and areas that

have been specially set aside for public off-road

recreational driving; obey all posted regulations.

• Avoid any driving practice that could damage

the environment — shrubs, ﬂowers, trees, grasses

— or disturb wildlife (this includes wheel-spinning,

breaking down trees or unnecessary driving through

streams or over soft ground).

• Always carry a litter bag — make sure all refuse is

removed from any campsite before leaving.

• Take extreme care with open ﬁres (where permitted),

camp stoves and lanterns.

• Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other

combustible materials that could catch ﬁre from the

heat of the vehicle’s exhaust system.

Traveling to Remote Areas

It makes sense to plan your trip, especially when going

to a remote area. Know the terrain and plan your

route. You are much less likely to get bad surprises.

Get accurate maps of trails and terrain. Try to learn of

any blocked or closed roads.

It is also a good idea to travel with at least one other

vehicle. If something happens to one of them, the other

can help quickly.

Does your vehicle have a winch? If so, be sure to read

the winch instructions. In a remote area, a winch

can be handy if you get stuck. But you will want to know

how to use it properly.

Getting Familiar with Off-Road Driving

It is a good idea to practice in an area that is safe

and close to home before you go into the wilderness.

Off-road driving does require some new and different

skills. Here is what we mean.

Tune your senses to different kinds of signals. Your

eyes, for example, need to constantly sweep the terrain

for unexpected obstacles. Your ears need to listen

for unusual tire or engine sounds. With your arms,

hands, feet and body, you will need to respond to

vibrations and vehicle bounce.

4-17

Controlling your vehicle is the key to successful off-road

driving. One of the best ways to control your vehicle

is to control your speed. Here are some things to keep

in mind. At higher speeds:

• you approach things faster and you have less time

to scan the terrain for obstacles.

• you have less time to react.

• you have more vehicle bounce when you drive

over obstacles.

• you will need more distance for braking, especially

since you are on an unpaved surface.

{CAUTION:

When you are driving off-road, bouncing and

quick changes in direction can easily throw

you out of position. This could cause you to

lose control and crash. So, whether you’re

driving on or off the road, you and your

passengers should wear safety belts.

Scanning the Terrain

Off-road driving can take you over many different kinds

of terrain. You need to be familiar with the terrain

and its many different features. Here are some things

to consider.

Surface Conditions: Off-roading can take you over

hard-packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud, snow

or ice. Each of these surfaces affects the steering,

acceleration and braking of your vehicle in different

ways. Depending upon the kind of surface you are on,

you may experience slipping, sliding, wheel spinning,

delayed acceleration, poor traction and longer braking

distances.

Surface Obstacles: Unseen or hidden obstacles can

be hazardous. A rock, log, hole, rut or bump can startle

you if you are not prepared for them. Often these

obstacles are hidden by grass, bushes, snow or even

the rise and fall of the terrain itself. Here are some

things to consider:

• Is the path ahead clear?

• Will the surface texture change abruptly up ahead?

• Does the travel take you uphill or downhill?

(There is more discussion of these subjects later.)

• Will you have to stop suddenly or change direction

quickly?

4-18

When you drive over obstacles or rough terrain, keep a

ﬁrm grip on the steering wheel. Ruts, troughs or

other surface features can jerk the wheel out of your

hands if you are not prepared.

When you drive over bumps, rocks, or other obstacles,

your wheels can leave the ground. If this happens,

even with one or two wheels, you cannot control the

vehicle as well or at all.

Because you will be on an unpaved surface, it is

especially important to avoid sudden acceleration,

sudden turns or sudden braking.

In a way, off-road driving requires a different kind of

alertness from driving on paved roads and highways.

There are no road signs, posted speed limits or

signal lights. You have to use your own good judgment

about what is safe and what is not.

Drinking and driving can be very dangerous on any

road. And this is certainly true for off-road driving.

At the very time you need special alertness and driving

skills, your reﬂexes, perceptions and judgment can

be affected by even a small amount of alcohol.

You could have a serious — or even fatal — accident

if you drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been

drinking. See Drunken Driving on page 4-3.

Driving on Off-Road Hills

Off-road driving often takes you up, down or across a

hill. Driving safely on hills requires good judgment

and an understanding of what your vehicle can and

cannot do. There are some hills that simply cannot be

driven, no matter how well built the vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Many hills are simply too steep for any vehicle.

If you drive up them, you will stall. If you drive

down them, you cannot control your speed.

If you drive across them, you will roll over.

You could be seriously injured or killed. If you

have any doubt about the steepness, do not

drive the hill.

4-19

Approaching a Hill

When you approach a hill, you need to decide if it is

one of those hills that is just too steep to climb, descend

or cross. Steepness can be hard to judge. On a very

small hill, for example, there may be a smooth, constant

incline with only a small change in elevation where

you can easily see all the way to the top. On a large hill,

the incline may get steeper as you near the top, but

you may not see this because the crest of the hill

is hidden by bushes, grass or shrubs.

Here are some other things to consider as you

approach a hill.

• Is there a constant incline, or does the hill get

sharply steeper in places?

• Is there good traction on the hillside, or will the

surface cause tire slipping?

• Is there a straight path up or down the hill so you

will not have to make turning maneuvers?

• Are there obstructions on the hill that can block

your path (boulders, trees, logs or ruts)?

• What is beyond the hill? Is there a cliff, an

embankment, a drop-off, a fence? Get out and walk

the hill if you do not know. It is the smart way to

ﬁnd out.

• Is the hill simply too rough? Steep hills often have

ruts, gullies, troughs and exposed rocks because

they are more susceptible to the effects of erosion.

Driving Uphill

Once you decide you can safely drive up the hill,

you need to take some special steps.

• Use a low gear and get a ﬁrm grip on the

steering wheel.

• Get a smooth start up the hill and try to maintain

your speed. Do not use more power than you

need, because you do not want your wheels to

start spinning or sliding.

• Try to drive straight up the hill if at all possible.

If the path twists and turns, you might want to

ﬁnd another route.

{CAUTION:

Turning or driving across steep hills can be

dangerous. You could lose traction, slide

sideways, and possibly roll over. You could be

seriously injured or killed. When driving up

hills, always try to go straight up.

4-20

• Ease up on your speed as you approach the top

of the hill.

• Attach a ﬂag to the vehicle to make you more

visible to approaching traffic on trails or hills.

• Sound the horn as you approach the top of the hill

to let opposing traffic know you are there.

• Use your headlamps even during the day.

They make you more visible to oncoming traffic.

{CAUTION:

Driving to the top (crest) of a hill at full speed

can cause an accident. There could be a

drop-off, embankment, cliff, or even another

vehicle. You could be seriously injured or

killed. As you near the top of a hill, slow down

and stay alert.

Q: What should I do if my vehicle stalls, or is about

to stall, and I cannot make it up the hill?

A: If this happens, there are some things you should

do, and there are some things you must not do.

First, here is what you should do:

• Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicle and keep it

from rolling backwards. Also, apply the parking brake.

• If your engine is still running, shift the transmission to

REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and slowly

back down the hill in REVERSE (R).

• If your engine has stopped running, you will need to

restart it. With the brake pedal pressed and the

parking brake still applied, shift the transmission to

PARK (P) (or shift to NEUTRAL if your vehicle has a

manual transmission) and restart the engine. Then,

shift to REVERSE (R), release the parking brake,

and slowly back down the hill as straight as possible

in REVERSE (R).

• As you are backing down the hill, put your left hand

on the steering wheel at the 12 o’clock position. This

way, you will be able to tell if your wheels are straight

and maneuver as you back down. It is best that you

back down the hill with your wheels straight rather

than in the left or right direction. Turning the wheel

too far to the left or right will increase the possibility

of a rollover.

4-21

Here are some things you must not do if you stall, or

are about to stall, when going up a hill.

• Never attempt to prevent a stall by shifting into

NEUTRAL (N) (or pressing the clutch, if you have a

manual transmission) to rev-up the engine and

regain forward momentum. This will not work. Your

vehicle will roll backwards very quickly and you

could go out of control.

Instead, apply the regular brake to stop the vehicle.

Then apply the parking brake. Shift to

REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and

slowly back straight down.

• Never attempt to turn around if you are about to

stall when going up a hill. If the hill is steep

enough to stall your vehicle, it is steep enough to

cause you to roll over if you turn around. If you

cannot make it up the hill, you must back straight

down the hill.

Q: Suppose, after stalling, I try to back down the hill

and decide I just cannot do it. What should I do?

A: Set the parking brake, put your transmission in

PARK (P) (or the manual transmission in

FIRST (1)) and turn off the engine. Leave the

vehicle and go get some help. Exit on the uphill

side and stay clear of the path the vehicle would

take if it rolled downhill.

Driving Downhill

When off-roading takes you downhill, you will want to

consider a number of things:

• How steep is the downhill? Will I be able to maintain

vehicle control?

• What is the surface like? Smooth? Rough?

Slippery? Hard-packed dirt? Gravel?

• Are there hidden surface obstacles? Ruts? Logs?

Boulders?

• What is at the bottom of the hill? Is there a hidden

creek bank or even a river bottom with large

rocks?

If you decide you can go down a hill safely, then try to

keep your vehicle headed straight down, and use a

low gear. This way, engine drag can help your brakes

and they will not have to do all the work. Descend

slowly, keeping your vehicle under control at all times.

4-22

{CAUTION:

Heavy braking when going down a hill can

cause your brakes to overheat and fade.

This could cause loss of control and a serious

accident. Apply the brakes lightly when

descending a hill and use a low gear to keep

vehicle speed under control.

Q: Are there some things I should not do when

driving down a hill?

A: Yes! These are important because if you ignore

them you could lose control and have a serious

accident.

• When driving downhill, avoid turns that take you

across the incline of the hill. A hill that is not too

steep to drive down may be too steep to drive

across. You could roll over if you do not drive

straight down.

• Never go downhill with the transmission in

NEUTRAL (N), or with the clutch pedal pressed

down with a manual transmission. This is called

“free-wheeling.” Your brakes will have to do all the

work and could overheat and fade.

Q: Am I likely to stall when going downhill?

A: It is much more likely to happen going uphill. But if

it happens going downhill, here is what to do.

1. Stop your vehicle by applying the regular brakes.

Apply the parking brake.

2. Shift to PARK (P) (or to NEUTRAL with the manual

transmission) and, while still braking, restart the

engine.

3. Shift back to a low gear, release the parking brake,

and drive straight down.

4. If the engine will not start, get out and get help.

4-23

Driving Across an Incline

Sooner or later, an off-road trail will probably go across

the incline of a hill. If this happens, you have to

decide whether to try to drive across the incline.

Here are some things to consider:

• A hill that can be driven straight up or down may be

too steep to drive across. When you go straight up

or down a hill, the length of the wheel base (the

distance from the front wheels to the rear wheels)

reduces the likelihood the vehicle will tumble

end over end. But when you drive across an incline,

the much more narrow track width (the distance

between the left and right wheels) may not prevent

the vehicle from tilting and rolling over. Also,

driving across an incline puts more weight on the

downhill wheels. This could cause a downhill

slide or a rollover.

• Surface conditions can be a problem when you

drive across a hill. Loose gravel, muddy spots,

or even wet grass can cause your tires to slip

sideways, downhill. If the vehicle slips sideways,

it can hit something that will trip it (a rock, a rut, etc.)

and roll over.

• Hidden obstacles can make the steepness of the

incline even worse. If you drive across a rock with the

uphill wheels, or if the downhill wheels drop into a rut

or depression, your vehicle can tilt even more.

For reasons like these, you need to decide carefully

whether to try to drive across an incline. Just because the

trail goes across the incline does not mean you have to

drive it. The last vehicle to try it might have rolled over.

{CAUTION:

Driving across an incline that is too steep will

make your vehicle roll over. You could be

seriously injured or killed. If you have any

doubt about the steepness of the incline, do

not drive across it. Find another route instead.

Q: What if I am driving across an incline that is not

too steep, but I hit some loose gravel and start

to slide downhill. What should I do?

A: If you feel your vehicle starting to slide sideways,

turn downhill. This should help straighten out the

vehicle and prevent the side slipping. However,

a much better way to prevent this is to get out and

“walk the course” so you know what the surface

is like before you drive it.

4-24

Stalling on an Incline

If your vehicle stalls when you are crossing an incline,

be sure you (and your passengers) get out on the uphill

side, even if the door there is harder to open. If you

get out on the downhill side and the vehicle starts to roll

over, you will be right in its path.

If you have to walk down the slope, stay out of the path

the vehicle will take if it does roll over.

{CAUTION:

Getting out on the downhill (low) side of a

vehicle stopped across an incline is dangerous.

If the vehicle rolls over, you could be crushed

or killed. Always get out on the uphill (high)

side of the vehicle and stay well clear of the

rollover path.

4-25

Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow or Ice

When you drive in mud, snow or sand, your wheels

will not get good traction. You cannot accelerate

as quickly, turning is more difficult, and you will need

longer braking distances.

It is best to use a low gear when you are in mud — the

deeper the mud, the lower the gear. In really deep mud,

the idea is to keep your vehicle moving so you do

not get stuck.

When you drive on sand, you will sense a change in

wheel traction. But it will depend upon how loosely

packed the sand is. On loosely packed sand (as on

beaches or sand dunes) your tires will tend to sink into

the sand. This has an effect on steering, accelerating

and braking. Drive at a reduced speed

and avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.

Hard packed snow and ice offer the worst tire traction.

On these surfaces, it is very easy to lose control.

On wet ice, for example, the traction is so poor that you

will have difficulty accelerating. And if you do get

moving, poor steering and difficult braking can cause

you to slide out of control.

{CAUTION:

Driving on frozen lakes, ponds or rivers can be

dangerous. Underwater springs, currents under

the ice, or sudden thaws can weaken the ice.

Your vehicle could fall through the ice and you

and your passengers could drown. Drive your

vehicle on safe surfaces only.

Driving in Water

Heavy rain can mean ﬂash ﬂooding, and ﬂood waters

demand extreme caution.

Find out how deep the water is before you drive through

it. If it is deep enough to cover your wheel hubs,

axles or exhaust pipe, do not try it — you probably will

not get through. Also, water that deep can damage

your axle and other vehicle parts.

4-26

If the water is not too deep, drive slowly through it.

At faster speeds, water splashes on your ignition system

and your vehicle can stall. Stalling can also occur if you

get your tailpipe under water. And, as long as your

tailpipe is under water, you will never be able to start your

engine. When you go through water, remember that when

your brakes get wet, it may take you longer to stop.

{CAUTION:

Driving through rushing water can be

dangerous. Deep water can sweep your vehicle

downstream and you and your passengers

could drown. If it is only shallow water, it can

still wash away the ground from under your

tires, and you could lose traction and roll

the vehicle over. Do not drive through

rushing water.

See Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads on page 4-29

for more information on driving through water.

After Off-Road Driving

Remove any brush or debris that has collected on

the underbody, chassis or under the hood. These

accumulations can be a ﬁre hazard.

After operation in mud or sand, have the brake linings

cleaned and checked. These substances can cause

glazing and uneven braking. Check the body structure,

steering, suspension, wheels, tires and exhaust

system for damage. Also, check the fuel lines and

cooling system for any leakage.

Your vehicle will require more frequent service due to

off-road use. Refer to the maintenance schedule

for additional information.

4-27

Driving at Night

Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.

One reason is that some drivers are likely to be

impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with night vision

problems, or by fatigue.

Here are some tips on night driving.

• Drive defensively.

• Do not drink and drive.

• Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the

glare from headlamps behind you.

• Since you cannot see as well, you may need to

slow down and keep more space between you

and other vehicles.

• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your

headlamps can light up only so much road ahead.

• In remote areas, watch for animals.

• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safe place

and rest.

No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But as

we get older these differences increase. A 50-year-old

driver may require at least twice as much light to see the

same thing at night as a 20-year-old.

What you do in the daytime can also affect your night

vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright

sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your eyes

will have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you

are driving, do not wear sunglasses at night. They may

cut down on glare from headlamps, but they also

make a lot of things invisible.

4-28

You can be temporarily blinded by approaching

headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even

several seconds, for your eyes to re-adjust to the dark.

When you are faced with severe glare, as from a

driver who does not lower the high beams, or a vehicle

with misaimed headlamps, slow down a little. Avoid

staring directly into the approaching headlamps.

Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle

clean — inside and out. Glare at night is made much

worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass

can build up a ﬁlm caused by dust. Dirty glass makes

lights dazzle and ﬂash more than clean glass would,

making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.

Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a

roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your

eyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimly

lighted objects. Just as your headlamps should

be checked regularly for proper aim, so should your

eyes be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from

night blindness — the inability to see in dim light — and

are not even aware of it.

Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads

Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet

road, you cannot stop, accelerate, or turn as well

because your tire-to-road traction is not as good as on

dry roads. And, if your tires do not have much tread

left, you will get even less traction. It is always wise to

go slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall while

you are driving. The surface may get wet suddenly when

your reﬂexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement.

4-29

The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your

windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy

rain can make it harder to see road signs and

traffic signals, pavement markings, the edge of the road,

and even people walking.

It is wise to keep your wiping equipment in good shape

and keep your windshield washer tank ﬁlled with

washer ﬂuid. Replace your windshield wiper inserts

when they show signs of streaking or missing areas on

the windshield, or when strips of rubber start to

separate from the inserts.

Driving too fast through large water puddles or even

going through some car washes can cause problems,

too. The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid

puddles. But if you cannot, try to slow down before you

hit them.

{CAUTION:

Wet brakes can cause accidents. They will not

work as well in a quick stop and may cause

pulling to one side. You could lose control of

the vehicle.

After driving through a large puddle of water

or a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly

until your brakes work normally.

4-30

Hydroplaning

Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up

under your tires that they can actually ride on the

water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and

you are going fast enough. When your vehicle is

hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.

Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can if your

tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in

one or more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is

standing on the road. If you can see reﬂections

from trees, telephone poles, or other vehicles, and

raindrops dimple the water’s surface, there could be

hydroplaning.

Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There

just is not a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.

The best advice is to slow down when it is raining.

Driving Through Deep Standing Water

Notice: If you drive too quickly through deep

puddles or standing water, water can come in

through your engine’s air intake and badly damage

your engine. Never drive through water that is

slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle.

If you cannot avoid deep puddles or standing water,

drive through them very slowly.

Driving Through Flowing Water

{CAUTION:

Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.

If you try to drive through ﬂowing water, as you

might at a low water crossing, your vehicle

can be carried away. As little as six inches of

ﬂowing water can carry away a smaller

vehicle. If this happens, you and other vehicle

occupants could drown. Do not ignore police

warning signs, and otherwise be very cautious

about trying to drive through ﬂowing water.

Some Other Rainy Weather Tips

• Besides slowing down, allow some extra following

distance. And be especially careful when you

pass another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear

room ahead, and be prepared to have your

view restricted by road spray.

• Have good tires with proper tread depth.

See Tires on page 5-54.

4-31

City Driving

One of the biggest problems with city streets is the

amount of traffic on them. You will want to watch out for

what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to

traffic signals.

Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:

• Know the best way to get to where you are

going. Get a city map and plan your trip into

an unknown part of the city just as you would for a

cross-country trip.

• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross

most large cities. You will save time and energy.

See Freeway Driving on page 4-33.

• Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic

light is there because the corner is busy enough

to need it. When a light turns green, and just before

you start to move, check both ways for vehicles

that have not cleared the intersection or may

be running the red light.

4-32

Freeway Driving

Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways, parkways,

expressways, turnpikes, or superhighways — are the

safest of all roads. But they have their own special rules.

The most important advice on freeway driving is:

Keep up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the

same speed most of the other drivers are driving.

Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic ﬂow.

Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.

At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to

the freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as

you drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin

to check traffic. Try to determine where you expect

to blend with the ﬂow. Try to merge into the gap at close

to the prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal,

check your mirrors, and glance over your shoulder as

often as necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the

traffic ﬂow.

Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the

posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it is slower.

Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass.

4-33

Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use

your turn signal.

Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your

shoulder to make sure there is not another vehicle in

your blind spot.

Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you

allow a reasonable following distance. Expect to

move slightly slower at night.

When you want to leave the freeway, move to the

proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit,

do not, under any circumstances, stop and back up.

Drive on to the next exit.

The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.

The exit speed is usually posted.

Reduce your speed according to your speedometer, not

to your sense of motion. After driving for any distance

at higher speeds, you may tend to think you are

going slower than you actually are.

Before Leaving on a Long Trip

Make sure you are ready. Try to be well rested. If you

must start when you are not fresh — such as after

a day’s work — do not plan to make too many miles that

ﬁrst part of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing

and shoes you can easily drive in.

Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it

serviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it needs

service, have it done before starting out. Of course,

you will ﬁnd experienced and able service experts

in GM dealerships all across North America. They will

be ready and willing to help if you need it.

4-34

Here are some things you can check before a trip:

• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full?

Are all windows clean inside and outside?

• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?

• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked

all levels?

• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?

• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,

trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for

long-distance driving? Are the tires all inﬂated to the

recommended pressure?

• Weather Forecasts: What is the weather outlook

along your route? Should you delay your trip a

short time to avoid a major storm system?

• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?

Highway Hypnosis

Is there actually such a condition as highway hypnosis?

Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? Call it

highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or whatever.

There is something about an easy stretch of road with

the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on

the road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of

the wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy.

Do not let it happen to you! If it does, your vehicle

can leave the road in less than a second, and you could

crash and be injured.

What can you do about highway hypnosis?

First, be aware that it can happen.

Then here are some tips:

• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a

comfortably cool interior.

• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and

to the sides. Check your mirrors and your

instruments frequently.

• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,

service, or parking area and take a nap, get some

exercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsiness

on the highway as an emergency.

4-35

Hill and Mountain Roads

Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from

driving in ﬂat or rolling terrain.

If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you are

planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make

your trips safer and more enjoyable. See Off-Road

Driving with Your Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicle on

page 4-15 for information about driving off-road.

• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all ﬂuid

levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system,

and transmission. These parts can work hard

on mountain roads.

• Know how to go down hills. The most important

thing to know is this: let your engine do some of

the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go

down a steep or long hill.

4-36

{CAUTION:

If you do not shift down, your brakes could

get so hot that they would not work well.

You would then have poor braking or even

none going down a hill. You could crash.

Shift down to let your engine assist your

brakes on a steep downhill slope.

{CAUTION:

Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the

ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have

to do all the work of slowing down. They could

get so hot that they would not work well. You

would then have poor braking or even none

going down a hill. You could crash. Always

have your engine running and your vehicle in

gear when you go downhill.

• Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down

to a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your

engine and transmission, and you can climb

the hill better.

• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane

roads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wide

or cut across the center of the road. Drive at speeds

that let you stay in your own lane.

• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There

could be something in your lane, like a stalled car or

an accident.

• You may see highway signs on mountains that

warn of special problems. Examples are long

grades, passing or no-passing zones, a falling rocks

area, or winding roads. Be alert to these and take

appropriate action.

4-37

Winter Driving

Here are some tips for winter driving:

• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.

• You may want to put winter emergency supplies in

your vehicle.

Also see Tires on page 5-54.

Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a supply

of windshield washer ﬂuid, a rag, some winter outer

clothing, a small shovel, a ﬂashlight, a red cloth, and a

couple of reﬂective warning triangles. And, if you

will be driving under severe conditions, include a small

bag of sand, a piece of old carpet or a couple of

burlap bags to help provide traction. Be sure you

properly secure these items in your vehicle.

Driving on Snow or Ice

Most of the time, those places where your tires meet

the road probably have good traction.

However, if there is snow or ice between your tires

and the road, you can have a very slippery situation.

You will have a lot less traction, or grip, and will need to

be very careful.

4-38

What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold snow

or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet ice

can be even more trouble because it may offer the least

traction of all. You can get wet ice when it is about

freezing (32°F; 0°C) and freezing rain begins to

fall. Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand

crews can get there.

Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed, blowing,

or loose snow — drive with caution.

Accelerate gently. Try not to break the fragile traction.

If you accelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spin and

polish the surface under the tires even more.

Your anti-lock brakes improve your vehicle’s stability

when you make a hard stop on a slippery road.

Even though you have an anti-lock braking system, you

will want to begin stopping sooner than you would on

dry pavement. See Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)

on page 4-7.

• Allow greater following distance on any slippery road.

• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be ﬁne until

you hit a spot that is covered with ice. On an

otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in

shaded areas where the sun cannot reach: around

clumps of trees, behind buildings, or under bridges.

Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpass

may remain icy when the surrounding roads are

clear. If you see a patch of ice ahead of you, brake

before you are on it. Try not to brake while you are

actually on the ice, and avoid sudden steering

maneuvers.

4-39

If You Are Caught in a Blizzard

If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a

serious situation. You should probably stay with

your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near

help and you can hike through the snow. Here are

some things to do to summon help and keep yourself

and your passengers safe:

• Turn on your hazard ﬂashers.

• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that

you have been stopped by the snow.

• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.

If you have no blankets or extra clothing, make

body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags,

ﬂoor mats — anything you can wrap around

yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.

You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.

4-40

{CAUTION:

Snow can trap exhaust gases under your

vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon

monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could

overcome you and kill you. You cannot see it

or smell it, so you might not know it is in your

vehicle. Clear away snow from around the

base of your vehicle, especially any that is

blocking your exhaust pipe. And check around

again from time to time to be sure snow does

not collect there.

Open a window just a little on the side of the

vehicle that is away from the wind. This will

help keep CO out.

Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves

fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little

faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator

slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get

and it keeps the battery charged. You will need a

well-charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possibly

for signaling later on with your headlamps. Let the

heater run for a while.

Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost

all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine

again and repeat this only when you feel really

uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little as

possible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can. To help

keep warm, you can get out of the vehicle and do

some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so until

help comes.

4-41

If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud,

Ice or Snow

In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you will

need to spin the wheels, but you do not want to

spin your wheels too fast. The method known as rocking

can help you get out when you are stuck, but you

must use caution.

{CAUTION:

If you let your tires spin at high speed, they

can explode, and you or others could be

injured. And, the vehicle can overheat. That

could cause an engine compartment ﬁre or

other damage. When you are stuck, spin the

wheels as little as possible. Do not spin the

wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on

the speedometer.

Notice: Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of

your vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the

wheels too fast while shifting your transmission

back and forth, you can destroy your transmission.

For information about using tire chains on your

vehicle, see Tire Chains on page 5-68.

Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out

First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That will

clear the area around your front wheels. If you have a

four-wheel-drive vehicle, shift into 4HI. If you have

traction control, turn the traction control system off.

See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-9.

Then shift back and forth between REVERSE (R) and a

forward gear (or with a manual transmission, between

FIRST (1) or SECOND (2) and REVERSE (R)), spinning

the wheels as little as possible. Release the accelerator

pedal while you shift, and press lightly on the accelerator

pedal when the transmission is in gear. By slowly

spinning your wheels in the forward and reverse

directions, you will cause a rocking motion that may free

your vehicle. If that does not get you out after a few tries,

you may need to be towed out. Or, you can use your

recovery hooks if your vehicle has them. If you do need to

be towed out, see Towing Your Vehicle on page 4-50.

4-42

Recovery Hooks

Your vehicle may be equipped with recovery hooks.

The hooks are provided at the front of your vehicle.

You may need to use them if you are stuck off-road

and need to be pulled to some place where you

can continue driving.

{CAUTION:

These hooks, when used, are under a lot of

force. Always pull the vehicle straight out.

Never pull on the hooks at a sideways angle.

The hooks could break off and you or others

could be injured from the chain or cable

snapping back.

Notice: Never use recovery hooks to tow the

vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged and it

would not be covered by warranty.

4-43

Loading Your Vehicle

It is very important to know how much weight your

vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle

capacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants,

cargo and all nonfactory-installed options. Two labels

on your vehicle show how much weight it may properly

carry, the Tire and Loading Information label and the

Certiﬁcation/Tire label.

{CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either

the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight

Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on your

vehicle can break, and it can change the way

your vehicle handles. These could cause you

to lose control and crash. Also, overloading

can shorten the life of your vehicle.

Tire and Loading Information Label

A vehicle speciﬁc Tire and Loading Information is

attached to the vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar). With the

driver’s door open, you will ﬁnd the label attached

below the door latch post. Vehicle’s without a center

pillar, extended cab models, will have the Tire and

Loading Information label attached to the driver’s side

extended cab door, above the door latch post.

The tire and loading information label shows the number

of occupant seating positions (A), and the maximum

vehicle capacity weight (B) in kilograms and pounds.

Label Example

4-44

The Tire and Loading Information label also shows

the size of the original equipment tires (C) and

the recommended cold tire inﬂation pressures (D).

For more information on tires and inﬂation see Tires on

page 5-54 and Inﬂation - Tire Pressure on page 5-60.

There is also important information on the

Certiﬁcation/Tire label. It tells you the Gross Vehicle

Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight

Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axles. See

“Certiﬁcation/Tire Label” later in this section.

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit

1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of

occupants and cargo should never exceed

XXX kg or XXX pounds” on your vehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and

passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and

passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.

4. The resulting ﬁgure equals the available amount of

cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if

the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs and there will be

ﬁve 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount

of available cargo and luggage load capacity is

650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).

5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and

cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight

may not safely exceed the available cargo

and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load from

your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle.

Consult this manual to determine how this reduces

the available cargo and luggage load capacity of

your vehicle.

See Towing a Trailer on page 4-56 for important

information on towing a trailer, towing safety,

and trailering tips.

4-45

Item Description Total

Vehicle Capacity Weight

for Example 1 =

1,000 lbs (453 kg)

Subtract Occupant Weight

150 lbs (68 kg) x 2 =

300 lbs (136 kg)

C Available Cargo Weight = 700 lbs (317 kg)

Item Description Total

Vehicle Capacity Weight

for Example 2 =

1,000 lbs (453 kg)

Subtract Occupant Weight

150lbs(68kg)x5=

750 lbs (340 kg)

C Available Cargo Weight = 250 lbs (113 kg)

Example 1

Example 2

4-46

Item Description Total

Vehicle Capacity Weight

for Example 3 =

1,000 lbs (453 kg)

Subtract Occupant Weight

200lbs(91kg)x5=

1,000 lbs (453 kg)

C Available Cargo Weight = 0 lbs (0 kg)

Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information label

for speciﬁc information about your vehicle’s capacity

weight and seating positions. The combined weight of

the driver, passengers, cargo and any accessories or

equipment added to your vehicle after it left the factory

should never exceed your vehicle’s capacity weight.

Certiﬁcation/Tire Label

A vehicle speciﬁc Certiﬁcation/Tire label is attached to

the bottom section of the center pillar, on the driver’s

side of the vehicle. Vehicles without a center pillar,

extended cab models, will have the Certiﬁcation/Tire

label attached to the edge of the driver’s side, extended

cab door, below the door latch post. The label shows

the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The GVWR

includes the weight of the vehicle, all occupants,

fuel, cargo and trailer tongue weight, if pulling a trailer.

The Certiﬁcation/Tire label also tells you the maximum

weights for the front and rear axles, called Gross Axle

Weight Rating (GAWR). To ﬁnd out the actual loads on

your front and rear axles, you need to go to a weigh

station and weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can help you

with this. Be sure to spread out your load equally on both

sides of the centerline.

Example 3

Label Example

4-47

Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the GAWR

for either the front or rear axle.

If you do have a heavy load, you should spread it out.

Similar appearing vehicles may have different GVWRs

and capacity weights. Please note your vehicle’s

Certiﬁcation/Tire label or consult your dealer for

additional details.

{CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either

the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight

Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on your

vehicle can break, and it can change the way

your vehicle handles. These could cause you

to lose control and crash. Also, overloading

can shorten the life of your vehicle.

Using heavier suspension components to get added

durability might not change your weight ratings. Ask your

dealer to help you load your vehicle the right way.

Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause

damage. Repairs would not be covered by your

warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.

If you put things inside your vehicle – like suitcases,

tools, packages, or anything else – they will go as fast

as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn

quickly, or if there is a crash, they’ll keep going.

{CAUTION:

Things you put inside your vehicle can strike

and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or

in a crash.

• Put things in the cargo area of your

vehicle. Try to spread the weight evenly.

• Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,

inside the vehicle so that some of them

are above the tops of the seats.

• Do not leave an unsecured child restraint

in your vehicle.

• When you carry something inside the

vehicle, secure it whenever you can.

• Do not leave a seat folded down unless

you need to.

4-48

There’s also important loading information for off-road

driving in this manual. See “Loading Your Vehicle

for Off-Road Driving” under Off-Road Driving with Your

Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicle on page 4-15.

Remember not to exceed the Gross Axle Weight rating

(GAWR) of the front or rear axle.

Two-Tiered Loading

By positioning four 2” X 6” wooden planks across the

width of the pickup box, you can create an upper

load platform. The planks must be inserted in the pickup

box depressions. The length of the planks must allow

for at least a 3/4 inch (2 cm) bearing surface on

each end of the plank.

When using this upper load platform, be sure the load is

securely tied down to prevent it from shifting. The load’s

center of gravity should be positioned in a zone over

the rear axle.

Any load that extends beyond the vehicle’s taillamp

area must be properly marked according to local laws

and regulations.

Remember not to exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating

(GAWR) of the rear axle.

Add-On Equipment

When you carry removable items, you may need to put

a limit on how many people you carry inside your

vehicle. Be sure to weigh your vehicle before you buy

and install the new equipment.

Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause

damage. Repairs would not be covered by your

warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.

Remember not to exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating

(GAWR) of the rear axle.

Truck-Camper Loading Information

Your vehicle was not designed to carry a slide-in camper.

Pickup Conversion to Chassis Cab

General Motors is aware that some vehicle owners

may consider having the pickup box removed and a

commercial or recreational body installed. However,

we recommend that conversions of this type not be

done to pickups. Owners should be aware that,

as manufactured, there are differences between a

chassis cab and a pickup with the box removed which

may affect vehicle safety. For speciﬁc information

on this pickup, contact GM Customer Assistance.

See Customer Assistance Offices on page 7-4.

4-49

Towing

Towing Your Vehicle

Consult your dealer or a professional towing service

if you need to have your disabled vehicle towed.

See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-6.

If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle

for recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),

see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.

Recreational Vehicle Towing

Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle

behind another vehicle — such as behind a motorhome.

The two most common types of recreational vehicle

towing are known as “dinghy” (towing your vehicle with

all four wheels on the ground) and “dolly” (towing

your vehicle with two wheels on the ground and two

wheels up on a device known as a “dolly”).

With the proper preparation and equipment, many

vehicles can be towed in these ways. See “Dinghy

Towing” and “Dolly Towing” following.

Here are some important things to consider before you

do recreational vehicle towing:

• What’s the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?

Be sure you read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s

recommendations.

• How far will you tow? Some vehicles have

restrictions on how far and how long they can tow.

• Do you have the proper towing equipment?

See your dealer or trailering professional for

additional advice and equipment recommendations.

• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as you

would prepare your vehicle for a long trip, you’ll

want to make sure your vehicle is prepared

to be towed.

Dinghy Towing

Two-Wheel Drive Vehicles

Notice: If you tow your vehicle with all four wheels

on the ground, the drivetrain components could

be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by

your warranty. Do not tow your vehicle with all

four wheels on the ground.

Two-wheel-drive vehicles should not be towed with

all four wheels on the ground. Two-wheel-drive

transmissions have no provisions for internal lubrication

while being towed.

4-50

Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles

Use the following procedure to tow your vehicle with all

four wheels on the ground:

1. Drive the vehicle to be towed into position behind

the tow vehicle.

2. Firmly set the parking brake. See Parking Brake on

page 2-29 for more information.

3. Put an automatic transmission in PARK (P) or a

manual transmission in FIRST (1).

4. Securely attach the vehicle being towed to the

tow vehicle.

For manual transmission vehicles, make sure the

wheels are straight before proceeding to the next

steps. On automatic transmission vehicles, use an

adequate clamping device to ensure that the

front wheels are locked into the straight position.

{CAUTION:

Shifting a four-wheel-drive vehicle’s transfer

case into NEUTRAL can cause your vehicle to

roll even if the transmission is in Park (P) for

an automatic transmission, or if your vehicle

is in gear, for a manual transmission. You or

others could be injured. Make sure the parking

brake is ﬁrmly set before you shift the transfer

case to NEUTRAL.

5. Shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL. See

Four-Wheel Drive on page 2-26 for more information.

6. Release the parking brake only after the vehicle

being towed is ﬁrmly attached to the tow vehicle.

7. Turn the ignition to LOCK.

If the tow vehicle will not be started or driven for

six weeks or more, remove the battery cable

from the negative terminal (post) of the battery to

prevent your battery from draining while towing.

After towing see “Shifting Out of NEUTRAL” under

Four-Wheel Drive on page 2-26.

4-51

Dolly Towing

Front Towing (Front Wheels Off the Ground)

Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles

Notice: If you tow a two-wheel-drive vehicle with

the rear wheels on the ground, the transmission

could be damaged. The repairs would not be

covered by your warranty. Never tow your vehicle

with the rear wheels on the ground.

Two-wheel-drive vehicles should not be towed with

the rear wheels on the ground. Two-wheel-drive

transmissions have no provisions for internal lubrication

while being towed. To dolly tow a two-wheel-drive

vehicle, you must tow the vehicle with the rear wheels

on the dolly. See “Rear Towing (Rear Wheels Off

the Ground)” later in this section for more information.

Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles

Use the following procedure to dolly tow your vehicle

from the front:

1. Drive the vehicle onto the dolly.

2. Firmly set the parking brake. See Parking Brake on

page 2-29 for more information.

3. Put an automatic transmission in PARK (P) or a

manual transmission in FIRST (1).

4. Follow the dolly manufacturer’s instructions to attach

and secure the vehicle being towed to the dolly and

then the loaded dolly to the tow vehicle. Make sure

the wheels are straight before towing.

4-52

{CAUTION:

Shifting a four-wheel-drive vehicle’s transfer

case into NEUTRAL can cause your vehicle to

roll even if the transmission is in Park (P) for

an automatic transmission, or if your vehicle

is in gear, for a manual transmission. You or

others could be injured. Make sure the parking

brake is ﬁrmly set before you shift the transfer

case to NEUTRAL.

5. Shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL. See

Four-Wheel Drive on page 2-26 for more information.

6. Release the parking brake only after the vehicle

being towed is ﬁrmly attached to the tow vehicle.

7. Turn the ignition to LOCK.

If the tow vehicle will not be started or driven for

six weeks or more, remove the battery cable

from the negative terminal (post) of the battery to

prevent your battery from draining while towing.

After towing see “Shifting Out of NEUTRAL” under

Four-Wheel Drive on page 2-26.

Rear Towing (Rear Wheels Off the Ground)

Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles

Use the following procedure to tow your vehicle from

the rear:

1. Drive the vehicle onto the dolly.

2. Firmly set the parking brake. See Parking Brake on

page 2-29 for more information.

3. Put an automatic transmission in PARK (P) or a

manual transmission in FIRST (1).

4-53

4. Follow the dolly manufacturer’s instructions to

attach and secure the vehicle being towed to

the dolly and then the loaded dolly to the tow

vehicle. Make sure the wheels are straight

before towing.

For manual transmission vehicles, make sure the

wheels are straight before proceeding to the

next steps. On automatic transmission vehicles,

use an adequate clamping device to ensure that the

front wheels are locked into the straight position.

5. Release the parking brake only after the vehicle

being towed is ﬁrmly attached to the tow vehicle.

6. Turn the ignition to LOCK.

If the tow vehicle will not be started or driven for

six weeks or more, remove the battery cable

from the negative terminal (post) of the battery to

prevent your battery from draining while towing.

Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles

Use the following procedure to tow your vehicle from

the rear:

1. Drive the vehicle onto the dolly.

2. Firmly set the parking brake. See Parking Brake on

page 2-29 for more information.

3. Put an automatic transmission in PARK (P) or a

manual transmission in FIRST (1).

4-54

4. Follow the dolly manufacturer’s instructions to attach

and secure the vehicle being towed to the dolly and

then the loaded dolly to the tow vehicle.

For manual transmission vehicles, make sure the

wheels are straight before proceeding to the next

steps. On automatic transmission vehicles, use

an adequate clamping device to ensure that the

front wheels are locked into the straight position.

{CAUTION:

Shifting a four-wheel-drive vehicle’s transfer

case into NEUTRAL can cause your vehicle to

roll even if the transmission is in Park (P) for

an automatic transmission, or if your vehicle is

in gear, for a manual transmission. You or

others could be injured. Make sure the parking

brake is ﬁrmly set before you shift the transfer

case to NEUTRAL.

5. Shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL. See

Four-Wheel Drive on page 2-26 for more information.

6. Release the parking brake only after the vehicle

being towed is ﬁrmly attached to the tow vehicle.

7. Turn the ignition to LOCK.

If the tow vehicle will not be started or driven for

six weeks or more, remove the battery cable

from the negative terminal (post) of the battery to

prevent your battery from draining while towing.

After towing, see “Shifting Out of NEUTRAL” under

Four-Wheel Drive on page 2-26.

4-55

Trailer Connections

If your vehicle is equipped with trailering provisions,

see the instruction sheet in the glovebox for more

information.

Trailer Recommendations

You must subtract your hitch load from the CWR for

your vehicle. Weigh your vehicle with your trailer

attached, so that you won’t go over the GVWR or

the GAWR.

You’ll get the best performance if you spread out the

weight of your load the right way, and if you choose the

correct hitch and trailer brakes.

For more information, see Towing a Trailer on page 4-56

later in this section.

Towing a Trailer

{CAUTION:

If you do not use the correct equipment and

drive properly, you can lose control when you

pull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is too

heavy, the brakes may not work well — or even

at all. You and your passengers could be

seriously injured. Pull a trailer only if you have

followed all the steps in this section. Ask your

dealer for advice and information about towing

a trailer with your vehicle.

Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly can damage

your vehicle and result in costly repairs that would

not be covered by your warranty. Always follow

the instructions in this section and check with your

dealer for more information about towing a trailer

with your vehicle.

To identify what the vehicle trailering capacity is for your

vehicle, you should read the information in “Weight of

the Trailer” that appears later in this section.

4-56

If yours was built with trailering options, as many are,

it’s ready for heavier trailers. But trailering is different

than just driving your vehicle by itself. Trailering means

changes in handling, acceleration, braking, durability

and fuel economy. Successful, safe trailering takes

correct equipment, and it has to be used properly.

That’s the reason for this part. In it are many time-tested,

important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of

these are important for your safety and that of your

passengers. So please read this section carefully before

you pull a trailer.

If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer

If you do, here are some important points:

• There are many different laws, including speed limit

restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure

your rig will be legal, not only where you live

but also where you’ll be driving. A good source for

this information can be state or provincial police.

• Consider using a sway control. You can ask a hitch

dealer about sway controls.

• Don’t tow a trailer at all during the ﬁrst 500 miles

(800 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine,

axle or other parts could be damaged.

• Then, during the ﬁrst 500 miles (800 km) that you

tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)

and don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps your

engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at

the heavier loads.

• You may want to shift the transmission to THIRD (3)

or, if necessary, a lower gear selection if the

transmission shifts too often (e.g., under heavy

loads and/or hilly conditions). If you have a manual

transmission and you are towing a trailer, it’s

better not to use the highest gear.

Three important considerations have to do with weight:

• the weight of the trailer,

• the weight of the trailer tongue

• and the weight on your vehicle’s tires.

4-57

Weight of the Trailer

How heavy can a trailer safely be?

It depends on how you plan to use your rig.

For example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside

temperature and how much your vehicle is used to

pull a trailer are all important. And, it can also

depend on any special equipment that you have on

your vehicle.

The following chart shows how much your trailer can

weigh, based upon your vehicle model and options.

Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the

driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required

trailering equipment. The weight of additional optional

equipment, passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle

must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight.

The weight of the trailer tongue also affects trailering

capacity. See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue” next.

Vehicle* Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR**

2WD Regular Cab

Automatic Transmission,

2.8L Engine

3.73 3,400 lbs (1 542 kg) 7,000 lbs (3 175 kg)

Automatic Transmission,

3.5L Engine

3.42 4,000 lbs (1 814 kg) 8,500 lbs (3 856 kg)

Automatic Transmission,

3.5L Engine

3.73 4,000 lbs (1 814 kg) 8,500 lbs (3 855 kg)

Manual Transmission,

2.8L Engine

3.42 1,900 lbs (862 kg) 5,500 lbs (2 495 kg)

Manual Transmission,

2.8L Engine

3.73 2,400 lbs (1 089 kg) 6,000 lbs (2 722 kg)

Manual Transmission,

3.5L Engine

3.42 3,300 lbs (1 497 kg) 7,000 lbs (3 175 kg)

Manual Transmission,

3.5L Engine

3.73 3,800 lbs (1 724 kg) 7,500 lbs (3 402 kg)

4-58

Vehicle* Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR**

2WD Extended Cab

Automatic Transmission,

2.8L Engine

3.73 3,200 lbs (1 451 kg) 7,000 lbs (3 175 kg)

Automatic Transmission,

3.5L Engine

3.42 4,000 lbs (1 814 kg) 8,500 lbs (3 856 kg)

Automatic Transmission,

3.5L Engine

3.73 4,000 lbs (1 814 kg) 9,000 lbs (4 082 kg)

Manual Transmission,

2.8L Engine

3.42 1,500 lbs (680 kg) 5,500 lbs (2 495 kg)

Manual Transmission,

2.8L Engine

3.73 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 6,000 lbs (2 722 kg)

Manual Transmission,

3.5L Engine

3.42 3,200 lbs (1 451 kg) 7,000 lbs (3 175 kg)

Manual Transmission,

3.5L Engine

3.73 3,700 lbs (1 678 kg) 7,500 lbs (3 402 kg)

4-59

Vehicle* Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR**

2WD Crew Cab

Automatic Transmission,

2.8L Engine

3.73 3,000 lbs (1 361 kg) 7,000 lbs (3 175 kg)

Automatic Transmission,

3.5L Engine

3.42 4,000 lbs (1 814 kg) 8,500 lbs (3 856 kg)

Automatic Transmission,

3.5L Engine

3.73 4,000 lbs (1 814 kg) 9,000 lbs (4 082 kg)

Manual Transmission,

2.8L Engine

3.42 1,500 lbs (680 kg) 5,500 lbs (2 495 kg)

Manual Transmission,

2.8L Engine

3.73 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 6,000 lbs (2 722 kg)

4-60

Vehicle* Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR**

4WD Regular Cab

Automatic Transmission,

2.8L Engine

3.73 3,100 lbs (1 406 kg) 7,000 lbs (3 175 kg)

Automatic Transmission,

2.8L Engine

4.10 3,100 lbs (1 406 kg) 7,000 lbs (3 175 kg)

Automatic Transmission,

3.5L Engine

3.42 4,000 lbs (1 814 kg) 8,500 lbs (3 856 kg)

Automatic Transmission,

3.5L Engine

3.73 4,000 lbs (1 814 kg) 9,000 lbs (4 082 kg)

Automatic Transmission,

3.5L Engine

4.10 4,000 lbs (1 814 kg) 9,000 lbs (4 082 kg)

Manual Transmission,

2.8L Engine

3.73 2,100 lbs (952 kg) 6,000 lbs (2 722 kg)

Manual Transmission,

2.8L Engine

4.10 2,100 lbs (952 kg) 6,000 lbs (2 722 kg)

Manual Transmission,

3.5L Engine

3.42 3,000 lbs (1 361 kg) 7,000 lbs (3 175 kg)

Manual Transmission,

3.5L Engine

3.73 3,500 lbs (1 588 kg) 7,500 lbs (3 402 kg)

Manual Transmission,

3.5L Engine

4.10 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg) 7,500 lbs (3 402 kg)

4-61

Vehicle* Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR**

4WD Extended Cab

Automatic Transmission,

2.8L Engine

3.73 2,900 lbs (1 315 kg) 7,000 lbs (3 175 kg)

Automatic Transmission,

2.8L Engine

4.10 2,900 lbs (1 315 kg) 7,000 lbs (3 175 kg)

Automatic Transmission,

3.5L Engine

3.42 4,000 lbs (1 814 kg) 8,500 lbs (3 856 kg)

Automatic Transmission,

3.5L Engine

3.73 4,000 lbs (1 814 kg) 9,000 lbs (4 082 kg)

Automatic Transmission,

3.5L Engine

4.10 4,000 lbs (1 814 kg) 9,000 lbs (4 082 kg)

Manual Transmission,

2.8L Engine

4.10 1,900 lbs (861 kg) 6,000 lbs (2 722 kg)

Manual Transmission,

3.5L Engine

3.42 2,900 lbs (1 315 kg) 7,000 lbs (3 175 kg)

Manual Transmission,

3.5L Engine

3.73 3,400 lbs (1 542 kg) 7,500 lbs (3 402 kg)

Manual Transmission,

3.5L Engine

4.10 3,400 lbs (1 542 kg) 7,500 lbs (3 402 kg)

4-62

Vehicle* Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR**

4WD Crew Cab

Automatic Transmission,

2.8L Engine

3.73 2,700 lbs (1 225 kg) 7,000 lbs (3 175 kg)

Automatic Transmission,

2.8L Engine

4.10 2,700 lbs (1 225 kg) 7,000 lbs (3 175 kg)

Automatic Transmission,

3.5L Engine

3.42 4,000 lbs (1 814 kg) 8,500 lbs (3 856 kg)

Automatic Transmission,

3.5L Engine

3.73 4,000 lbs (1 814 kg) 9,000 lbs (4 082 kg)

Automatic Transmission,

3.5L Engine

4.10 4,000 lbs (1 814 kg) 9,000 lbs (4 082 kg)

Manual Transmission,

2.8L Engine

4.10 1,700 lbs (771 kg) 6,000 lbs (2 721 kg)

**The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle

and trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for your vehicle should

not be exceeded.

You can ask your dealer for our trailering information

or advice, or you can write us at the address listed

in your Warranty and Owner Assistance Information

Booklet.

In Canada, write to:

General Motors of Canada Limited

Customer Communication Centre, 163-005

1908 Colonel Sam Drive

Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

4-63

Weight of the Trailer Tongue

The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight

to measure because it affects the total or gross weight

of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)

includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you

may carry in it, and the people who will be riding in

the vehicle. If you have a lot of options, equipment,

passengers or cargo in your vehicle, it will reduce the

tongue weight your vehicle can carry, which will

also reduce the trailer weight your vehicle can tow.

And if you will tow a trailer, you must add the tongue

load to the GVW because your vehicle will be carrying

that weight, too. See Loading Your Vehicle on

page 4-44 for more information about your vehicle’s

maximum load capacity.

The trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percent

to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight,

up to a maximum of 500 lbs (226 kg) with a weight

carrying hitch.

Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongue weight

for your vehicle. Choose the shortest hitch extension

that will position the hitch ball closest to the vehicle.

This will help reduce the effect of trailer tongue weight

on the rear axle.

After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and

then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights

are proper. If they aren’t you may be able to get them

right simply by moving some of the items around in

the trailer.

4-64

Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires

Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inﬂated to the upper limit

for cold tires. You’ll ﬁnd these numbers on the

Certiﬁcation label at the rear edge of the driver’s door

above the door latch, or see Loading Your Vehicle

on page 4-44. Then be sure you don’t go over the

GVW limit for your vehicle, including the weight of the

trailer tongue.

Hitches

It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.

Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are

a few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch.

Weight-Distributing Hitches and

Weight Carrying Hitches

You can use your step bumper hitch for trailers up to

2,000 lbs (907 kg) total weight, and 200 lbs (90 kg)

tongue weight.

Notice: If you use a step-bumper hitch, your

bumper could be damaged in sharp turns. Make

sure you have ample room when turning to avoid

contact between the trailer and the bumper.

Safety Chains

You should always attach chains between your vehicle

and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the

tongue of the trailer to help prevent the tongue from

contacting the road if it becomes separated from

the hitch. Instructions about safety chains may be

provided by the hitch manufacturer or by the trailer

manufacturer. For trailers up to 2,000 lbs (907 kg) you

may attach the safety chains to the attaching points

on the bumper. For heavier trailers, follow the trailer or

hitch manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching

safety chains. Always leave just enough slack so you

can turn with your rig. Never allow safety chains to drag

on the ground.

4-65

Trailer Brakes

If your trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (450 kg)

loaded, then it needs its own brakes — and they must

be adequate. Be sure to read and follow the instructions

for the trailer brakes so you’ll be able to install, adjust

and maintain them properly.

Your trailer’s brake system can tap into the vehicle’s

hydraulic brake system only if:

• The trailer parts can withstand 3,000 psi

(20 650 kPa) of pressure.

• The trailer’s brake system will use less than

0.02 cubic inch (0.3 cc) of ﬂuid from your vehicle’s

master cylinder. Otherwise, both braking systems

won’t work well. You could even lose your brakes.

If everything checks out this far, then make the brake

ﬂuid tap at the port on the master cylinder that

sends ﬂuid to the rear brakes. But don’t use copper

tubing for this. If you do, it will bend and ﬁnally break off.

Use steel brake tubing.

Driving with a Trailer

Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.

Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to get

to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of

handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer.

And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are

driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as

responsive as your vehicle is by itself.

Before you start, check all trailer hitch parts and

attachments, safety chains, electrical connector, lamps,

tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has electric

brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and then

apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure

the brakes are working. This lets you check your

electrical connection at the same time.

During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the

load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer

brakes are still working.

4-66

Following Distance

Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as

you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer.

This can help you avoid situations that require

heavy braking and sudden turns.

Passing

You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when

you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good deal

longer, you’ll need to go much farther beyond the

passed vehicle before you can return to your lane.

Backing Up

Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.

Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand

to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your

hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,

have someone guide you.

Making Turns

Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering

could cause the trailer to come in contact with the

vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid

making very sharp turns while trailering.

When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns than

normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strike soft shoulders,

curbs, road signs, trees or other objects. Avoid jerky or

sudden maneuvers. Signal well in advance.

Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer

When you tow a trailer, your vehicle has to have extra

wiring and a heavy-duty turn signal ﬂasher.

The arrows on your instrument panel will ﬂash whenever

you signal a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up,

the trailer lamps will also ﬂash, telling other drivers

you’re about to turn, change lanes or stop.

When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument

panel will ﬂash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer

are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind

you are seeing your signal when they are not. It’s

important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer

bulbs are still working.

4-67

Driving On Grades

Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start

down a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t shift

down, you might have to use your brakes so much that

they would get hot and no longer work well.

When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades,

consider the following: Engine coolant will boil at a lower

temperature than at normal altitudes. If you turn your

engine off immediately after towing at high altitude

on steep uphill grades, your vehicle may show signs

similar to engine overheating. To avoid this, let the

engine run while parked (preferably on level ground)

with the automatic transmission in PARK (P) (or the

manual transmission out of gear and the parking brake

applied) for a few minutes before turning the engine

off. If you do get the overheat warning, see Engine

Overheating on page 5-28.

Parking on Hills

{CAUTION:

You really should not park your vehicle, with a

trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes

wrong, your rig could start to move. People

can be injured, and both your vehicle and the

trailer can be damaged.

But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill,

here’s how to do it:

1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into

PARK (P) yet, or into gear for a manual

transmission. When parking uphill, turn your wheels

away from the curb. When parking downhill, turn

your wheels into the curb.

2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer

wheels.

3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the

regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.

4-68

4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your

parking brake, and then shift into PARK (P), or

REVERSE (R) for a manual transmission. See

Parking Brake on page 2-29 for more information.

5. If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure

the transfer case is in a drive gear and not in

NEUTRAL. See Four-Wheel Drive on page 2-26

for more information.

6. Release the regular brakes.

When You Are Ready to Leave After

Parking on a Hill

1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down

while you:

• start your engine,

• shift into a gear, and

• release the parking brake.

2. Let up on the brake pedal.

3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.

4. Stop and have someone pick up and store

the chocks.

Maintenance When Trailer Towing

Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re

pulling a trailer. See Scheduled Maintenance on

page 6-4 for more on this. Things that are especially

important in trailer operation are automatic transmission

ﬂuid (don’t overﬁll), engine oil, axle lubricant, belt,

cooling system and brake system. Each of these is

covered in this manual, and the Index will help you ﬁnd

them quickly. If you’re trailering, it’s a good idea to

review these sections before you start your trip.

Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts

are tight.

4-69

✍ NOTES

4-70

Service ............................................................5-3

Doing Your Own Service Work .........................5-4

Adding Equipment to the Outside of

Your Vehicle ..............................................5-5

Fuel ................................................................5-5

Gasoline Octane ............................................5-5

Gasoline Speciﬁcations ....................................5-5

California Fuel ...............................................5-6

Additives .......................................................5-6

Fuels in Foreign Countries ...............................5-7

Filling Your Tank ............................................5-8

Filling a Portable Fuel Container .....................5-10

Checking Things Under the Hood ....................5-10

Hood Release ..............................................5-11

Engine Compartment Overview .......................5-12

Engine Oil ...................................................5-13

Engine Oil Life System ..................................5-16

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ................................5-18

Automatic Transmission Fluid .........................5-19

Manual Transmission Fluid .............................5-22

Hydraulic Clutch ...........................................5-24

Engine Coolant .............................................5-25

Radiator Pressure Cap ..................................5-28

Engine Overheating .......................................5-28

Cooling System ............................................5-30

Engine Fan Noise .........................................5-34

Power Steering Fluid .....................................5-35

Windshield Washer Fluid ................................5-36

Brakes ........................................................5-37

Battery ........................................................5-40

Jump Starting ...............................................5-41

Rear Axle .......................................................5-44

Four-Wheel Drive ............................................5-45

Front Axle ......................................................5-46

Bulb Replacement ..........................................5-47

Halogen Bulbs ..............................................5-47

Headlamps ..................................................5-47

Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and

Daytime Running Lamps .............................5-49

Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) .........5-50

Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and

Back-up Lamps .........................................5-50

Replacement Bulbs .......................................5-51

Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ..............5-52

Section 5 Service and Appearance Care

5-1

Tires ..............................................................5-54

Tire Sidewall Labelling ...................................5-55

Tire Terminology and Deﬁnitions .....................5-58

Inﬂation - Tire Pressure .................................5-60

Tire Inspection and Rotation ...........................5-62

When It Is Time for New Tires .......................5-63

Buying New Tires .........................................5-64

Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..........................5-65

Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ..................5-66

Wheel Replacement ......................................5-66

Tire Chains ..................................................5-68

If a Tire Goes Flat ........................................5-69

Changing a Flat Tire .....................................5-70

Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................5-71

Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the

Spare Tire ................................................5-74

Secondary Latch System ...............................5-81

Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ............5-84

Spare Tire ...................................................5-88

Appearance Care ............................................5-89

Fabric/Carpet ...............................................5-89

Vinyl ...........................................................5-91

Leather .......................................................5-91

Instrument Panel ..........................................5-92

Interior Plastic Components ............................5-92

Glass Surfaces .............................................5-92

Care of Safety Belts ......................................5-92

Weatherstrips ...............................................5-92

Washing Your Vehicle ...................................5-93

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .....................5-93

Finish Care ..................................................5-93

Windshield and Wiper Blades .........................5-94

Aluminum Wheels .........................................5-95

Tires ...........................................................5-95

Sheet Metal Damage .....................................5-96

Finish Damage .............................................5-96

Underbody Maintenance ................................5-96

Chemical Paint Spotting .................................5-96

Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ..................5-97

Vehicle Identiﬁcation ......................................5-98

Vehicle Identiﬁcation Number (VIN) .................5-98

Service Parts Identiﬁcation Label .....................5-98

Electrical System ............................................5-98

Add-On Electrical Equipment ..........................5-98

Windshield Wiper Fuses ................................5-99

Power Windows and Other Power Options .......5-99

Fuses and Circuit Breakers ............................5-99

Engine Compartment Fuse Block ...................5-100

Capacities and Speciﬁcations ........................5-103

Section 5 Service and Appearance Care

5-2

Service

Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to

be happy with it. We hope you will go to your dealer

for all your service needs. You will get genuine GM parts

and GM-trained and supported service people.

We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle all GM.

Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:

California Proposition 65 Warning

Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or

emit chemicals known to the State of California to

cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive

harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems

(including some inside the vehicle), many ﬂuids, and

some component wear by-products contain and/or emit

these chemicals.

5-3

Doing Your Own Service Work

If you want to do some of your own service work,

you will want to use the proper service manual. It tells

you much more about how to service your vehicle

than this manual can. To order the proper service

manual, see Service Publications Ordering Information

on page 7-11.

Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting

to do your own service work, see Servicing Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-74.

You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list

the mileage and the date of any service work you

perform. See Maintenance Record on page 6-16.

{CAUTION:

You can be injured and your vehicle could be

damaged if you try to do service work on a

vehicle without knowing enough about it.

• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,

experience, the proper replacement parts

and tools before you attempt any vehicle

maintenance task.

• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts and

other fasteners. English and metric

fasteners can be easily confused. If you

use the wrong fasteners, parts can later

break or fall off. You could be hurt.

5-4

Adding Equipment to the Outside

of Your Vehicle

Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle

can affect the airﬂow around it. This may cause

wind noise and affect windshield washer performance.

Check with your dealer before adding equipment to

the outside of your vehicle.

Fuel

Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the

proper maintenance of your vehicle.

Gasoline Octane

Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane

of 87 or higher. If the octane is less than 87, you may

get a heavy knocking noise when you drive. If this

occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as

soon as possible. Otherwise, you might damage

your engine. A little pinging noise when you accelerate

or drive uphill is considered normal. This does not

indicate a problem exists or that a higher-octane fuel is

necessary. If you are using 87 octane or higher-octane

fuel and hear heavy knocking, your engine needs

service.

Gasoline Speciﬁcations

It is recommended that gasoline meet speciﬁcations

which were developed by automobile manufacturers

around the world and contained in the World-Wide

Fuel Charter which is available from the

Alliance of Automobile Manufacturers at

www.autoalliance.org/fuel_charter.htm. Gasoline

meeting these speciﬁcations could provide improved

driveability and emission control system performance

compared to other gasoline.

5-5

California Fuel

If your vehicle is certiﬁed to meet California Emission

Standards (see the underhood emission control

label), it is designed to operate on fuels that meet

California speciﬁcations. If this fuel is not available in

states adopting California emissions standards,

your vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting

federal speciﬁcations, but emission control system

performance may be affected. The malfunction indicator

lamp may turn on and your vehicle may fail a

smog-check test. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on

page 3-30. If this occurs, return to your authorized

GM dealer for diagnosis. If it is determined that

the condition is caused by the type of fuel used,

repairs may not be covered by your warranty.

Additives

To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States

are now required to contain additives that will help

prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming,

allowing your emission control system to work

properly. In most cases, you should not have to add

anything to your fuel. However, some gasolines contain

only the minimum amount of additive required to

meet U.S. Environmental Protection Agency regulations.

General Motors recommends that you buy gasolines

that are advertised to help keep fuel injectors and intake

valves clean. If your vehicle experiences problems

due to dirty injectors or valves, try a different brand of

gasoline. Also, your GM dealer has additives that

will help correct and prevent most deposit-related

problems.

Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and

ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be available in

your area to contribute to clean air. General Motors

recommends that you use these gasolines, particularly if

they comply with the speciﬁcations described earlier.

5-6

Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that

contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing

methanol. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel

system and also damage the plastic and rubber

parts. That damage would not be covered under

your warranty.

Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low

emissions may contain an octane-enhancing additive

called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl

(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline

whether the fuel contains MMT. General Motors does

not recommend the use of such gasolines. Fuels

containing MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs and

the performance of the emission control system may

be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on.

If this occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer

for service.

Fuels in Foreign Countries

If you plan on driving in another country outside the

United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard

to ﬁnd. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel

not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly

repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not

be covered by your warranty.

To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or

contact a major oil company that does business in the

country where you will be driving.

5-7

Filling Your Tank

{CAUTION:

Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel ﬁre can

cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to you

and others, read and follow all the instructions

on the pump island. Turn off your engine when

you are refueling. Do not smoke if you are near

fuel or refueling your vehicle. Keep sparks,

ﬂames and smoking materials away from fuel.

Do not leave the fuel pump unattended when

refueling your vehicle — this is against the law

in some places. Keep children away from the

fuel pump; never let children pump fuel.

The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel

door on the driver’s side of the vehicle.

To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly to the left

(counterclockwise).

While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap from the

hook on the fuel door.

5-8

{CAUTION:

If you spill fuel and then something ignites it,

you could be badly burned. Fuel can spray out

on you if you open the fuel cap too quickly.

This spray can happen if your tank is nearly

full, and is more likely in hot weather. Open

the fuel cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise

to stop. Then unscrew the cap all the way.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overﬁll the

tank and wait a few seconds after you have ﬁnished

pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel

from painted surfaces as soon as possible.

See Washing Your Vehicle on page 5-93.

When replacing the fuel cap, turn it to the right

(clockwise) until it clicks. Make sure the cap is fully

installed. The diagnostic system can determine if the

fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed.

This would allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.

If the fuel cap is not properly installed, FUEL CAP will

appear on the DIC and the check engine light will

be lit on the instrument panel cluster. See DIC Warnings

and Messages on page 3-41 and Malfunction Indicator

Lamp on page 3-30 for more information.

{CAUTION:

If a ﬁre starts while you are refueling, do not

remove the nozzle. Shut off the ﬂow of fuel by

shutting off the pump or by notifying the

station attendant. Leave the area immediately.

Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get

the right type. Your dealer can get one for you.

If you get the wrong type, it may not ﬁt properly.

This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp to

light and may damage your fuel tank and emissions

system. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on

page 3-30.

5-9

Filling a Portable Fuel Container

{CAUTION:

Never ﬁll a portable fuel container while it is in

your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from

the container can ignite the gasoline vapor.

You can be badly burned and your vehicle

damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury to

you and others:

• Dispense gasoline only into approved

containers.

• Do not ﬁll a container while it is inside a

vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed or

on any surface other than the ground.

• Bring the ﬁll nozzle in contact with the

inside of the ﬁll opening before operating

the nozzle. Contact should be maintained

until the ﬁlling is complete.

• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.

Checking Things Under

the Hood

{CAUTION:

Things that burn can get on hot engine parts

and start a ﬁre. These include liquids like fuel,

oil, coolant, brake ﬂuid, windshield washer and

other ﬂuids, and plastic or rubber. You or

others could be burned. Be careful not to drop

or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.

5-10

Hood Release

To open the hood, do the following:

1. Pull the handle with

this symbol on it. It is

located inside the

vehicle on the lower

left side of the

instrument panel.

2. Release the secondary latch on the hood. It is

located below the front center of the hood.

3. Lift the hood.

4. Release the hood prop from its retainer and put the

hood prop into the slot in the hood.

Before closing the hood, be sure all the ﬁller caps are

on properly. Then lift the hood to relieve pressure on the

hood prop. Remove the hood prop from the slot in the

hood and return the prop to its retainer. Lower the hood

10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm) above the vehicle and

release it to latch fully. Check to make sure the hood is

closed and repeat the procedure if necessary.

5-11

Engine Compartment Overview

When you open the hood on the 2.8 L engine (3.5 L engine similar), you will see the following:

5-12

A. Windshield Washer Fluid. See “Adding Washer

Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5-36.

B. Coolant Recovery Tank. See Engine Coolant on

page 5-25.

C. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir (low in engine

compartment). See Power Steering Fluid on

page 5-35.

D. Transmission Fluid Dipstick. See Automatic

Transmission Fluid on page 5-19 and Manual

Transmission Fluid on page 5-22.

E. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”

under Engine Oil on page 5-13.

F. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid” under

Brakes on page 5-37.

G. Battery. See Battery on page 5-40.

H. Hydraulic Clutch Fluid Reservoir (If Equipped).

See Hydraulic Clutch on page 5-24.

I. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air

Cleaner/Filter on page 5-18.

J. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”

under Engine Oil on page 5-13.

K. Radiator Pressure Cap. See Cooling System on

page 5-30.

L. Remote Negative (−) Terminal. See Jump Starting

on page 5-41.

M. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump Starting on

page 5-41.

N. Engine Compartment Fuse Block. See Engine

Compartment Fuse Block on page 5-100.

Engine Oil

Checking Engine Oil

It is a good idea to check your engine oil every time you

get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil

must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.

The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop.

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for

the location of the engine oil dipstick.

1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes

to drain back into the oil pan. If you do not do this,

the oil dipstick might not show the actual level.

2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel

or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it

again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.

5-13

When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is at or below the cross-hatched area (L), then

you will need to add at least one quart of oil. But you

must use the right kind. This section explains what kind

of oil to use. For engine oil crankcase capacity, see

Capacities and Speciﬁcations on page 5-103.

Notice: Do not add too much oil. If your engine

has so much oil that the oil level gets above

the cross-hatched area that shows the proper

operating range, your engine could be damaged.

See Engine Compartment

Overview on page 5-12 for

the location of the

engine oil ﬁll cap.

Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere in

the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the

way back in when you are through.

What Kind of Engine Oil to Use

Look for two things:

• GM6094M

Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting GM

Standard GM6094M. You should look for and use

only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.

5-14

• SAE 5W-30

As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is best

for your vehicle.

These numbers on an oil container show its

viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity

oils such as SAE 20W-50.

Oils meeting these

requirements should also

have the starburst

symbol on the container.

This symbol indicates

that the oil has been

certiﬁed by the American

Petroleum Institute (API).

You should look for this information on the oil container,

and use only those oils that are identiﬁed as meeting

GM Standard GM6094M and have the starburst symbol

on the front of the oil container.

5-15

Notice: Use only engine oil identiﬁed as meeting

GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American

Petroleum Institute Certiﬁed For Gasoline Engines

starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended

oil can result in engine damage not covered by

your warranty.

GM Goodwrench

oil meets all the requirements for

your vehicle.

If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the

temperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it is

recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30

synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both will provide

easier cold starting and better protection for your engine

at extremely low temperatures.

Engine Oil Additives

Do not add anything to your oil. The recommended oils

with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard

GM6094M are all you will need for good performance

and engine protection.

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine Oil

Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know

when to change the engine oil and ﬁlter. This is based

on engine revolutions and engine temperature, and

not on mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage

at which an oil change will be indicated can vary

considerably. For the oil life system to work properly,

you must reset the system every time the oil is changed.

When the system has calculated that oil life has been

diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is

necessary. A CHANGE OIL message will come on.

See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-41.

Change your oil as soon as possible within the next

600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are

driving under the best conditions, the oil life system may

not indicate that an oil change is necessary for over a

year. However, your engine oil and ﬁlter must be

changed at least once a year and at this time the system

must be reset. Your dealer has GM-trained people

who will perform this work using genuine GM parts and

reset the system. It is also important to check your

oil regularly and keep it at the proper level.

If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must

change your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your

last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system

whenever the oil is changed.

5-16

How to Reset the Engine Oil Life

System

The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to

change your engine oil and ﬁlter based on vehicle use.

Anytime your oil is changed, reset the system so it

can calculate when the next oil change is required.

If a situation occurs where you change your oil prior

to a CHANGE OIL message being turned on,

reset the system.

To reset the Engine Oil Life system, do the following:

1. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON.

2. Press and release the reset button in the DIC until

the OIL LIFE message is displayed.

3. Once the alternating OIL LIFE and RESET

messages appear on the DIC display, press

and hold the reset stem until several beeps

sound. This conﬁrms that the oil life system has

been reset.

4. Turn the key to LOCK.

If the CHANGE OIL message comes back on when you

start your vehicle, the engine oil life system has not

reset. Repeat the procedure.

What to Do with Used Oil

Used engine oil contains certain elements that may be

unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.

Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean

your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good

hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or

rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s

warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you

change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the

ﬁlter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it

in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers,

or into streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by

taking it to a place that collects used oil. If you have

a problem properly disposing of your used oil, ask your

dealer, a service station or a local recycling center

for help.

5-17

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

The engine air cleaner/ﬁlter is located in the engine

compartment on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12

for more information on location.

When to Inspect the Engine Air

Cleaner/Filter

Inspect the air cleaner/ﬁlter at the Maintenance II

intervals and replace it at the ﬁrst oil change after

50,000 miles (83 000 km). See Scheduled Maintenance

on page 6-4 for more information. If you are driving

in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the ﬁlter at each engine

oil change.

How to Inspect the Engine Air

Cleaner/Filter

To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/ﬁlter,

do the following:

1. Unfasten the clips that hold the cover on and

remove the cover.

2. Lift out the engine air cleaner/ﬁlter.

3. Inspect or replace the air ﬁlter. See Normal

Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 6-15 to

determine which ﬁlter to use.

4. Reinstall the engine air cleaner/ﬁlter cover.

Fasten the clips to hold the cover in place.

5-18

{CAUTION:

Operating the engine with the air cleaner/ﬁlter

off can cause you or others to be burned.

The air cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps

to stop ﬂame if the engine backﬁres. If it is

not there and the engine backﬁres, you could

be burned. Do not drive with it off, and be

careful working on the engine with the air

cleaner/ﬁlter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/ﬁlter is off, a backﬁre can

cause a damaging engine ﬁre. And, dirt can

easily get into your engine, which will damage it.

Always have the air cleaner/ﬁlter in place when you

are driving.

Automatic Transmission Fluid

When to Check and Change

A good time to check your automatic transmission ﬂuid

level is when the engine oil is changed.

Change both the ﬂuid and ﬁlter every 50,000 miles

(83 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or

more of these conditions:

• In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature

regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.

• In hilly or mountainous terrain.

• When doing frequent trailer towing.

• Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery

service.

If you do not use your vehicle under any of these

conditions, change the ﬂuid and ﬁlter every

100,000 miles (166 000 km).

See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4.

5-19

How to Check

Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may

choose to have this done at the dealership service

department.

If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions

here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.

Notice: Too much or too little ﬂuid can damage

your transmission. Too little ﬂuid could cause the

transmission to overheat. Be sure to get an accurate

reading if you check your transmission ﬂuid.

Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the

transmission ﬂuid level if you have been driving:

• When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C).

• At high speed for quite a while.

• In heavy traffic — especially in hot weather.

• While pulling a trailer.

To get the right reading, the ﬂuid should be at normal

operating temperature, which is 180°F to 200°F

(82°C to 93°C).

Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles

(24 km) when outside temperatures are above 50°F

(10°C). If it is colder than 50°F (10°C), drive the vehicle

in THIRD (3) until the engine temperature gage

moves and then remains steady for 10 minutes.

A cold ﬂuid check can be made after the vehicle has

been sitting for eight hours or more with the engine off,

but this is used only as a reference. Let the engine

run at idle for ﬁve minutes if outside temperatures are

50°F (10°C) or more. If it is colder than 50°F (10°C),

you may have to idle the engine longer. Should the ﬂuid

level be low during this cold check, you must check

the ﬂuid hot before adding ﬂuid. Checking the ﬂuid hot

will give you a more accurate reading of the ﬂuid level.

5-20

Checking the Fluid Level

Prepare your vehicle as follows:

• Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the engine

running.

• With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever

in PARK (P).

• With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift

lever through each gear range, pausing for about

three seconds in each range. Then, position the shift

lever in PARK (P).

• Let the engine run at idle for three minutes or more.

Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps:

The transmission dipstick

handle has this symbol

on it.

The transmission dipstick is located toward the rear of

the engine compartment on the passenger’s side of

the vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview

on page 5-12 for more information on location.

1. Flip the handle up and then pull out the dipstick

and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.

2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and

then pull it back out again.

3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the lower

level. The ﬂuid level must be in the COLD area,

below the cross-hatched area, for a cold check or in

the HOT or cross-hatched area for a hot check.

4. If the ﬂuid level is in the acceptable range, push the

dipstick back in all the way; then ﬂip the handle

down to lock the dipstick in place.

5-21

How to Add Fluid

Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what

kind of transmission ﬂuid to use. See Recommended

Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13.

Add ﬂuid only after checking the transmission ﬂuid while

it is hot. A cold check is used only as a reference.

If the ﬂuid level is low, add only enough of the proper

ﬂuid to bring the level up to the HOT area for a hot

check. It does not take much ﬂuid, generally less than

one pint (0.5 L). Do not overﬁll.

Notice: Use of automatic transmission ﬂuid labeled

other than DEXRON

-III, Approved for the

H-Speciﬁcation, may damage your vehicle, and the

damages may not be covered by your warranty.

Always use automatic transmission ﬂuid labeled

DEXRON

-III, Approved for the H-Speciﬁcation.

• After adding ﬂuid, recheck the ﬂuid level as

described under “How to Check,” earlier in

this section.

• When the correct ﬂuid level is obtained, push the

dipstick back in all the way; then ﬂip the handle

down to lock the dipstick in place.

Manual Transmission Fluid

When to Check

A good time to have it checked is when the engine oil is

changed. However, the ﬂuid in your manual transmission

does not require changing.

How to Check

Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may

choose to have this done at your GM dealership

service department.

If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions

here, or you could get a false reading.

Notice: Too much or too little ﬂuid can damage

your transmission. Too little ﬂuid could cause

the transmission to overheat. Be sure to get an

accurate reading if you check your transmission

ﬂuid.

Check the ﬂuid level only when your engine is off, the

vehicle is parked on a level place and the transmission

is cool enough for you to rest your ﬁngers on the

transmission case.

5-22

Then, follow these steps:

1. Remove the ﬁller plug.

2. Check that the lubricant level is up to the bottom of

the ﬁller plug hole.

3. If the ﬂuid level is good, install the plug and be sure

it is fully seated. If the ﬂuid level is low, add more

ﬂuid as described in the next steps.

How to Add Fluid

Here is how to add ﬂuid. Refer to the Maintenance

Schedule to determine what kind of ﬂuid to use.

See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on

page 6-13.

1. Remove the ﬁller plug.

2. Add ﬂuid at the ﬁller plug hole. Add only enough

ﬂuid to bring the ﬂuid level up to the bottom of the

ﬁller plug hole.

3. Install the ﬁller plug. Be sure the plug is fully

seated.

5-23

Hydraulic Clutch

The hydraulic clutch linkage in your vehicle is

self-adjusting. The clutch master cylinder reservoir is

ﬁlled with hydraulic clutch ﬂuid.

The hydraulic clutch ﬂuid

reservoir cap has this

symbol on it. See Engine

Compartment Overview

on page 5-12 for reservoir

location.

It is not necessary to regularly check clutch ﬂuid

unless you suspect there is a leak in the system.

Adding ﬂuid will not correct a leak.

A ﬂuid loss in this system could indicate a problem.

Have the system inspected and repaired.

When to Check and What to Use

Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how

often you should check the ﬂuid level in your clutch

master cylinder reservoir and for the proper ﬂuid.

See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on

page 6-13.

5-24

How to Check and Add Fluid

The proper ﬂuid should be added if the level does not

reach the bottom of the diaphragm when it is in place in

the reservoir. See the instructions on the reservoir cap.

Engine Coolant

The cooling system in your vehicle is ﬁlled with

DEX-COOL

engine coolant. This coolant is designed

to remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150,000 miles

(240 000 km), whichever occurs ﬁrst, if you add

only DEX-COOL

extended life coolant.

The following explains your cooling system and how to

add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem

with engine overheating, see Engine Overheating on

page 5-28.

A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and

DEX-COOL

coolant will:

• Give freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C).

• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).

• Protect against rust and corrosion.

• Help keep the proper engine temperature.

• Let the warning lights and gages work as they

should.

Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL

may

cause premature engine, heater core or radiator

corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may

require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)

or 24 months, whichever occurs ﬁrst. Any repairs

would not be covered by your warranty. Always use

DEX-COOL

(silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.

5-25

What to Use

Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and

one-half DEX-COOL

coolant which will not damage

aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, you do

not need to add anything else.

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your cooling

system can be dangerous. Plain water, or

some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil

before the proper coolant mixture will. Your

vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the

proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the

wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot

but you would not get the overheat warning.

Your engine could catch ﬁre and you or others

could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,

drinkable water and the proper coolant.

Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture,

your engine could overheat and be badly damaged.

The repair cost would not be covered by your

warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze

and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and

other parts.

Notice: If you use the proper coolant, you do not

have to add extra inhibitors or additives which claim

to improve the system. These can be harmful.

Checking Coolant

The coolant recovery tank

is located toward the rear

of the engine compartment

on the passenger’s side

of the vehicle. See Engine

Compartment Overview

on page 5-12 for more

information on location.

The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your

engine is cold, the coolant level should be at FULL

COLD, or a little higher. When your engine is warm,

the level could be above the FULL COLD level.

5-26

Adding Coolant

If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOL

coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank.

{CAUTION:

Turning the radiator pressure cap when the

engine and radiator are hot can allow steam

and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you

badly. With the coolant recovery tank, you will

almost never have to add coolant at the

radiator. Never turn the radiator pressure

cap — even a little — when the engine and

radiator are hot.

Add coolant mixture at the recovery tank, but be careful

not to spill it.

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot

engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,

and it will burn if the engine parts are hot

enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.

Occasionally check the coolant level in the radiator.

For information on how to add coolant to the radiator,

see Cooling System on page 5-30.

5-27

Radiator Pressure Cap

Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,

coolant loss and possible engine damage may

occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly

secured.

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for

more information on location.

Engine Overheating

You will ﬁnd a coolant temperature gage on your

vehicle’s instrument panel. See Engine Coolant

Temperature Gage on page 3-30.

Your air conditioning may stop working if your engine is

too hot. This is normal and helps cool the engine.

If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine

{CAUTION:

Steam from an overheated engine can burn

you badly, even if you just open the hood.

Stay away from the engine if you see or hear

steam coming from it. Just turn it off and get

everyone away from the vehicle until it cools

down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or

coolant before you open the hood.

If you keep driving when your engine is

overheated, the liquids in it can catch ﬁre.

You or others could be badly burned. Stop

your engine if it overheats, and get out of the

vehicle until the engine is cool.

Notice: If your engine catches ﬁre because you

keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can

be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be

covered by your warranty.

5-28

If No Steam Is Coming From Your

Engine

If you get an engine overheat warning but see or hear

no steam, the problem may not be too serious.

Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you:

• Climb a long hill on a hot day.

• Stop after high-speed driving.

• Idle for long periods in traffic.

• Tow a trailer. See “Driving on Grades” under

Towing a Trailer on page 4-56.

If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,

try this for a minute or so:

1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in NEUTRAL

while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the

road, shift to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL and let the

engine idle.

2. Turn off the air conditioning.

3. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan

speed and open the windows as necessary.

If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can

drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.

If the warning does not come back on, you can drive

normally.

If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park your

vehicle right away.

If there is still no sign of steam, idle the engine for

three minutes while you are parked. Push down

the accelerator until the engine speed is about twice as

fast as normal idle speed for at least three minutes

while you are parked. If you still have the warning, turn

off the engine and get everyone out of the vehicle

until it cools down.

You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service

help right away.

5-29

Cooling System

When you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here is what

you will see:

A. Coolant Recovery Tank

B. Engine Cooling Fan

C. Radiator Pressure Cap

If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling,

do not do anything else until it cools down. The vehicle

should be parked on a level surface.

When the engine is cold, the coolant level should be at

least up to the FULL COLD mark. If it is not, you

may have a leak at the pressure cap or in the radiator

hoses, heater hoses, radiator, water pump or

somewhere else in the cooling system.

5-30

{CAUTION:

Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine

parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them.

If you do, you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you

run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That

could cause an engine ﬁre, and you could be

burned. Get any leak ﬁxed before you drive the

vehicle.

If there seems to be no leak, start the engine again.

The engine cooling fan speed should increase when idle

speed is doubled by pushing the accelerator pedal

down. If it does not, your vehicle needs service. Turn off

the engine.

Notice: Engine damage from running your engine

without coolant is not covered by your warranty.

Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL

may

cause premature engine, heater core or radiator

corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may

require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)

or 24 months, whichever occurs ﬁrst. Any repairs

would not be covered by your warranty. Always use

DEX-COOL

(silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.

How to Add Coolant to the Coolant

Recovery Tank

If you have not found a problem yet, but the coolant

level is not at the FULL COLD mark, add a 50/50

mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL

engine coolant at the coolant recovery tank. See Engine

Coolant on page 5-25 for more information.

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your cooling

system can be dangerous. Plain water, or

some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil

before the proper coolant mixture will. Your

vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the

proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the

wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot

but you would not get the overheat warning.

Your engine could catch ﬁre and you or others

could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,

drinkable water and DEX-COOL

coolant.

5-31

Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack

the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.

Use the recommended coolant and the proper

coolant mixture.

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot

engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol

and it will burn if the engine parts are hot

enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.

When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is at the

FULL COLD mark, start your vehicle.

If the overheat warning continues, there is one more

thing you can try. You can add the proper mixture

directly to the radiator, but be sure the cooling system is

cool before you do it.

{CAUTION:

Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling

system can blow out and burn you badly. They

are under pressure, and if you turn the radiator

pressure cap — even a little — they can come

out at high speed. Never turn the cap when the

cooling system, including the radiator pressure

cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and

radiator pressure cap to cool if you ever have

to turn the pressure cap.

5-32

How to Add Coolant to the Radiator

1. You can remove the radiator pressure cap when

the cooling system, including the upper radiator

hose, is no longer hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly

counterclockwise about one full turn.

If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss

means there is still some pressure left.

2. Then keep turning the cap to remove it.

3. Fill the radiator with the proper DEX-COOL

coolant mixture, up to the base of the ﬁller

neck. See Engine Coolant on page 5-25 for more

information about the proper coolant mixture.

4. Then ﬁll the coolant recovery tank to the

FULL COLD mark.

5. Reinstall the cap on the coolant recovery tank, but

leave the radiator pressure cap off.

5-33

6. Start the engine and let it run until you can feel the

upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the

engine cooling fan.

7. By this time, the coolant level inside the radiator

ﬁller neck may be lower. If the level is lower, add

more of the proper DEX-COOL

coolant mixture

through the ﬁller neck until the level reaches

the base of the ﬁller neck.

Then replace the pressure cap. At any time during

this procedure if coolant begins to ﬂow out of

the ﬁller neck, reinstall the pressure cap. Be sure to

secure it tightly.

Engine Fan Noise

This vehicle has a clutched engine cooling fan.

When the clutch is engaged, the fan spins faster to

provide more air to cool the engine. In most everyday

driving conditions, the clutch is not engaged.

This improves fuel economy and reduces fan noise.

Under heavy vehicle loading, trailer towing and/or high

outside temperatures, the fan speed increases when

the clutch engages. So you may hear an increase in fan

noise. This is normal and should not be mistaken as

the transmission slipping or making extra shifts.

It is merely the cooling system functioning properly.

The fan will slow down when additional cooling is not

required and the clutch disengages.

You may also hear this fan noise when you start the

engine. It will go away as the fan clutch disengages.

5-34

Power Steering Fluid

The power steering ﬂuid

reservoir is located near

the front of the engine

compartment, behind the

radiator. See Engine

Compartment Overview

on page 5-12 for reservoir

location.

When to Check Power Steering Fluid

It is not necessary to regularly check power steering ﬂuid

unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or

you hear an unusual noise. A ﬂuid loss in this system

could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected

and repaired.

How to Check Power Steering Fluid

1. Turn the key off and let the engine compartment

cool down.

2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.

3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a

clean rag.

4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.

5. Then remove the cap again and look at the ﬂuid

level on the dipstick.

The level should be between the ADD and FULL marks.

If necessary, add only enough ﬂuid to bring the level

up to the proper range.

What to Use

To determine what kind of ﬂuid to use, see

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13.

Always use the proper ﬂuid. Failure to use the proper

ﬂuid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.

5-35

Windshield Washer Fluid

What to Use

When you need windshield washer ﬂuid, be sure to read

the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will

be operating your vehicle in an area where the

temperature may fall below freezing, use a ﬂuid that has

sufficient protection against freezing.

Adding Washer Fluid

Open the cap with the

washer symbol on it.

Add washer ﬂuid until the

tank is full. See Engine

Compartment Overview on

page 5-12 for reservoir

location.

Notice:

• When using concentrated washer ﬂuid,

follow the manufacturer’s instructions for

adding water.

• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer ﬂuid.

Water can cause the solution to freeze and

damage your washer ﬂuid tank and other parts

of the washer system. Also, water does not

clean as well as washer ﬂuid.

• Fill your washer ﬂuid tank only three-quarters

full when it is very cold. This allows for

expansion if freezing occurs, which could

damage the tank if it is completely full.

• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your

windshield washer. It can damage your washer

system and paint.

5-36

Brakes

Brake Fluid

Your brake master cylinder

reservoir is ﬁlled with

DOT-3 brake ﬂuid.

See Engine Compartment

Overview on page 5-12

for the location of the

reservoir.

There are only two reasons why the brake ﬂuid level in

the reservoir might go down. The ﬁrst is that the

brake ﬂuid goes down to an acceptable level during

normal brake lining wear. When new linings are put in,

the ﬂuid level goes back up. The other reason is

that ﬂuid is leaking out of the brake system. If it is, you

should have your brake system ﬁxed, since a leak

means that sooner or later your brakes will not work

well, or will not work at all.

So, it is not a good idea to top off your brake ﬂuid.

Adding brake ﬂuid will not correct a leak. If you add ﬂuid

when your linings are worn, then you will have too

much ﬂuid when you get new brake linings. You should

add or remove brake ﬂuid, as necessary, only when

work is done on the brake hydraulic system.

{CAUTION:

If you have too much brake ﬂuid, it can spill on

the engine. The ﬂuid will burn if the engine is

hot enough. You or others could be burned,

and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake

ﬂuid only when work is done on the brake

hydraulic system. See “Checking Brake Fluid”

in this section.

Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when

to check your brake ﬂuid. See Scheduled Maintenance

on page 6-4.

5-37

Checking Brake Fluid

You can check the brake ﬂuid without taking off the cap.

Just look at the brake ﬂuid

reservoir. The ﬂuid level

should be above MIN. If it

is not have your brake

system checked to see if

there is a leak.

After work is done on the brake hydraulic system,

make sure the level is above the MIN but not over the

MAX mark.

What to Add

When you do need brake ﬂuid, use only DOT-3 brake

ﬂuid. Use new brake ﬂuid from a sealed container only.

See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13.

Always clean the brake ﬂuid reservoir cap and the area

around the cap before removing it. This will help

keep dirt from entering the reservoir.

{CAUTION:

With the wrong kind of ﬂuid in your brake

system, your brakes may not work well, or they

may not even work at all. This could cause a

crash. Always use the proper brake ﬂuid.

Notice:

• Using the wrong ﬂuid can badly damage brake

system parts. For example, just a few drops of

mineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in your

brake system can damage brake system parts

so badly that they will have to be replaced.

Do not let someone put in the wrong kind

of ﬂuid.

• If you spill brake ﬂuid on your vehicle’s painted

surfaces, the paint ﬁnish can be damaged.

Be careful not to spill brake ﬂuid on your

vehicle. If you do, wash it off immediately.

See Appearance Care on page 5-89.

5-38

Brake Wear

Your vehicle has front disc brakes and rear drum brakes.

Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make

a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads

are worn and new pads are needed. The sound

may come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle

is moving, except when you are pushing on the

brake pedal ﬁrmly.

{CAUTION:

The brake wear warning sound means that soon

your brakes will not work well. That could lead

to an accident. When you hear the brake wear

warning sound, have your vehicle serviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake

pads could result in costly brake repair.

Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake

squeal when the brakes are ﬁrst applied or lightly

applied. This does not mean something is wrong with

your brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help

prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect

brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in

the proper sequence to GM torque speciﬁcations.

Rear drum brakes do not have wear indicators, but if

you ever hear a rear brake rubbing noise, have the rear

brake linings inspected immediately. Also, the rear

brake drums should be removed and inspected each

time the tires are removed for rotation or changing.

When you have the front brake pads replaced, have the

rear brakes inspected, too.

Brake linings should always be replaced as complete

axle sets.

Brake Pedal Travel

See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to

normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in

pedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.

Brake Adjustment

Every time you make a brake stop, your brakes adjust

for wear.

5-39

Replacing Brake System Parts

The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many

parts have to be of top quality and work well together if

the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your vehicle

was designed and tested with top-quality GM brake parts.

When you replace parts of your braking system — for

example, when your brake linings wear down and you

need new ones put in — be sure you get new approved

GM replacement parts. If you do not, your brakes may no

longer work properly. For example, if someone puts in

brake linings that are wrong for your vehicle, the balance

between your front and rear brakes can change — for the

worse. The braking performance you have come to

expect can change in many other ways if someone puts

in the wrong replacement brake parts.

Battery

Your vehicle has a maintenance free battery.

When it is time for a new battery, get one that has the

replacement number shown on the original battery’s

label. We recommend an ACDelco

replacement

battery. See Engine Compartment Overview on

page 5-12 for battery location.

Warning: Battery posts, terminals and related

accessories contain lead and lead compounds,

chemicals known to the State of California to cause

cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after

handling.

Vehicle Storage

If you are not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days

or more, remove the black, negative (−) cable from

the battery. This will help keep your battery from

running down.

{CAUTION:

Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas

that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you

are not careful. See Jump Starting on page 5-41

for tips on working around a battery without

getting hurt.

Also, for your audio system, see Theft-Deterrent

Feature (Non-RDS Radios) on page 3-74 or

Theft-Deterrent Feature (RDS Radios) on page 3-74.

5-40

Jump Starting

If your battery has run down, you may want to use

another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your

vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely.

{CAUTION:

Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous

because:

• They contain acid that can burn you.

• They contain gas that can explode or ignite.

• They contain enough electricity to burn you.

If you do not follow these steps exactly, some or

all of these things can hurt you.

Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly

damage to your vehicle that would not be covered

by your warranty.

Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it

will not work, and it could damage your vehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt

battery with a negative ground system.

Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt

system with a negative ground, both vehicles can

be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems

with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.

2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables

can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching

each other. If they are, it could cause a ground

connection you do not want. You would not be able

to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding

could damage the electrical systems.

To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set

the parking brake ﬁrmly on both vehicles involved in

the jump start procedure. Put an automatic

transmission in PARK (P) or a manual transmission

in NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake.

If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure the

transfer case is not in NEUTRAL (N).

Notice: If you leave your radio or other accessories

on during the jump starting procedure, they could

be damaged. The repairs would not be covered

by your warranty. Always turn off your radio and

other accessories when jump starting your vehicle.

3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug

unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette

lighter or the accessory power outlets. Turn off

the radio and all lamps that are not needed. This will

avoid sparks and help save both batteries. And it

could save the radio!

5-41

4. Open the hoods and locate the positive (+) and

negative (−) terminal locations on the other

vehicle. Your vehicle has a remote positive (+) and

a remote negative (−) jump starting terminal.

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12

for more information on the terminal locations.

{CAUTION:

Using a match near a battery can cause battery

gas to explode. People have been hurt doing

this, and some have been blinded. Use a

ﬂashlight if you need more light.

Be sure the batteries have enough water.

You do not need to add water to the ACDelco

battery (or batteries) installed in your new

vehicle. But if a battery has ﬁller caps, be sure

the right amount of ﬂuid is there. If it is low,

add water to take care of that ﬁrst. If you do

not, explosive gas could be present.

Battery ﬂuid contains acid that can burn you.

Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it

in your eyes or on your skin, ﬂush the place

with water and get medical help immediately.

{CAUTION:

Fans or other moving engine parts can injure

you badly. Keep your hands away from moving

parts once the engine is running.

5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or

missing insulation. If they do, you could get a

shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.

Before you connect the cables, here are some

basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to

positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if

the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a heavy,

unpainted metal engine part or to a remote

negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.

Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−)oryou

will get a short that would damage the battery

and maybe other parts too. And do not connect the

negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on

the dead battery because this can cause sparks.

5-42

6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)

terminal of the dead battery. Use a remote

positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.

7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to

the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a

remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.

8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the

negative (−) terminal of the good battery. Use a

remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.

Do not let the other end touch anything until the

next step. The other end of the negative (−) cable

does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a

heavy, unpainted metal engine part, or to a remote

negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the

dead battery.

9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable at

least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead battery,

but not near engine parts that move. The electrical

connection is just as good there, and the chance

of sparks getting back to the battery is much less.

Your vehicle has a remote negative (−) terminal

for this purpose. See Engine Compartment

Overview on page 5-12 for the location of the

remote negative (−) terminal.

10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run

the engine for a while.

11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery.

If it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs

service.

5-43

Notice: If the jumper cables are removed in the

wrong order, electrical shorting may occur and

damage the vehicle. The repairs would not be

covered by your warranty. Remove the jumper

cables in the correct order, making sure that the

cables do not touch each other or other metal.

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part

B. Good Battery

C. Dead Battery

To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles,

do the following:

1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the

vehicle that had the dead battery.

2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the

vehicle with the good battery.

3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the

vehicle with the good battery.

4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the

other vehicle.

Rear Axle

When to Check and Change Lubricant

It is not necessary to regularly check rear axle ﬂuid

unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an

unusual noise. A ﬂuid loss could indicate a problem.

Have it inspected and repaired.

How to Check Lubricant

To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a

level surface.

Jumper Cable Removal

5-44

If the level is below the bottom of the ﬁller plug hole,

located on the rear axle, you will need to add some

lubricant. Add enough lubricant to raise the level to the

bottom of the ﬁller plug hole.

What to Use

See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13

to determine which kind of lubricant to use.

Four-Wheel Drive

Lubricant checks in this section apply to this vehicle.

There are two additional systems that need lubrication.

Transfer Case

When to Check Lubricant

Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how

often to check the lubricant. See Additional Required

Services on page 6-6.

How to Check Lubricant

To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a

level surface.

If the level is below the bottom of the ﬁller plug hole,

located on the transfer case, you’ll need to add

some lubricant. Remove the plug and add enough

lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the ﬁller plug

hole. Use care not to overtighten the plug.

What to Use

Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what

kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids

and Lubricants on page 6-13.

5-45

Front Axle

When to Check and Change Lubricant

It is not necessary to regularly check your front axle

ﬂuid unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an

unusual noise. A ﬂuid loss could indicate a problem.

Have it inspected and repaired.

How to Check Lubricant

To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a

level surface.

If the level is below the bottom of the ﬁller plug hole,

located on the front axle, you may need to add

some lubricant.

When the differential is cold, add enough lubricant to raise

the level to 1/2 inch (12 mm) below the ﬁller plug hole.

When the differential is at operating temperature (warm),

add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom

of the ﬁller plug hole.

What to Use

See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13

to determine what kind of lubricant to use.

5-46

Bulb Replacement

For the proper types of bulbs to use, see Replacement

Bulbs on page 5-51.

For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this

section, contact your dealer’s service department.

Halogen Bulbs

{CAUTION:

Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and

can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or

others could be injured. Be sure to read and

follow the instructions on the bulb package.

Headlamps

Composite Headlamp System

A. Low-Beam Headlamp

B. High-Beam Headlamp

5-47

To replace the bulbs, do the following:

1. Open and support the hood. See Hood Release

on page 5-11.

2. Access the bulb/sockets from the engine

compartment.

3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull it

straight out of the headlamp housing.

4. Unplug the electrical connector from the old bulb.

5. Plug in the electrical connector to the new bulb.

Use care not to touch the new bulb with your

bare hand, anything damp or oily.

6. Place the connector with the new bulb into the

headlamp housing and turn it clockwise until it

is tight.

Sealed Beam Headlamps

To replace the headlamp capsule, do the following:

1. Remove the four retainer screws and the retainer.

2. Pull the headlamp capsule toward you and

unplug the electrical connector from it.

3. Remove the old headlamp capsule.

4. Plug the electrical connector into the new headlamp

capsule.

5. Reverse Steps 1 and 2 to reinstall the headlamp.

5-48

Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and

Daytime Running Lamps

1. Remove the turn signal/parking lamp/daytime

running lamp (DRL) assembly by pressing on the

release clip on the outboard side of the housing and

pulling the outboard end of the lamp toward you.

2. Pull the inboard side of the lamp out from the small

post in the grille.

3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove

it from the lamp housing.

4. Remove the old bulb from the bulb socket.

5. Insert the new bulb into the bulb socket.

6. Insert the bulb socket into the lamp housing and

turn it clockwise until it is tight.

7. Place the inboard end of the turn signal/parking

lamp/DRL housing over the small post in the grille.

8. Align the release clip of the lamp assembly with the

square opening in the grille.

9. Push the outboard side of the lamp assembly in,

until the release clip snaps into place.

5-49

Center High-Mounted Stoplamp

(CHMSL)

1. Remove the screws and lift off the lamp assembly.

2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove

it from the housing.

3. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket.

4. Insert the new bulb into the socket and press it in

until tight.

5. Insert the bulb socket into the housing and turn

until tight.

6. Reinstall the lamp assembly and tighten the screws.

Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps

and Back-up Lamps

A. Stoplamp/Taillamp

B. Turn Signal

C. Back-up Lamp

1. Open the tailgate. See Tailgate on page 2-10.

5-50

2. Remove the two rear

lamp assembly screws

near the tailgate latch.

3. Pull out the lamp assembly.

4. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove it

from the taillamp housing.

5. Pull the old bulb straight out from the socket.

6. Press a new bulb into the socket and turn the socket

clockwise into the taillamp housing until it is tight.

7. Reinstall the rear lamp assembly and tighten the

screws.

8. Close the tailgate.

Replacement Bulbs

Exterior Lamp Bulb Number

Center High-Mounted

Stoplamp (CHMSL)

912

Headlamp

Composite High-Beam

Composite Low-Beam

Sealed-Beam

9005

9006

H6054

Parking/Front Turn Signal/Daytime

Running Lamp (DRL)

3757A

Parking Lamp (Inboard) 3157A

Stoplamp, Rear Turn Signal,

Taillamp, and Back-Up Lamp

3057

For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact your

dealer.

5-51

Windshield Wiper Blade

Replacement

Windshield wiper blades should be inspected at least

twice a year for wear and cracking. See “Wiper

Blade Check” under Scheduled Maintenance on

page 6-4 for more information.

Replacement blades come in different types and are

removed in different ways. For proper type and length,

see Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts on

page 6-15.

Notice: Allowing the wiper blade arm to touch the

windshield when no wiper blade is installed

could damage the windshield. Any damage that

occurs would not be covered by your warranty.

Do not allow the wiper blade arm to touch the

windshield.

1. To remove the old wiper blades, lift the wiper arm

until it locks into a vertical position.

A. Blade Assembly

B. Arm Assembly

C. Locking Tab

D. Blade Pivot

E. Hook Slot

F. Arm Hook

2. Press down on the blade assembly pivot locking

tab. Pull down on the blade assembly to release it

from the wiper arm hook.

5-52

3. Remove the insert from the blade assembly. The

insert has two notches at one end that are locked by

bottom claws of the blade assembly. At the notched

end, pull the insert from the blade assembly.

4. To install the new wiper insert, slide the insert (D),

notched end last, into the end with two blade

claws (A). Slide the insert all the way through the

blade claws at the opposite end (B). The plastic

caps (C) will be forced off as the insert is fully

inserted.

5. Be sure that the notches are locked by the bottom

claws. Make sure that all other claws are properly

locked on both sides of the insert slots.

A. Claw in Notch

B. Correct Installation

C. Incorrect Installation

6. Put the blade assembly pivot in the wiper arm hook.

Pull up until the pivot locking tab locks in the

hook slot.

7. Carefully lower the wiper arm and blade assembly

onto the windshield.

5-53

Tires

Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by

a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions

about your tire warranty and where to obtain service,

see your GM Warranty booklet for details. For additional

information refer to the tire manufacturer’s booklet

included with your vehicle’s Owner’s Manual.

{CAUTION:

Poorly maintained and improperly used tires

are dangerous.

• Overloading your tires can cause

overheating as a result of too much

friction. You could have an air-out and a

serious accident. See Loading Your

Vehicle on page 4-44.

CAUTION: (Continued)

•

Underinﬂated tires pose the same danger

as overloaded tires. The resulting accident

could cause serious injury. Check all tires

frequently to maintain the recommended

pressure. Tire pressure should be checked

when your tires are cold. See Inﬂation -

Tire Pressure on page 5-60.

• Overinﬂated tires are more likely to be

cut, punctured or broken by a sudden

impact — such as when you hit a pothole.

Keep tires at the recommended pressure.

• Worn, old tires can cause accidents.

If your tread is badly worn, or if your tires

have been damaged, replace them.

5-54

Tire Sidewall Labelling

Useful information about a tire is molded into its

sidewall. The examples below show a typical passenger

vehicle tire and a compact spare tire sidewall.

(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of letters

and numbers used to deﬁne a particular tire’s width,

height, aspect ratio, construction type and service

description. See the “Tire Size” illustration later in this

section for more detail.

(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria

Speciﬁcation): Original equipment tires designed to

GM’s speciﬁc tire performance criteria have a TPC

speciﬁcation code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPC

speciﬁcations meet or exceed all federal safety

guidelines.

Department of Transportation (DOT) code indicates that

the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of

Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.

(D) Tire Identiﬁcation Number (TIN): The letters and

numbers following DOT code are the Tire Identiﬁcation

Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer and

plant code, tire size, and date the tire was manufactured.

The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire, although

only one side may have the date of manufacture.

(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of

plies in the sidewall and under the tread.

(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire

manufacturers are required to grade tires based on three

performance factors: treadwear, traction and

temperature resistance. For more information see

Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 5-65.

(G) Maximum Cold Inﬂation Load Limit: Maximum

load that can be carried and the maximum pressure

needed to support that load.

Passenger Vehicle Tire Example

5-55

(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact spare tire or

temporary use tire has a tread life of approximately

3,000 miles (5 000 km) and should not be driven

at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h). The compact spare

tire is for emergency use when a regular road tire

has lost air and gone ﬂat. See “Compact Spare Tire”

under Spare Tire on page 5-88 for additional information.

(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of

plies in the sidewall and under the tread.

Identiﬁcation Number (TIN). The TIN shows the

manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and date the tire

was manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both

sides of the tire, although only one side may have the

date of manufacture.

(D) Maximum Cold Inﬂation Load Limit: Maximum

load that can be carried and the maximum pressure

needed to support that load.

(E) Tire Inﬂation: The temporary use tire or compact

spare tire should be inﬂated to 60 psi (420 kPa).

For more information on tire pressure and inﬂation see

Inﬂation - Tire Pressure on page 5-60.

(F) Tire Size: A combination of letters and numbers

deﬁne a tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction

type and service description. The letter T as the

ﬁrst character in the tire size means the tire is for

temporary use only.

(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria

Speciﬁcation): Original equipment tires designed to

GM’s speciﬁc tire performance criteria have a TPC

speciﬁcation code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPC

speciﬁcations meet or exceed all federal safety

guidelines.

Compact Spare Tire Example

5-56

Tire Size

The following illustration shows an example of a typical

passenger vehicle tire size.

(A) P-Metric Tire: The United States version of a

metric tire sizing system. The letter P as the ﬁrst

character in the tire size means a passenger vehicle tire

engineered to standards set by the U.S. Tire and Rim

Association.

(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates the

tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall.

tire height-to-width measurements. For example,

if the tire size aspect ratio is 70, as shown in item C of

the illustration, it would mean that the tire’s sidewall

is 70 percent as high as it is wide.

(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to

indicate the type of ply construction in the tire.

The letter R means radial ply construction; the letter D

means diagonal or bias ply construction; and the

letter B means belted-bias ply construction.

(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in inches.

(F) Service Description: These characters represent

the load range and speed rating of the tire. The load

index represents the load carry capacity a tire is certiﬁed

to carry. The load index can range from 1 to 279.

The speed rating is the maximum speed a tire is certiﬁed

to carry a load. Speed ratings range from A to Z.

5-57

Tire Terminology and Deﬁnitions

Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire pressing

outward on each square inch of the tire. Air pressure

is expressed in pounds per square inch (psi) or

kiloPascal (kPa).

Accessory Weight: This means the combined weight

of optional accessories. Some examples of optional

accessories are, automatic transmission, power steering,

power brakes, power windows, power seats, and

air conditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height to

its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is located

between the plies and the tread. Cords may be made

from steel or other reinforcing materials.

Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by

steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies are

laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to the

centerline of the tread.

Cold Inﬂation Pressure: The amount of air pressure in

a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi) or

kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat

from driving. See Inﬂation - Tire Pressure on page 5-60.

Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motor

vehicle with standard and optional equipment including

the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, but

without passengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall of a

tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the

U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT) motor vehicle

safety standards. The DOT code includes the Tire

Identiﬁcation Number (TIN), an alphanumeric designator

which can also identify the tire manufacturer, production

plant, brand and date of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating, see Loading

Your Vehicle on page 4-44.

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the front

axle, see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-44.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle,

see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-44.

Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an

asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward when

mounted on a vehicle.

KiloPascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on light duty

trucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles.

5-58

Load Index: An assigned number ranging from

1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying capacity

of a tire.

Maximum Inﬂation Pressure: The maximum air

pressure to which a cold tire may be inﬂated.

The maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire at

the maximum permissible inﬂation pressure for that tire.

Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of

curb weight; accessory weight; vehicle capacity weight;

and production options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: The number of occupants a

vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg).

See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-44.

Occupant Distribution: Designated seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an

asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that faces

outward when mounted on a vehicle. The side of

the tire that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering

or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name

molding that is higher or deeper than the same moldings

on the other sidewall of the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on passenger

cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose

vehicles.

Recommended Inﬂation Pressure: Vehicle

manufacturer’s recommended tire inﬂation pressure and

shown on the tire placard. See Inﬂation - Tire Pressure

on page 5-60 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-44.

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords

that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the

centerline of the tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire

beads are seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread and

the bead.

Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to a

tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire

can operate.

Traction: The friction between the tire and the road

surface. The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into contact

with the road.

5-59

Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes

called “wear bars,” that show across the tread of a tire

when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread remains.

See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 5-63.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards):

A tire information system that provides consumers

with ratings for a tire’s traction, temperature, and

treadwear. Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers

using government testing procedures. The ratings are

molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform

Tire Quality Grading on page 5-65.

Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of designated

seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg) plus

the rated cargo load. See Loading Your Vehicle

on page 4-44.

Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on an

individual tire due to curb weight, accessory weight,

occupant weight, and cargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to a

vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weight and

the original equipment tire size and recommended

inﬂation pressure. See “Tire and Loading Information

Label” under Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-44.

Inﬂation - Tire Pressure

Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to operate

effectively.

Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that

under-inﬂation or over-inﬂation is all right. It is not.

If your tires do not have enough air (under-inﬂation),

you can get the following:

• Too much ﬂexing

• Too much heat

• Tire overloading

• Premature or irregular wear

• Poor handling

• Reduced fuel economy

If your tires have too much air (over-inﬂation),

you can get the following:

• Unusual wear

• Poor handling

• Rough ride

• Needless damage from road hazards

5-60

A Tire and Loading Information label is attached to the

vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar), below the driver’s

door latch. This label shows your vehicle’s original

equipment tires and the correct inﬂation pressures for

your tires when they are cold. The recommended

cold tire inﬂation pressure, shown on the label, is the

minimum amount of air pressure needed to support your

vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.

For additional information regarding how much weight

your vehicle can carry, and an example of the tire

and loading information label, see Loading Your Vehicle

on page 4-44. How you load your vehicle affects

vehicle handling and ride comfort, never load your

vehicle with more weight than it was designed to carry.

When to Check

Check your tires once a month or more. Also check the

tire pressure of the spare tire. If you have a compact

spare tire, it should be at 60 psi (420 kPa). See

Spare Tire on page 5-88 for additional information.

How to Check

Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire

pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properly

inﬂated simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look

properly inﬂated even when they are underinﬂated.

Check the tire’s inﬂation pressure when the tires

are cold. Cold means your vehicle has been sitting

for at least three hours or driven no more than

1 mile (1.6 km).

Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. Press

the tire gage ﬁrmly onto the valve to get a pressure

measurement. If the cold tire inﬂation pressure matches

the recommended pressure on the Tire and Loading

Information label, no further adjustment is necessary.

If the inﬂation pressure is low, add air until you reach the

recommended amount.

If you overﬁll the tire, release air by pushing on the

metal stem in the center of the tire valve. Recheck the

tire pressure with the tire gage.

Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve

stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt

and moisture.

5-61

Tire Inspection and Rotation

Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles

(8 000 to 13 000 km).

Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tires as

soon as possible and check wheel alignment. Also

check for damaged tires or wheels. See When It Is Time

for New Tires on page 5-63 and Wheel Replacement

on page 5-66 for more information.

Make sure the spare tire is stored securely. Push, pull,

and then try to rotate or turn the tire. If it moves,

use the wheel wrench to tighten the cable. See

Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-70.

The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more

uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The ﬁrst rotation

is the most important, see Scheduled Maintenance on

page 6-4.

When rotating your tires, always use one of the correct

rotation patterns shown here.

If your vehicle has a compact spare tire or a spare tire

that does not match your vehicle’s road tires and

wheels, in size and type, do not include the spare in the

tire rotation.

5-62

After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and

rear inﬂation pressures as shown on the Tire and

Loading Information label. For the location of the tire

and loading information label see Loading Your Vehicle

on page 4-44. Make certain that all wheel nuts are

properly tightened, see “Wheel Nut Torque” under

Capacities and Speciﬁcations on page 5-103 for the

proper wheel nut torque speciﬁcation.

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to

which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts

become loose after a time. The wheel could

come off and cause an accident. When you

change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from

places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle.

In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a

paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a

scraper or wire brush later, if you need to,

to get all the rust or dirt off. See Changing a

Flat Tire on page 5-70.

When It Is Time for New Tires

One way to tell when it’s

time for new tires is to

check the treadwear

indicators, which will

appear when your tires

have only 1/16 inch

(1.6 mm) or less of

tread remaining.

Some commercial truck

tires may not have

treadwear indicators.

You need a new tire if any of the following statements

are true:

• You can see the indicators at three or more places

around the tire.

• You can see cord or fabric showing through the

tire’s rubber.

• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged

deep enough to show cord or fabric.

• The tire has a bump, bulge or split.

• The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that

can’t be repaired well because of the size or

location of the damage.

5-63

Buying New Tires

To ﬁnd out what kind and size of tires you need, look at

the Tire and Loading Information label. For more

information about this label and its location on your

vehicle, See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-44.

The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had

a Tire Performance Criteria Speciﬁcation (TPC Spec)

number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get new tires,

GM recommends that you get tires with that same

TPC Spec number. That way your vehicle will continue

to have tires that are designed to give proper

endurance, handling, speed rating, traction, ride and

other things during normal service on your vehicle.

If your tires have an all-season tread design, the TPC

number will be followed by an “MS” (for mud and snow).

If you ever replace your tires with those not having a

TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same

size, load range, speed rating and construction type

(bias, bias-belted or radial) as your original tires.

{CAUTION:

Mixing tires could cause you to lose control

while driving. If you mix tires of different sizes

or types (radial and bias-belted tires), the

vehicle may not handle properly, and you

could have a crash. Using tires of different

sizes may also cause damage to your vehicle.

Be sure to use the same size and type tires on

all wheels. It’s all right to drive with your

compact spare (if you have one). It was

developed for use on your vehicle.

{CAUTION:

If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, the

wheel rim ﬂanges could develop cracks after

many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel

could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only

radial-ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle.

5-64

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Quality grades can be found where applicable on the

tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum

section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

The following information relates to the system

developed by the United States National Highway

Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by

treadwear, traction and temperature performance.

(This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.)

The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most

passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading

system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type

snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires,

tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches

(25 to 30 cm), or to some limited-production tires.

While the tires available on General Motors passenger

cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these

grades, they must also conform to federal safety

requirements and additional General Motors Tire

Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on

the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled

conditions on a speciﬁed government test course.

For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and

a half (1.5) times as well on the government course as

a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires

depends upon the actual conditions of their use,

however, and may depart signiﬁcantly from the norm

due to variations in driving habits, service practices and

differences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction – AA, A, B, C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,

B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability

to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled

conditions on speciﬁed government test surfaces of

asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor

traction performance. Warning: The traction grade

assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking

traction tests, and does not include acceleration,

cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

5-65

Temperature – A, B, C

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,

representing the tire’s resistance to the generation

of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested

under controlled conditions on a speciﬁed indoor

laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can

cause the material of the tire to degenerate and

reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to

sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a

level of performance which all passenger car tires must

meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard

No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of

performance on the laboratory test wheel than the

minimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is

established for a tire that is properly inﬂated and not

overloaded. Excessive speed, underinﬂation, or

excessive loading, either separately or in combination,

can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance

The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced

carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life

and best overall performance.

If you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling

one way or the other, the alignment may need to

be reset. If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving

on a smooth road, your wheels may need to be

rebalanced.

Wheel Replacement

Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked or badly rusted

or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the

wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced.

If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some

aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).

See your dealer if any of these conditions exist.

Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.

5-66

Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying

capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted

the same way as the one it replaces.

If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts

or wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM

original equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to

have the right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts

for your vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel

bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be

dangerous. It could affect the braking and

handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose

air and make you lose control. You could have

a collision in which you or others could be

injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel

bolts and wheel nuts for replacement.

Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems

with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or

odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,

vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire chain

clearance to the body and chassis.

See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-70 for more

information.

Used Replacement Wheels

{CAUTION:

Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is

dangerous. You can’t know how it’s been

used or how far it’s been driven. It could fail

suddenly and cause a crash. If you have to

replace a wheel, use a new GM original

equipment wheel.

5-67

Tire Chains

{CAUTION:

If your vehicle has P225/75R15 or P265/75R15

size tires, do not use tire chains. They can

damage your vehicle because there is not

enough clearance. Tire chains used on a

vehicle without the proper amount of clearance

can cause damage to the brakes, suspension

or other vehicle parts. The area damaged by

the tire chains could cause you to lose control

of your vehicle and you or others may be

injured in a crash.

Use another type of traction device only if its

manufacturer recommends it for use on your

vehicle and tire size combination and road

conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s

instructions. To help avoid damage to your

vehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove the

device if it is contacting your vehicle, and do

not spin your wheels.

If you do ﬁnd traction devices that will ﬁt,

install them on the rear tires.

Notice: If your vehicle has a tire size other than

P225/75R15 or P265/75R15 use tire chains only

where legal and only when you must. Use chains

that are the proper size for your tires. Install them on

the tires of the rear axle. Do not use chains on the

tires of the front axle. Tighten them as tightly as

possible with the ends securely fastened. Drive

slowly and follow the chain manufacturer’s

instructions. If you can hear the chains contacting

your vehicle, stop and retighten them. If the contact

continues, slow down until it stops. Driving too

fast or spinning the wheels with chains on will

damage your vehicle.

5-68

If a Tire Goes Flat

It’s unusual for a tire to “blowout” while you’re driving,

especially if you maintain your tires properly. If air goes

out of a tire, it’s much more likely to leak out slowly.

But if you should ever have a “blowout,” here are a few

tips about what to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the ﬂat tire will create a drag that

pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the

accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel ﬁrmly.

Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to

a stop well out of the traffic lane.

A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a

skid and may require the same correction you’d use

in a skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from the

accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by

steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be

very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently

brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.

{CAUTION:

Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do

maintenance or repairs is dangerous without

the appropriate safety equipment and training.

The jack provided with your vehicle is

designed only for changing a ﬂat tire. If it is

used for anything else, you or others could be

badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off

the jack. Use the jack provided with your

vehicle only for changing a ﬂat tire.

If a tire goes ﬂat, the next part shows how to use your

jacking equipment to change a ﬂat tire safely.

5-69

Changing a Flat Tire

If a tire goes ﬂat, avoid further tire and wheel damage

by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your

hazard warning ﬂashers.

{CAUTION:

Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle

can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you

or other people. You and they could be badly

injured or even killed. Find a level place to

change your tire. To help prevent the vehicle

from moving:

1. Set the parking brake ﬁrmly.

2. Put an automatic transmission shift lever in

PARK (P), or shift a manual transmission to

FIRST (1) or REVERSE (R).

3. If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle,

be sure the transfer case is in a drive

gear — not in NEUTRAL.

4. Turn off the engine and do not restart while

the vehicle is raised.

5. Do not allow passengers to remain in

the vehicle.

CAUTION: (Continued)

To be even more certain the vehicle won’t

move, you can put blocks at the front and rear

of the tire farthest away from the one being

changed. That would be the tire on the other

side, at the opposite end of the vehicle.

When you have a ﬂat tire, use the following as a guide

to assist you in the placement of the wheel blocks.

The following information will tell you next how to use

the jack and change a tire.

5-70

Removing the Spare Tire and Tools

The tools you will need are located under the

passenger’s seat.

For crew cab models, the jack and wheel blocks are

under the driver’s side rear seat.

For regular and extended

cab vehicles, the jack and

wheel blocks are located

under the cover at the

center of the vehicle

behind the front seats.

The vehicle will have a cover if it is an extended or

regular cab.

1. Move the seats forward

to access the cover.

Crew Cab

Regular/Extended Cab

5-71

2. Turn the wing nut on the cover counterclockwise to

remove it.

For crew cab models, reach under the rear seat to

access the jack and wheel blocks. To reinstall the

jack and wheel block assembly in the mounting

bracket, insert the tabs into the jack base by pushing

the blocks up into the assembly. The outer hole in the

jack base aligns with the tab on the bracket.

When reinstalling, make sure the jack is secure,

but do not overtighten the jack in the bracket.

3. Remove the wheel blocks and the wheel block

retainer by turning the wing nut counterclockwise.

4. Put the wheel blocks at the front and rear of the tire

farthest away from the one being changed.

That would be the tire on the other side, at the

opposite end of the vehicle.

5. Locate the wing nut used to retain the storage bag

and tools which is under the front passenger’s seat.

Remove it by turning the wing nut counterclockwise.

You will use the jack handle extensions and the wheel

wrench to remove the underbody-mounted spare tire.

A. Jack Handle

Extensions

B. Bottle Jack

C. Extension Tool

D. Wheel Wrench

E. Wheel Blocks

1. Assemble the wheel wrench (D) and the jack

handle extensions (A) as shown.

5-72

2. Insert the hoist end (chiseled end) of the extension

tool (C) through the hole in the rear bumper and

into the funnel-shaped guide. The chiseled end of

the extension is used to lower the spare tire.

3. Turn the wheel wrench (D) counterclockwise to

lower the spare tire to the ground. Continue to

turn the wheel wrench until the spare tire can be

pulled out from under the vehicle.

If the spare tire does not lower to the ground,

the secondary latch is engaged causing the tire

not to lower. See Secondary Latch System

on page 5-81.

4. Tilt the retainer when

the tire has been

lowered, and slide it up

the cable so it can

be pulled up through

the wheel opening.

5. Put the spare tire near the ﬂat tire.

5-73

Removing the Flat Tire and

Installing the Spare Tire

Use the following pictures and instructions to remove

the ﬂat tire and raise the vehicle.

The tools you will be using include the bottle jack (A),

the wheel blocks (B), the extension tool (C), the

jack handle extensions (D), and the wheel wrench (E).

1. Remove the center cap by placing the chisel end of

the wheel wrench (E) in the slot on the wheel and

gently prying the cap out.

If your vehicle has the Xtreme package, remove

each wheel nut cap with the wheel wrench

and remove the center cap by hand.

5-74

2. Use the wheel wrench to loosen all the wheel nuts

by turning it counterclockwise. Do not remove the

wheel nuts yet.

{CAUTION:

Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is

dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack you

could be badly injured or killed. Never get

under a vehicle when it is supported only by

a jack.

{CAUTION:

Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly

positioned can damage the vehicle and even

make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal

injury and vehicle damage, be sure to ﬁt the

jack lift head into the proper location before

raising the vehicle.

5-75

3. Position the jack (A) under the vehicle as shown for

the front or rear locations.

If the ﬂat tire is on the front of the vehicle, position

the jack to the rear of the front tire in the pocket

off of the frame.

Front Position

5-76

If the ﬂat tire is on the rear, position the jack under

the rear axle and get as close as possible to the

shock absorber.

4. Make sure the jack head is positioned so that the

rear axle is resting securely between the grooves

that are on the jack head.

5. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise the

vehicle. Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground

so there is enough room for the spare tire to ﬁt

under the wheel well.

6. Remove all the wheel

nuts and take off the

ﬂat tire.

Rear Position

5-77

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts to

which it is fastened, can make the wheel nuts

become loose after a time. The wheel could

come off and cause an accident. When you

change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from

the places where the wheel attaches to the

vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth

or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use

a scraper or wire brush later, if you need to,

to get all the rust or dirt off.

7. Remove any rust or dirt

from the wheel bolts,

mounting surfaces

and spare wheel.

8. Place the spare tire on the mounting surface.

{CAUTION:

Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts. If you

do, the nuts might come loose. Your wheel

could fall off, causing a serious accident.

9. Put the wheel nuts

back on with the

rounded end of the

nuts toward the wheel.

Tighten each wheel

nut by hand. Then use

the wheel wrench to

tighten the nuts

until the wheel is held

against the hub.

5-78

10. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower

the vehicle. Lower the jack completely.

Front Position

Rear Position

5-79

{CAUTION:

Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened

wheel nuts can cause the wheel to come loose

and even come off. This could lead to an

accident. Be sure to use the correct wheel

nuts. If you have to replace them, be sure to

get new GM original equipment wheel nuts.

Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have

the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the

proper torque speciﬁcation. See Capacities

and Speciﬁcations on page 5-103 for wheel nut

torque speciﬁcation.

Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead

to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid

expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel

nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper

torque speciﬁcation. See Capacities and

Speciﬁcations on page 5-103 for the wheel nut

torque speciﬁcation.

11. Tighten the wheel nuts

ﬁrmly in a crisscross

sequence as shown by

turning the wheel

wrench clockwise.

When you reinstall the regular wheel and tire, you must

also reinstall the center cap. Place the cap on the

wheel and tap it into place until it seats ﬂush with the

wheel. The cap only goes on one way. Be sure to

line up the tab on the center cap with the indentation

on the wheel.

For the Xtreme, tighten each nut cap by hand, then

tighten an additional one quarter of a turn with the

wheel wrench.

5-80

Secondary Latch System

Your vehicle has an underbody-mounted tire hoist

assembly equipped with a secondary latch system. It is

designed to stop the spare tire from suddenly falling

off your vehicle. For the secondary latch to work,

the spare must be installed with the valve stem pointing

down. See Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools on

page 5-84.

{CAUTION:

Before beginning this procedure read all the

instructions. Failure to read and follow the

instructions could damage the hoist assembly

and you and others could get hurt. Read and

follow the instructions listed below.

To release the spare tire from the secondary latch,

do the following:

1. Check under the vehicle to see if the cable end

ﬁtting is visible.

2. If the cable end ﬁtting is not visible, proceed to

Step 6.

If it is visible, ﬁrst try to tighten the cable by turning

the wheel wrench clockwise until you hear two

clicks or feel it skip twice. You cannot overtighten

the cable.

3. Loosen the cable by turning the wheel wrench

counterclockwise three or four turns.

5-81

4. Repeat this procedure at least two times. If the

spare tire lowers to the ground, continue with

Step 5 under Removing the Spare Tire and Tools

on page 5-71.

5. Turn the wrench counterclockwise until

approximately 6 inches (15 cm) of cable is exposed.

6. Stand the wheel blocks

on their shortest ends,

with the backs

facing each other.

7. Place the bottom edge of the jack on the wheel

blocks, separating them so that the jack is

balanced securely.

8. Attach the jack handle, extension, and wheel

wrench to the jack and place it (with the wheel

blocks) under the vehicle towards the front of the

rear bumper. Position the center lift point of the jack

under the wheel.

9. Turn the wrench clockwise to raise the jack until it

lifts the tire.

10. Continue raising the jack until the tire stops moving

upward and is held ﬁrmly in place, the secondary

latch has released and the tire is balancing on

the jack.

5-82

11. Remove the jack handle and insert the hoist end of

the extension through the hole in the rear bumper.

Turn the wheel counterclockwise one turn or

until the wheel retainer assembly falls out.

12. Reinsert the jack handle into the jack. Lower the

jack by turning the wheel wrench counterclockwise.

Keep lowering the jack until the spare tire slides

off the jack or is hanging by the cable.

{CAUTION:

Someone standing too close during the

procedure could be injured by the jack.

If the spare tire does not slide off the jack

completely, make sure no one is behind you or

on either side of you as you pull the jack out

from the spare.

13. Disconnect the jack handle from the jack and

carefully remove the jack. Use one hand to

push against the spare while ﬁrmly pulling the jack

out from under the spare tire with the other hand.

If the spare tire is hanging from the cable, insert the

hoist handle, extension and wheel wrench into

the hoist shaft hole in the bumper and turn

the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower the

spare the rest of the way.

5-83

14. Tilt the tire retainer at the end of the cable and pull

it through the wheel opening. Pull the tire out from

under the vehicle.

15. If the cable is hanging under the vehicle, turn the

wheel wrench clockwise to raise the cable back up.

Have the hoist assembly inspected as soon as you can.

You will not be able to store a spare or ﬂat tire using

the hoist assembly until it has been replaced.

To continue changing the ﬂat tire, see Removing the

Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire on page 5-74.

Storing a Flat or Spare Tire

and Tools

{CAUTION:

Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the

passenger compartment of the vehicle could

cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision,

loose equipment could strike someone.

Store all these in the proper place.

Notice: Storing an aluminum wheel with a ﬂat tire

under your vehicle for an extended period of time or

with the valve stem pointing up may damage the

wheel. Always stow the wheel with the valve stem

pointing down and have the wheel/tire repaired

as soon as possible.

5-84

Store the tire under the rear of the vehicle in the spare

tire carrier. Use the art and text following to help you.

1. Put the tire on the ground at the rear of the vehicle

with the valve stem pointed down.

2. Tilt the retainer downward and through the wheel

opening. Make sure the retainer is fully seated

across the underside of the wheel.

3. Attach the wheel wrench and extensions together.

5-85

4. Insert the hoist end through the hole in the rear

bumper and into the funnel-shaped guide.

5. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise the

tire part way up. Make sure the retainer is

seated in the wheel opening and the valve stem

is pointed down.

6. Raise the tire fully against the underside of the

vehicle by turning the wheel wrench clockwise

until you feel it skip twice. You cannot overtighten

the cable.

7. Make sure the tire is stored securely. Push, pull (A),

and then try to turn (B) the tire. If the tire moves,

check to make sure the tire valve stem is pointing

down, then use the wheel wrench to loosen

and then tighten the cable.

5-86

To store the tools, do the following:

1. Return the wheel wrench, jack extensions and the

storage bag to the locations described under

Removing the Spare Tire and Tools on page 5-71.

2. Reinstall the jack and wheel blocks, be sure

to install the wheel blocks ﬁrst.

3. Secure the items in the vehicle as shown next.

A. Bottle Jack

B. Wheel Blocks

C. Wing Nut

A. Bottle Jack

B. Wheel Blocks

C. Wing Nut

Crew Cab

Regular/Extended Cab

5-87

Spare Tire

Compact Spare Tire

Your vehicle may be equipped with a compact spare

tire. Although the compact spare tire was fully inﬂated

when your vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time.

Check the inﬂation pressure regularly. It should be

60 psi (420 kPa).

After installing the compact spare on your vehicle,

you should stop as soon as possible and make sure your

spare tire is correctly inﬂated. The compact spare is

made to perform well at speeds up to 65 mph (105 km/h)

for distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you can

ﬁnish your trip and have your full-size tire repaired or

replaced where you want. For heavy payloads or towing,

and for low traction or four-wheel-drive conditions,

repair or replace the full-size tire, and reinstall for best

performance. Of course, it’s best to replace your spare

with a full-size tire as soon as you can. Your spare

will last longer and be in good shape in case you

need it again.

Notice: When the compact spare is installed,

do not take your vehicle through an automatic car

wash with guide rails. The compact spare can

get caught on the rails. That can damage the tire

and wheel, and maybe other parts of your vehicle.

Don’t use your compact spare on other vehicles.

And don’t mix your compact spare tire or wheel with

other wheels or tires. They won’t ﬁt. Keep your spare tire

and its wheel together.

Notice: Tire chains will not ﬁt your compact spare.

Using them can damage your vehicle and can

damage the chains too. Do not use tire chains on

your compact spare.

Full-Size Spare Tire

Your vehicle may be equipped with a full-size spare tire,

which, when new, was fully inﬂated. A spare tire, whether

compact-size or full-size, may lose air over time, so check

its inﬂation pressure regularly. See Inﬂation - Tire

Pressure on page 5-60 and Loading Your Vehicle on

page 4-44 for information regarding proper tire inﬂation

and loading your vehicle. For instruction on how to

remove, install or store a spare tire, see Changing a Flat

Tire on page 5-70.

After installing the spare tire on your vehicle, you should

stop as soon as possible and make sure the spare is

correctly inﬂated. Have the damaged or ﬂat road

tire repaired or replaced as soon as you can and

installed back onto your vehicle. This way, a spare tire

will be available in case you need it again.

Don’t mix tires and wheels of different sizes, because

they won’t ﬁt. Keep your spare tire and its wheel together.

5-88

Appearance Care

Cleaning products can be hazardous. Some are toxic.

Other cleaning products can burst into ﬂames if a match

is struck near them or if they get on a hot part of the

vehicle. Some are dangerous if their fumes are inhaled

in a closed space. When anything from a container

is used to clean the vehicle, be sure to follow the

manufacturer’s warnings and instructions. Always open

the doors or windows of the vehicle when cleaning

the inside.

Never use these to clean the vehicle:

• Gasoline

• Benzene

• Naphtha

• Carbon Tetrachloride

• Acetone

• Paint Thinner

• Turpentine

• Lacquer Thinner

• Nail Polish Remover

They can all be hazardous — some more than

others — and they can all damage the vehicle, too.

Do not use any of these products unless this manual says

you can. In many uses, these will damage the vehicle:

• Alcohol

• Laundry Soap

• Bleach

• Reducing Agents

Fabric/Carpet

Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and loose

dirt. Wipe vinyl, leather, plastic, and painted surfaces

with a clean, damp cloth.

GM-approved cleaning products can be obtained from

your dealer.

Here are some cleaning tips:

• Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.

• Clean up stains as soon as you can before they set.

• Carefully scrape off any excess stain.

• Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a clean

area often. A soft brush may be used if stains are

stubborn.

• To avoid forming a ring on fabric after spot cleaning,

clean the entire area immediately or it will set.

5-89

Most stains can be removed with club soda water.

To clean, use the following instructions:

1. For liquids: blot with a clean, soft, white cloth.

For solids: remove as much as possible and

then vacuum or brush.

2. Apply club soda water to a clean, soft, white cloth.

Do not over-saturate; the cloth should not drip water.

3. Clean the entire area. Avoid getting the fabric

too wet.

4. Start cleaning from the seams into the stain to

avoid a ring effect.

5. Continue cleaning, using a clean area of the cloth

each time it becomes soiled.

6. When the stain is removed, blot the cleaned area

with another dry, clean, soft, white cloth.

Using Cleaner on Fabric

1. First, try the cleaner on an area of the fabric that is

not easily seen to make sure the cleaner does not

affect the color of the fabric.

2. For liquids: blot with a clean, soft, white cloth.

For solids: remove as much as possible and

then vacuum or brush.

3. Spray a small amount of the cleaner onto a clean

soft, white, cloth. Do not apply spray directly to

the fabric.

4. Start cleaning from the seams into the stain to

avoid a ring effect.

5. Continue cleaning, using a clean area of the cloth

each time it becomes soiled.

6. When the stain is removed, blot the cleaned area

with another dry, clean, soft, white cloth.

7. If the cleaner leaves a ring effect, follow up with

the club soda water instructions given earlier in

this section.

5-90

Special Fabric Cleaning Problems

Stains caused by such things as catsup, black coffee,

egg, fruit, fruit juice, milk, soft drinks, vomit, urine,

and blood can be removed using the club soda water

instructions given earlier in this section. If an odor lingers

after cleaning vomit or urine, treat the area with a

water and baking soda solution: 1 teaspoon (5 ml) of

baking soda to 1 cup (250 ml) of lukewarm water.

Let dry.

Stains caused by oil and grease can be cleaned with

an approved GM cleaner and a clean, white cloth.

1. Carefully scrape off excess stain.

2. Clean with cool water and allow to dry completely.

3. If a stain remains, follow the “Using Cleaner on

Fabric” instructions described earlier.

Vinyl

Use warm water and a clean cloth.

• Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt.

This may have to be done more than once.

• Things like tar, asphalt, and shoe polish will stain if

they are not removed quickly. Use a clean cloth

and vinyl cleaner. See your dealer for this product.

Leather

Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap or

saddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth. Then,

let the leather dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry.

• For stubborn stains, use a leather cleaner.

• Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasive

cleaners, furniture polish, or shoe polish on leather.

• Soiled or stained leather should be cleaned

immediately. If dirt is allowed to work into the ﬁnish,

it can harm the leather.

5-91

Instrument Panel

Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces

of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones

or waxes may cause annoying reﬂections in the

windshield and even make it difficult to see through the

windshield under certain conditions.

Interior Plastic Components

Use only a mild soap and water solution on a soft cloth

or sponge. Commercial cleaners may affect the

surface ﬁnish.

Glass Surfaces

Glass should be cleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner or a

liquid household glass cleaner will remove normal

tobacco smoke and dust ﬁlms on interior glass.

See Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-97.

Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when

cleaning glass surfaces on your vehicle, you could

scratch the glass. When cleaning the glass on

your vehicle, use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner.

Care of Safety Belts

Keep belts clean and dry.

{CAUTION:

Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do,

it may severely weaken them. In a crash,

they might not be able to provide adequate

protection. Clean safety belts only with mild

soap and lukewarm water.

Weatherstrips

Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last

longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply

silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,

damp weather frequent application may be required.

See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13.

5-92

Washing Your Vehicle

The paint ﬁnish on the vehicle provides beauty, depth of

color, gloss retention, and durability.

The best way to preserve the vehicle’s ﬁnish is to keep it

clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water.

Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.

Use a car washing soap. Do not use strong soaps

or chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle well,

removing all soap residue completely. GM-approved

cleaning products can be obtained from your dealer.

See Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-97.

Do not use cleaning agents that are petroleum

based, or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning

agents should be ﬂushed promptly and not allowed

to dry on the surface, or they could stain. Dry the ﬁnish

with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to

avoid surface scratches and water spotting.

Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an

automatic car wash that does not have enough

clearance for the wide rear tires and wheels, you

could damage your vehicle. Verify with the manager

of the car wash that your vehicle will ﬁt before

entering the car wash or use a touchless car wash.

High pressure car washes may cause water to enter

the vehicle.

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses

Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a

car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.

Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle on

page 5-93.

Finish Care

Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by

hand may be necessary to remove residue from the

paint ﬁnish. You can get GM-approved cleaning products

from your dealer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance

Materials on page 5-97.

If your vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint ﬁnish.

The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored

basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are

non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat

paint ﬁnish.

Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive

polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint ﬁnish may

damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and

polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat

paint ﬁnish on your vehicle.

5-93

Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other

salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird

droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,

can damage your vehicle’s ﬁnish if they remain

on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as

possible. If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that

are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove

foreign matter.

Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather

and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a

period of years. You can help to keep the paint ﬁnish

looking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered

whenever possible.

Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts

Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep

their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually

needed. However, you may use chrome polish on

chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.

Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid damaging

protective trim, never use auto or chrome polish, steam

or caustic soap to clean aluminum. A coating of wax,

rubbed to high polish, is recommended for all bright

metal parts.

Windshield and Wiper Blades

If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield

washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running,

wax, sap, or other material may be on the blade

or windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with a glass cleaning

liquid or powder and water solution. The windshield is

clean if beads do not form when it is rinsed with water.

Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades

and affect their performance. Clean the blade by wiping

vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength windshield

washer solvent. Then rinse the blade with water.

Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;

replace blades that look worn.

5-94

Aluminum Wheels

Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,

abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners

that contain acid on aluminum or chrome-plated

wheels, you could damage the surface of the

wheel(s). The repairs would not be covered by your

warranty. Use only GM-approved cleaners on

aluminum or chrome-plated wheels.

Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild

soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing

thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then

be applied.

Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels

could damage the wheels. The repairs would not

be covered by your warranty. Use chrome polish on

chrome wheels only.

The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted

surface of the vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,

chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,

cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on

them because the surface could be damaged. Do not

use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.

Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an

automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire

cleaning brushes, you could damage the aluminum

or chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not

be covered by your warranty. Never drive a vehicle

equipped with aluminum or chrome-plated wheels

through an automatic car wash that uses silicone

carbide tire cleaning brushes.

Do not take the vehicle through an automatic car wash

that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes. These

brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.

Tires

To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.

Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing

products on your vehicle may damage the paint

ﬁnish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing,

always wipe off any overspray from all painted

surfaces on your vehicle.

5-95

Sheet Metal Damage

If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal

repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop

applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or

replaced to restore corrosion protection.

Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the

corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.

Finish Damage

Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the

ﬁnish should be repaired right away. Bare metal

will corrode quickly and may develop into major repair

expense.

Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up

materials available from your GM dealer. Larger areas

of ﬁnish damage can be corrected in your GM

dealer’s body and paint shop.

Underbody Maintenance

Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust

control can collect on the underbody. If these are not

removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the

underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, ﬂoor pan,

and exhaust system even though they have corrosion

protection.

At least every spring, ﬂush these materials from the

underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud

and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of

the frame should be loosened before being ﬂushed.

Your GM dealer or an underbody car washing system

can do this for you.

Chemical Paint Spotting

Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a

chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and

attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage can

take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations, and

small, irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface.

Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM will

repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of

new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within

12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,

whichever occurs ﬁrst.

5-96

Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials

See your GM dealer for more information on purchasing

the following products.

Description Usage

Polishing Cloth

Wax-Treated

Interior and exterior

polishing cloth.

Tar and Road

Oil Remover

Removes tar, road oil,

and asphalt.

Chrome Cleaner

and Polish

Use on chrome or

stainless steel.

White Sidewall

Tire Cleaner

Removes soil and black

marks from whitewalls.

Vinyl Cleaner

Cleans vinyl tops,

upholstery, and

convertible tops.

Glass Cleaner

Removes dirt, grime,

smoke and ﬁngerprints.

Chrome and Wire

Wheel Cleaner

Removes dirt and grime

from chrome wheels and

wire wheel covers.

Finish Enhancer

Removes dust,

ﬁngerprints, and surface

contaminants. Spray on

and wipe off.

Description Usage

Swirl Remover Polish

Removes swirl marks, ﬁne

scratches, and other light

surface contamination.

Cleaner Wax

Removes light scratches

and protects ﬁnish.

Foaming Tire Shine

Low Gloss

Cleans, shines, and

protects in one step.

No wiping necessary.

Wash Wax Concentrate

Medium foaming

shampoo. Cleans and

lightly waxes.

Biodegradable and

phosphate free.

Spot Lifter

Quickly removes spots

and stains from carpets,

vinyl, and cloth

upholstery.

Odor Eliminator

Odorless spray odor

eliminator used on fabrics,

vinyl, leather and carpet.

See your General Motors parts department for these

products. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants

on page 6-13.

5-97

Vehicle Identiﬁcation

Vehicle Identiﬁcation Number (VIN)

This is the legal identiﬁer for your vehicle. It appears on

a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on

the driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the

windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also

appears on the Vehicle Certiﬁcation and Service Parts

labels and the certiﬁcates of title and registration.

Engine Identiﬁcation

The 8th character in your VIN is the engine code. This

code will help you identify your engine, speciﬁcations

and replacement parts.

Service Parts Identiﬁcation Label

You will ﬁnd this label on the inside of the glove box.

It is very helpful if you ever need to order parts. On this

label, you will ﬁnd the following:

• VIN

• Model designation

• Paint information

• Production options and special equipment

Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.

Electrical System

Add-On Electrical Equipment

Notice: Don’t add anything electrical to your vehicle

unless you check with your dealer ﬁrst. Some

electrical equipment can damage your vehicle and

the damage wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.

Some add-on electrical equipment can keep other

components from working as they should.

Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting

to add anything electrical to your vehicle, see

Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-74.

5-98

Windshield Wiper Fuses

The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit

breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy

snow or ice, the wiper will stop until the motor cools.

If the overload is caused by some electrical problem,

be sure to get it ﬁxed.

Power Windows and Other

Power Options

Circuit breakers protect the power windows and other

power accessories. When the current load is too heavy,

the circuit breaker opens and closes, protecting the

circuit until the problem is ﬁxed or goes away.

Power and Heated Seat Circuit

Breakers

There is a circuit breaker located underneath the

driver’s side front seat that controls the power and

heated seat functions.

Fuses and Circuit Breakers

The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from

short circuits by a combination of fuses and circuit

breakers. This greatly reduces the chance of ﬁres

caused by electrical problems.

Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the

band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you

replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical

size and rating.

If you ever have a problem on the road and do not have

a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the same

amperage. Just pick some feature of your vehicle

that you can get along without — like the radio or

cigarette lighter — and use its fuse, if it is the correct

amperage. Replace it as soon as you can.

5-99

Engine Compartment Fuse Block

The engine compartment fuse block is located on the

driver’s side of the engine compartment. See Engine

Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for more

information on location.

To remove the cover, push in on the tab on the end of

the cover and lift. To reinstall the cover, line up the

tab and push down on the cover until the tab clicks

into place.

Fuse Usage

1 Brake Switch, Stoplamps

2 Auxiliary Power 1

5 Air Conditioning Control Head

8 Wiper/Washer Switch

9 Fog Lamps (If Equipped)

10 Ignition Transducers

11 Driver’s Side Headlamp

5-100

Fuse Usage

12 Passenger’s Side Headlamp

13 Fuel Pump

14 Wiper

15 Front Axle Actuator

Antilock Brake System (ABS), ABS

module, Four-Wheel Drive, Gravity

Sensor

Supplemental Inﬂatable Restraint

System, Sensing and Diagnostic

Module, Air Bag Off Switch

18 Heated Seat (If Equipped)

Cruise Control Switch, Inside

Rearview Mirror, Transfer Case

Control Module, Brake Switch,

Clutch Disable

20 Electronic Throttle Control (ETC)

21 Power Door Locks (If Equipped)

22 Injectors

Ignition, Clutch Starter Switch,

Neutral Safety Back-Up Switch,

Ignition Coils 1-5, Air Conditioning

Relay

24 Transmission Solenoid

Fuse Usage

25 Powertrain Control Module (PCM)

26 Back-up Lights

ERLS, Map Sensor, Can Purge

Solenoid

28 Rear Turn/Hazard Lights

Driver’s Side Rear Taillamp,

Passenger Side Air Bag Indicator

Lighting, Instrument Panel Dimming

Power (2WD/4WD Switch Lighting)

30 Powertrain Control Module (PCM) B

31 OnStar

32 Radio

33 Auxiliary Power 2

34 Truck Body Controller

35 Horn

36 Transfer Case Control Module

Turn/Hazard/Courtesy/Cargo

Lamps/Mirrors

38 Cluster

Rear Parking Lamp 1, Passenger’s

Side Taillamp, License Plate Lamps

5-101

Fuse Usage

Front Park/Turn Lamps, Driver and

Passenger’s Side Power Window

Switches Lighting

41 Climate Control Fan

42 Power Windows (If Equipped)

43 Starter Solenoid Relay

44 Antilock Brake System 2 (ABS Pump)

45 Antilock Brake System 1 (ABS Logic)

Power Seat Circuit Breaker/POA

Seat (If Equipped)

69 Fuel Canister Vent Solenoid

77 Air Conditioning Compressor

79 Oxygen Sensors

80 Sunroof (If Equipped)

Relays Usage

47 Beam Selection

50 Air Conditioning Compressor

51 Fuel Pump, Fuel Pump Fuse

52 Fog Lamps (If Equipped)

Relays Usage

Front Parking Lamp Fuse,

Rear Parking Lamps

54 Headlamps

55 Horn

Powertrain, Electronic Throttle

Control Fuse, Oxygen Sensor Fuse

57 Wipers (On/Off)

Retained Accessory Power

(Power Window Fuse,

Wiper/Washer Switch Fuse)

Ignition 3, Climate Control, Climate

Control Head Fuse

Run/Crank, Air Bag System Fuse,

Cruise Control Fuse, Ignition Fuse,

Back-Up Lamps, ABS Fuse, ERLS,

Front Axle, PCM-1, Injectors Fuse

62 Starter Relay (PCM Relay)

63 Wiper 2 (High/Low)

Miscellaneous Usage

64 Diode — Wiper

65 Diode — Air Conditioning, Clutch

66 Mega Fuse

5-102

Capacities and Speciﬁcations

The following approximate conversion capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Recommended

Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13 for more information.

Capacities and Speciﬁcations

Application

Capacities

English Metric

Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a 1.6 lbs 1.73 kg

Cooling System

2.8L Engine

3.5L Engine

10.4 quarts

10.6 quarts

9.8 L

10.0 L

Differential Fluid

Rear Axle

Front Axle

3.4-3.8 pints

3.2 pints

1.6-1.8 L

1.5 L

Engine Oil with Filter

2.8 L Engine

3.5 L Engine

5 quarts

6 quarts

4.7 L

5.6 L

Fuel Tank 19.5 gallons 76 L

Transmission (Drain and Reﬁll)

Automatic

Manual

5.0 quarts

2.5 quarts

4.7 L

2.4 L

Wheel Nut Torque 100 ft lb 140 Y

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to ﬁll to the appropriate level or as recommended in this

manual. Recheck ﬂuid level after ﬁlling.

5-103

Engine Speciﬁcations

Type VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap

2.8L 8

Automatic

Manual

0.042 inches (1.07 mm)

3.5L 6

Automatic

Manual

0.042 inches (1.07 mm)

5-104

Maintenance Schedule ......................................6-2

Introduction ...................................................6-2

Maintenance Requirements ..............................6-2

Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................6-2

Using Your Maintenance Schedule ....................6-2

Scheduled Maintenance ...................................6-4

Additional Required Services ............................6-6

Maintenance Footnotes ...................................6-7

Owner Checks and Services ............................6-9

At Each Fuel Fill ............................................6-9

At Least Once a Month ...................................6-9

At Least Once a Year ...................................6-10

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ...............6-13

Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..........6-15

Maintenance Record .....................................6-16

Section 6 Maintenance Schedule

6-1

Maintenance Schedule

Introduction

Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and

change as recommended.

Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan

supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your

Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer

for details.

Maintenance Requirements

Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,

replacement parts and recommended ﬂuids and

lubricants as prescribed in this manual are

necessary to keep your vehicle in good working

condition. Any damage caused by failure to follow

scheduled maintenance may not be covered by

warranty.

Your Vehicle and the Environment

Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your

vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the

environment. All recommended maintenance is

important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even

affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper ﬂuid

levels or the wrong tire inﬂation can increase the level of

emissions from your vehicle. To help protect our

environment, and to keep your vehicle in good condition,

be sure to maintain your vehicle properly.

Using Your Maintenance Schedule

We at General Motors want to help you keep your

vehicle in good working condition. But we do not know

exactly how you will drive it. You may drive very

short distances only a few times a week. Or you may

drive long distances all the time in very hot, dusty

weather. You may use your vehicle in making deliveries.

Or you may drive it to work, to do errands or in many

other ways.

Because of all the different ways people use their

vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may need more

frequent checks and replacements. So please read

the following and note how you drive. If you have any

questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition,

see your GM Goodwrench dealer.

6-2

This schedule is for vehicles that:

• carry passengers and cargo within recommended

limits. You will ﬁnd these limits on the tire and

loading information label. See Loading Your Vehicle

on page 4-44.

• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal

driving limits.

• are driven off-road in the recommended manner.

See Off-Road Driving with Your Four-Wheel-Drive

Vehicle on page 4-15.

• use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octane

on page 5-5.

The services in Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4

should be performed when indicated. See Additional

Required Services on page 6-6 and Maintenance

Footnotes on page 6-7 for further information.

{CAUTION:

Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can

be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you

can be seriously injured. Do your own

maintenance work only if you have the

required know-how and the proper tools and

equipment for the job. If you have any doubt,

see your GM Goodwrench dealer to have a

qualiﬁed technician do the work.

Some maintenance services can be complex. So,

unless you are technically qualiﬁed and have the

necessary equipment, you should have your GM

Goodwrench dealer do these jobs.

When you go to your GM Goodwrench dealer for your

service needs, you will know that GM-trained and

supported service technicians will perform the work

using genuine GM parts.

If you want to get service information, see Service

Publications Ordering Information on page 7-11.

6-3

Owner Checks and Services on page 6-9 tells you what

should be checked, when to check it and what you

can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good

condition.

The proper replacement parts, ﬂuids and lubricants to

use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants

on page 6-13 and Normal Maintenance Replacement

Parts on page 6-15. When your vehicle is serviced,

make sure these are used. All parts should be replaced

and all necessary repairs done before you or anyone

else drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of

genuine GM parts.

Scheduled Maintenance

When the CHANGE OIL light comes on, it means that

service is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle

serviced as soon as possible within the next 600 miles

(1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are driving under the

best conditions, the engine oil life system may not

indicate that vehicle service is necessary for over a year.

However, your engine oil and ﬁlter must be changed at

least once a year and at this time the system must be

reset. Your GM Goodwrench dealer has GM-trained

service technicians who will perform this work using

genuine GM parts and reset the system.

If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally,

you must service your vehicle within 3,000 miles

(5 000 km) since your last service. Remember to reset

the oil life system whenever the oil is changed. See

Engine Oil Life System on page 5-16 for information on

the Engine Oil Life System and resetting the system.

When the CHANGE OIL light appears, certain services,

checks and inspections are required. Required

services are described in the following for

“Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.” Generally, it is

recommended that your ﬁrst service be Maintenance I,

your second service be Maintenance II and that you

alternate Maintenance I and Maintenance II thereafter.

However, in some cases, Maintenance II may be

required more often.

Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the CHANGE

OIL light comes on within 10 months since the

vehicle was purchased or Maintenance II was

performed.

Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previous

service performed was Maintenance I. Always use

Maintenance II whenever the light comes on 10 months

or more since the last service or if the light has not

come on at all for one year.

6-4

Scheduled Maintenance

Service Maintenance I Maintenance II

Change engine oil and ﬁlter. See Engine Oil on page 5-13. Reset oil life

system. See Engine Oil Life System on page 5-16. An Emission Control

Service.

••

Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (g). ••

Inspect engine air cleaner ﬁlter. If necessary, replace ﬁlter. See Engine Air

Cleaner/Filter on page 5-18. An Emission Control Service. See footnotes †

and (j).

•

Rotate tires and check inﬂation pressures and wear. See Tires on page 5-54. ••

Inspect brake system. See footnote (a). ••

Check engine coolant and windshield washer ﬂuid levels and add ﬂuid as

needed.

••

Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services” in

this section.

••

Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b). •

Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c). •

Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d). •

Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e). •

Lubricate body components. See footnote (f). •

Check transmission ﬂuid level and add ﬂuid as needed. •

6-5

Additional Required Services

The following services should be performed at the ﬁrst maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated miles

(kilometers) shown for each item.

Additional Required Services

Service and Miles (Kilometers)

25,000

(41 500)

50,000

(83 000)

75,000

(125 000)

100,000

(166 000)

125,000

(207 500)

150,000

(240 000)

Inspect fuel system for damage

or leaks.

••••••

Replace fuel ﬁlter. ••••••

Replace engine air cleaner ﬁlter.

See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on

page 5-18. An Emission Control

Service.

•••

Inspect exhaust system for loose or

damaged components.

••••••

Change automatic transmission

ﬂuid and ﬁlter (severe service).

See footnote (h).

•••

Change automatic transmission ﬂuid

and ﬁlter (normal service).

•

Replace spark plugs. An Emission

Control Service.

•

6-6

Additional Required Services (cont’d)

Service and Miles (Kilometers)

25,000

(41 500)

50,000

(83 000)

75,000

(125 000)

100,000

(166 000)

125,000

(207 500)

150,000

(240 000)

Engine cooling system service

(or every 5 years, whichever occurs

ﬁrst). An Emission Control Service.

See footnote (i).

•

Inspect engine accessory drive belt.

An Emission Control Service.

•

Maintenance Footnotes

† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the

California Air Resources Board has determined that the

failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify

the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to

the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,

urge that all recommended maintenance services be

performed at the indicated intervals and the

maintenance be recorded.

(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper

hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chaﬁng, etc. Inspect

drum brake linings for wear or cracks. Inspect disc brake

pads for wear and rotors for surface condition. Inspect

other brake parts, including drums, wheel cylinders,

calipers, parking brake, etc. Check parking brake

adjustment.

(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and

steering system for damaged, loose or missing parts or

signs of wear. Inspect power steering lines and

hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks,

chaﬁng, etc. Visually check constant velocity joints,

rubber boots and axle seals for leaks.

are cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes,

ﬁttings and clamps; replace with genuine GM parts as

needed. To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test

of the cooling system and pressure cap and cleaning the

outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is

recommended at least once a year.

(d) Visually inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking.

Replace blade inserts that appear worn or damaged

or that streak or miss areas of the windshield.

6-7

(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your

belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages

are working properly. Look for any other loose or

damaged safety belt system parts. If you see anything

that might keep a safety belt system from doing its

job, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts

replaced. Also look for any opened or broken airbag

coverings, and have them repaired or replaced.

(The airbag system does not need regular maintenance.)

(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, body door and fuel

door hinges, latches and locks (including glove box and

console doors), hood latch assembly, secondary latch,

pivots, spring anchor, release pawl and any moving seat

hardware. Lubricate hood safety lever pivot and prop rod

pivot and tailgate latch bolt, handle assembly pivot points

and hinges. More frequent lubrication may be required

when exposed to a corrosive environment. Applying

silicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean cloth will

make them last longer, seal better and not stick or

squeak.

(g) A ﬂuid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a

problem. Have the system inspected and repaired

and the ﬂuid level checked. Add ﬂuid if needed.

(h) Change automatic transmission ﬂuid and ﬁlter if the

vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these

conditions:

− In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature

regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.

− In hilly or mountainous terrain.

− When doing frequent trailer towing.

− Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery

service.

(i) Drain, ﬂush and reﬁll cooling system. See Engine

Coolant on page 5-25 for what to use. Inspect hoses.

Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and ﬁller neck.

Pressure test the cooling system and pressure cap.

(j) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, inspect

the ﬁlter at each engine oil change.

6-8

Owner Checks and Services

These owner checks and services should be performed

at the intervals speciﬁed to help ensure the safety,

dependability and emission control performance of your

vehicle. Your GM Goodwrench dealer can assist you

with these checks and services.

Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.

Whenever any ﬂuids or lubricants are added to your

vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown

in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13.

At Each Fuel Fill

It is important to perform these underhood checks at

each fuel ﬁll.

Engine Oil Level Check

Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if

necessary. See Engine Oil on page 5-13 for further

details.

Notice: It is important to check your oil regularly

and keep it at the proper level. Failure to keep your

engine oil at the proper level can cause damage

to your engine not covered by your warranty.

Engine Coolant Level Check

Check the engine coolant level and add

DEX-COOL

coolant mixture if necessary.

See Engine Coolant on page 5-25 for further details.

Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check

Check the windshield washer ﬂuid level in the windshield

washer tank and add the proper ﬂuid if necessary.

At Least Once a Month

Tire Inﬂation Check

Visually inspect your tires and make sure tires are

inﬂated to the correct pressures. Do not forget to check

your spare tire. See Tires on page 5-54 for further

details. Check to make sure the spare tire is stored

securely. Push, pull and then try to turn the spare tire.

If it moves, tighten it. See Changing a Flat Tire on

page 5-70.

6-9

At Least Once a Year

Starter Switch Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, the

vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle

moves, you or others could be injured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room

around the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular

brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-29 if

necessary.

Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to

turn off the engine immediately if it starts.

3. On automatic transmission vehicles, try to start the

engine in each gear. The starter should work only in

PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). If the starter works in

any other position, contact your GM Goodwrench

dealer for service.

On manual transmission vehicles, put the shift lever

in NEUTRAL (N), push the clutch down halfway

and try to start the engine. The starter should work

only when the clutch is pushed down all the way

to the ﬂoor. If the starter works when the clutch

is not pushed all the way down, contact your GM

Goodwrench dealer for service.

6-10

Automatic Transmission Shift Lock

Control System Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, the

vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle

moves, you or others could be injured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room

around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level

surface.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake

on page 2-29 if necessary.

Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if

the vehicle begins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON, but do

not start the engine. Without applying the regular

brake, try to move the shift lever out of PARK (P)

with normal effort. If the shift lever moves out

of PARK (P), contact your GM Goodwrench dealer

for service.

Ignition Transmission Lock Check

While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn

the ignition to LOCK in each shift lever position.

• With an automatic transmission, the ignition should

turn to LOCK only when the shift lever is in

PARK (P). The key should come out only in LOCK.

• With a manual transmission, the key should

come out only in LOCK.

Contact your GM Goodwrench dealer if service is

required.

6-11

Parking Brake and Automatic

Transmission Park (P) Mechanism Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this check, your vehicle

could begin to move. You or others could be

injured and property could be damaged.

Make sure there is room in front of your

vehicle in case it begins to roll. Be ready to

apply the regular brake at once should the

vehicle begin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing

downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake,

set the parking brake.

• To check the parking brake’s holding ability:

With the engine running and transmission in

NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure from

the regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is

held by the parking brake only.

• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability:

With the engine running, shift to PARK (P).

Then release the parking brake followed by the

regular brake.

Contact your GM Goodwrench dealer if service is

required.

Underbody Flushing Service

At least every spring, use plain water to ﬂush any

corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to

clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris

can collect.

6-12

Recommended Fluids

and Lubricants

Fluids and lubricants identiﬁed below by name,

part number or speciﬁcation may be obtained from your

dealer.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil

Engine oil which meets GM

Standard GM6094M and displays

the American Petroleum Institute

Certiﬁed for Gasoline Engines

starburst symbol. GM Goodwrench

oil meets all the requirements for

your vehicle. To determine the

proper viscosity for your vehicle’s

engine, see Engine Oil on

page 5-13.

Engine Coolant

50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable

water and use only DEX-COOL

Coolant. See Engine Coolant on

page 5-25.

Hydraulic Brake

System

Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or

equivalent DOT-3 brake ﬂuid.

Windshield

Washer Solvent

GM Optikleen

Washer Solvent.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Parking Brake

Cable Guides

Chassis Lubricant

(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985,

in Canada 88901242) or lubricant

meeting requirements of NLGI #2,

Category LB or GC-LB.

Power Steering

System

GM Power Steering Fluid

(GM Part No. U.S. 89021184,

in Canada 89021186).

Automatic

Transmission

DEXRON

-III Automatic

Transmission Fluid. Look for

“Approved for the H-Speciﬁcation”

on the label.

Manual

Transmission

Manual Transmission Fluid

(GM Part No. U.S. 89021806,

in Canada 89021807).

Hydraulic

Clutch System

Hydraulic Clutch Fluid

(GM Part No. U.S. 12345347,

in Canada 10953517) or equivalent

DOT-3 brake ﬂuid.

Key Lock

Cylinders

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube

(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,

in Canada 10953474).

Chassis

Lubrication

Chassis Lubricant

(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985,

in Canada 88901242) or lubricant

meeting requirements of NLGI #2,

Category LB or GC-LB.

6-13

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Front and

Rear Axle

SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle

Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S.

12378261, in Canada 10953455)

meeting GM Speciﬁcation 9986115.

Transfer Case

Synchromesh Transmission Fluid

(GM Part No. U.S. 12345349,

in Canada 10953465).

Rear Driveline

Center Spline

and Universal

Joints

Chassis Lubricant

(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985,

in Canada 88901242) or lubricant

meeting requirements of NLGI #2,

Category LB or GC-LB.

Constant

Velocity

Universal Joint

Chassis Lubricant

(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985,

in Canada 88901242) or lubricant

meeting requirements of NLGI #2,

Category LB or GC-LB.

Hood Latch

Assembly,

Secondary

Latch, Pivots,

Spring Anchor

and Release

Pawl

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol

(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,

in Canada 992723) or lubricant

meeting requirements of NLGI #2,

Category LB or GC-LB.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Hood and Door

Hinges, Body

Door Hinge

Pins, Liftgate

Hinge and

Linkage,

Folding Seats

and Fuel

Door Hinge

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube

(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,

in Canada 10953474).

Outer Tailgate

Handle Pivot

Points and

Hinges

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube

(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,

in Canada 10953474).

Weatherstrip

Conditioning

Dielectric Silicone Grease

(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,

in Canada 992887).

Weatherstrip

Squeaks

Synthetic Grease with Teﬂon,

Superlube (GM Part No. U.S.

12371287, in Canada 10953437).

6-14

Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts

Replacement parts identiﬁed below by name, part number, or speciﬁcation can be obtained from your GM dealer.

Part GM Part Number ACDelco

Part Number

Automatic Transmission Filter Kit 24225323 —

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 15202408 A1624C

Engine Oil Filter

2.8L Engine

3.5L Engine

88984215

89017342

PF46

PF61

Fuel Filter 25121800 GF624

Spark Plugs 12569190 41-981

Windshield Wiper Blades

Driver’s Side — 22 inches (55 cm)

Passenger’s Side — 19 inches (48 cm)

15169017

15169018

—

6-15

Maintenance Record

After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service and the

type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2 in this section.

Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-9 can be added on the following record pages.

Also, you should retain all maintenance receipts.

Maintenance Record

Date

Odometer

Reading

Serviced By

Maintenance I or

Maintenance II

Services Performed

6-16

Maintenance Record (cont’d)

Date

Odometer

Reading

Serviced By

Maintenance I or

Maintenance II

Services Performed

6-17

Maintenance Record (cont’d)

Date

Odometer

Reading

Serviced By

Maintenance I or

Maintenance II

Services Performed

6-18

Customer Assistance and Information ...............7-2

Customer Satisfaction Procedure ......................7-2

Online Owner Center ......................................7-3

Customer Assistance for Text Telephone

(TTY) Users ...............................................7-4

Customer Assistance Offices ............................7-4

GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ................7-5

Roadside Assistance Program ..........................7-6

Courtesy Transportation ...................................7-7

Vehicle Data Collection and Event

Data Recorders ..........................................7-9

Reporting Safety Defects ................................7-10

Reporting Safety Defects to the United States

Government ..............................................7-10

Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian

Government ..............................................7-11

Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors .....7-11

Service Publications Ordering Information .........7-11

Section 7 Customer Assistance and Information

7-1

Customer Assistance

and Information

Customer Satisfaction Procedure

Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to

your dealer and to GMC. Normally, any concerns with

the sales transaction or the operation of the vehicle

will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or service

departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best

intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can

occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your

satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of

dealership management. Normally, concerns can

be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has

already been reviewed with the sales, service or parts

manager, contact the owner of the dealership or

the general manager.

STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership

management, it appears your concern cannot be

resolved by the dealership without further help, contact

the GMC Consumer Relations Manager by calling

1-800-GMC-8782 (1-800-462-8782, Customer

Assistance prompt). In Canada, contact GM of Canada

Customer Communication by calling 1-800-263-3777

(English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order

to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have

the following information available to give the Customer

Assistance Representative:

• Vehicle Identiﬁcation Number (VIN). This is available

from the vehicle registration or title, or the plate at the

top left of the instrument panel and visible through

the windshield.

• Dealership name and location

• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage

When contacting GMC, please remember that your

concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility.

That is why we suggest you follow Step One ﬁrst if you

have a concern.

STEP THREE: Both General Motors and your dealer

are committed to making sure you are completely

satisﬁed with your new vehicle. However, if you continue

to remain unsatisﬁed after following the procedure

outlined in Steps One and Two, you should ﬁle with the

BBB Auto Line Program to enforce any additional

rights you may have. Canadian owners refer to your

Warranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet for

information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration

Plan (CAMVAP).

7-2

The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program

administered by the Council of Better Business

Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle

repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle

Limited Warranty. Although you may be required to

resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to

ﬁlling out a court action, use of the program is free of

charge and your case will generally be heard within

40 days. If you do not agree with the decision given in

your case, you may reject it and proceed with any other

venue for relief available to you.

You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using

the toll-free telephone number or write them at the

following address:

BBB Auto Line Program

Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.

4200 Wilson Boulevard

Suite 800

Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100

This program is available in all 50 states and the

District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,

mileage, and other factors. General Motors reserves

the right to change eligibility limitations and/or

discontinue its participation in this program.

Online Owner Center

The Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownership

needs. Speciﬁc vehicle information can be found in

one place.

The Online Owner Center allows you to:

• Get e-mail service reminders.

• Access information about your speciﬁc vehicle,

including tips and videos and an electronic

version of this owner’s manual (United States only).

• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history and

maintenance schedule.

• Find GM dealers for service nationwide.

• Receive special promotions and privileges only

available to members (United States only).

Refer to the web for updated information.

To register your vehicle, visit www.MyGMLink.com

(United States) or My GM Canada within

www.gmcanada.com (Canada).

7-3

Customer Assistance for Text

Telephone (TTY) Users

To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or

speech-impaired and who use the Text Telephones

(TTYs), GMC has TTY equipment available at its

Customer Assistance Center. Any TTY user can

communicate with GMC by dialing: 1-800-GMC-8583

(462-8583). (TTY users in Canada can dial

1-800-263-3830.)

Customer Assistance Offices

GMC encourages customers to call the toll-free number

for assistance. If a U.S. customer wishes to write to

GMC, the letter should be addressed to GMC’s

Customer Assistance Center.

United States

GMC Customer Assistance Center

P.O. Box 33172

Detroit, MI 48232-5172

1-800-GMC-8782 (462-8782)

1-800-GMC-8583 (462-8583)

(For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))

Roadside Assistance: 1-800-GMC-8782 (462-8782)

Fax Number: 313-381-0022

From Puerto Rico

1-800-496-9992 (English)

1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)

Fax Number: 313-381-0022

U.S. Virgin Islands:

1-800-496-9994

Fax Number: 313-381-0022

Canada

General Motors of Canada Limited

Customer Communication Centre, 163-005

1908 Colonel Sam Drive

Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

1-800-263-3777 (English)

1-800-263-7854 (French)

1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))

Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800

7-4

All Overseas Locations

Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.

Mexico, Central America and Caribbean

Islands/Countries (Except Puerto Rico

and U.S. Virgin Islands)

General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.

Customer Assistance Center

Paseo de la Reforma # 2740

Col. Lomas de Bezares

C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.

01-800-508-0000

Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800

GM Mobility Reimbursement

Program

This program, available to qualiﬁed applicants, can

reimburse you up to $1,000 toward eligible aftermarket

driver’s or passenger’s adaptive equipment you may

require for your vehicle, such as hand controls and

wheelchair/scooter lifts.

The offer is available for a limited period of time from

the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more details,

or to determine your vehicle’s eligibility, visit

gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility Assistance

Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users,

call 1-800-833-9935.

GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program.

Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details.

TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.

7-5

Roadside Assistance Program

As the owner of a new GMC vehicle, you are

automatically enrolled in the GMC Roadside Assistance

program. This value-added service is intended to

provide you with peace of mind as you drive in the

city or travel the open road. Call 1-800-GMC-8782

(1-800-462-8782) to speak with a GMC Road Assistance

representative 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.

We will provide the following services during the

Bumper-to-Bumper warranty period, at no expense

to you:

• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel ($5

maximum) for the customer to get to the nearest

service station.

• Lock-out Service (identiﬁcation required):

Replacement keys or locksmith service will

be covered at no charge if you are unable to gain

entry into your vehicle. Delivery of the replacement

key will be covered within 10 miles.

• Emergency Tow: Tow to the nearest dealership for

warranty service or in the event of a

vehicle-disabling accident. Assistance provided

when the vehicle is mired in sand, mud, or snow.

• Flat Tire Change: Installation of a spare tire will be

covered at no charge. The customer is responsible

for the repair or replacement of the tire if not

covered by a warrantable failure.

• Jump Start: No-start occurrences which require a

battery jump start will be covered at no charge.

• Dealer Locator Service

• Trip Routing: Your Roadside Assistance

Representative can provide you with speciﬁc

information regarding this feature.

• Trip Interruption Expense Beneﬁts: Your

Roadside Assistance Representative can provide

you with speciﬁc information regarding this feature.

In many instances, mechanical failures are covered

under GMC’s Bumper-to-Bumper warranty. However,

when other services are utilized, our Roadside

Assistance Representatives will explain any payment

obligations you might incur.

For prompt and efficient assistance when calling, please

provide the following to the Roadside Assistance

Representative:

• Your name, home address, and home telephone

number.

• Telephone number of your location.

• Location of the vehicle.

• Model, year, color, and license plate number of

the vehicle.

7-6

• Mileage, Vehicle Identiﬁcation Number, (VIN) and

delivery date of the vehicle.

• Description of the problem.

While we hope you never have the occasion to use our

service, it is added security while traveling for you

and your family. Remember, we are only a phone call

away. GMC Roadside Assistance: 1-800-462-8782,

text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-888-889-2438.

GMC reserves the right to limit services or

reimbursement to an owner or driver when, in GMC’s

judgement, the claims become excessive in frequency or

type of occurrence.

Roadside Assistance is not part of or included in the

coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

GMC reserves the right to make any changes or

discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at any

time without notiﬁcation.

Canadian Roadside Assistance

Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive

roadside assistance program accessible from anywhere

in Canada or the United States. Please refer to the

Warranty and Owner Assistance Information book.

Courtesy Transportation

GMC has always exempliﬁed quality and value in its

offering of motor vehicles. To enhance your ownership

experience, we and our participating dealers are

proud to offer Courtesy Transportation, a customer

support program for new vehicles.

The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to retail

purchase/lease customers in conjunction with the

Bumper-to-Bumper coverage provided by the New

Vehicle Limited Warranty. Several transportation options

are available when warranty repairs are required. This will

reduce your inconvenience during warranty repairs.

Scheduling Service Appointments

When your vehicle requires warranty service, you should

contact your dealer and request an appointment.

By scheduling a service appointment and advising your

service consultant of your transportation needs, your

dealer can help minimize your inconvenience.

If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service

department immediately, keep driving it until it can be

scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem

is safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership,

let them know this, and ask for instructions.

If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle off

for service, you are urged to do so as early in the work

day as possible to allow for the same day repair.

7-7

Transportation Options

Warranty service can generally be completed while you

wait. However, if you are unable to wait, GMC helps

minimize your inconvenience by providing several

transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,

your dealer can offer you one of the following:

Shuttle Service

Participating dealers can provide you with shuttle

service to get you to your destination with minimal

interruption of your daily schedule. This includes a

one way or round trip shuttle ride to a destination

up to 10 miles from the dealership.

Public Transportation or Fuel

Reimbursement

If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,

reimbursement of up to a ﬁve day maximum may be

available for the use of public transportation such as a

taxi or bus. In addition, should you arrange transportation

through a friend or relative, reimbursement for

reasonable fuel expenses of up to a ﬁve day maximum

may be available. Claim amounts should reﬂect actual

costs and be supported by original receipts.

Courtesy Rental Vehicle

Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy

rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle

that you obtain if your vehicle is kept for a warranty

repair. Reimbursement will be limited to a maximum of

$30.00 a day and must be supported by receipts.

This requires that you sign and complete a rental

agreement and meet state, local and rental vehicle

provider requirements. Requirements vary and

may include minimum age requirements, insurance

coverage, credit card, etc. You are responsible for

fuel usage charges and may also be responsible for

taxes, levies, usage fees, excessive mileage or

rental usage beyond the completion of the repair.

Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle

as a courtesy rental.

7-8

Additional Program Information

Courtesy Transportation is available during the

Bumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period,

but it is not part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

A separate booklet entitled Warranty and Owner

Assistance Information furnished with each new vehicle

provides detailed warranty coverage information.

Courtesy Transportation is available only at participating

dealers and all program options, such as shuttle

service, may not be available at every dealer. Please

contact your dealer for speciﬁc information about

availability. All Courtesy Transportation arrangements

will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel.

Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs during

the Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General

Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty,

alternative transportation may be available under the

Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult

your dealer for details.

General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,

change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at

any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility

pursuant to the terms and conditions described

herein at its sole discretion.

Vehicle Data Collection and

Event Data Recorders

Your vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles, has a

number of sophisticated computer systems that

monitor and control several aspects of the vehicle’s

performance. Your vehicle uses on-board vehicle

computers to monitor emission control components

to optimize fuel economy, to monitor conditions for airbag

deployment and, if so equipped, to provide anti-lock

braking and to help the driver control the vehicle in

difficult driving situations. Some information may be

stored during regular operations to facilitate repair of

detected malfunctions; other information is stored only

in a crash event by computer systems, such as those

commonly called event data recorders (EDR).

In a crash event, computer systems, such as the

Airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) in your

vehicle may record information about the condition of

the vehicle and how it was operated, such as data related

to engine speed, brake application, throttle position,

vehicle speed, safety belt usage, airbag readiness,

airbag performance, and the severity of a collision.

This information has been used to improve vehicle

crash performance and may be used to improve crash

performance of future vehicles and driving safety.

Unlike the data recorders on many airplanes, these

on-board systems do not record sounds, such as

conversation of vehicle occupants.

7-9

To read this information, special equipment is needed

and access to the vehicle or the device that stores

the data is required. GM will not access information

about a crash event or share it with others other than:

• with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the

vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee,

• in response to an official request of police or similar

government office,

• as part of GM’s defense of litigation through the

discovery process, or

• as required by law.

In addition, once GM collects or receives data, GM may:

• use the data for GM research needs,

• make it available for research where appropriate

conﬁdentiality is to be maintained and need is

shown, or

• share summary data which is not tied to a speciﬁc

vehicle with non-GM organizations for research

purposes.

Others, such as law enforcement, may have access to

the special equipment that can read the information

if they have access to the vehicle or the device

that stores the data.

If your vehicle is equipped with OnStar

, please check

the OnStar

subscription service agreement or manual

for information on its operations and data collection.

Reporting Safety Defects

Reporting Safety Defects to the

United States Government

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could

cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you

should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic

Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifying

General Motors.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an

investigation, and if it ﬁnds that a safety defect exists in

a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy

campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved

in individual problems between you, your dealer, or

General Motors.

To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety

Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in

the Washington, D.C. area) or write to:

NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation

Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain other information about motor

vehicle safety from the hotline.

7-10

Reporting Safety Defects to the

Canadian Government

If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle

has a safety defect, you should immediately notify

Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General

Motors of Canada Limited. You may write to:

Transport Canada

330 Sparks Street

Tower C

Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5

Reporting Safety Defects to

General Motors

In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in

a situation like this, we certainly hope you’ll notify us.

Please call us at 1-800-GMC-8782 (1-800-462-8782),

or write:

GMC Customer Assistance Center

P.O. Box 33172

Detroit, MI 48232-5172

In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (English)

or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:

General Motors of Canada Limited

Customer Communication Centre, 163-005

1908 Colonel Sam Drive

Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Service Publications Ordering

Information

Service Manuals

Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair

information on engines, transmission, axle suspension,

brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.

Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer

Case Unit Repair Manual

This manual provides information on unit repair service

procedures, adjustments, and speciﬁcations for GM

transmissions, transaxles, and transfer cases.

Service Bulletins

Service Bulletins give technical service information

needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars

and trucks. Each bulletin contains instructions to

assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle.

In Canada, information pertaining to Product Service

Bulletins can be obtained by contacting your General

Motors dealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE

(1-800-463-7483).

7-11

Owner’s Information

Owner publications are written speciﬁcally for owners

and intended to provide basic operational information

about the vehicle. The owner’s manual will include

the Maintenance Schedule for all models.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual, and

Warranty Booklet.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00

Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00

Current and Past Model Order Forms

Service Publications are available for current and

past model GM vehicles. To request an order form,

please specify year and model name of the vehicle.

ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123

Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM

Eastern Time

For Credit Card Orders Only

(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on the

World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com

Or you can write to:

Helm, Incorporated

P. O. Box 07130

Detroit, MI 48207

Prices are subject to change without notice and without

incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.

Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are

quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make

checks payable in U.S. funds.

7-12

Accessory Power Outlets ................................. 3-18

Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped

Vehicle ....................................................... 1-75

Additives, Fuel ................................................. 5-6

Add-On Electrical Equipment ............................ 5-98

Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ................................. 5-18

Air Conditioning .............................................. 3-19

Airbag

Off Light ..................................................... 3-26

Readiness Light .......................................... 3-25

Airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) ...... 7-9

Airbag System ................................................ 1-61

Adding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ............................ 1-75

Airbag Off Switch ........................................ 1-71

How Does an Airbag Restrain? ...................... 1-68

Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......... 1-74

What Makes an Airbag Inﬂate? ...................... 1-68

What Will You See After an

Airbag Inﬂates? ........................................ 1-69

When Should an Airbag Inﬂate? .................... 1-67

Where Are the Airbags? ............................... 1-64

AM-FM Radio ................................................. 3-45

Antenna, Fixed Mast ....................................... 3-75

Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio

Antenna System .......................................... 3-75

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ........................... 4-7

Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light .............. 3-29

Appearance Care ............................................ 5-89

Aluminum Wheels ........................................ 5-95

Care of Safety Belts .................................... 5-92

Chemical Paint Spotting ............................... 5-96

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .................... 5-93

Fabric/Carpet .............................................. 5-89

Finish Care ................................................. 5-93

Finish Damage ............................................ 5-96

Glass Surfaces ............................................ 5-92

Instrument Panel ......................................... 5-92

Interior Plastic Components ........................... 5-92

Leather ...................................................... 5-91

Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 5-96

Tires .......................................................... 5-95

Underbody Maintenance ............................... 5-96

Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ................ 5-97

Vinyl .......................................................... 5-91

Washing Your Vehicle ................................... 5-93

Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-92

Windshield and Wiper Blades ........................ 5-94

Ashtrays ........................................................ 3-19

Assist Handles ............................................... 2-43

Audio System(s) ............................................. 3-44

AM-FM Radio ............................................. 3-45

Care of Your CD Player ............................... 3-75

Care of Your CDs ........................................ 3-74

Chime Level Adjustment ............................... 3-75

Fixed Mast Antenna ..................................... 3-75

Radio with CD ............................................ 3-48

Radio with Six-Disc CD ................................ 3-63

Setting the Time for Radios with Radio

Data Systems (RDS) ................................ 3-45

Setting the Time for Radios without Radio

Data Systems (RDS) ................................ 3-44

Theft-Deterrent Feature ................................ 3-74

Understanding Radio Reception ..................... 3-74

XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ............ 3-75

Automatic Headlamp System ............................ 3-15

Automatic Transmission

Fluid .......................................................... 5-19

Operation ................................................... 2-21

Battery .......................................................... 5-40

Run-Down Protection ................................... 3-18

Battery Warning Light ...................................... 3-27

Before Leaving on a Long Trip ......................... 4-34

Brake

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ........................ 4-7

Emergencies ................................................ 4-8

Parking ...................................................... 2-29

System Warning Light .................................. 3-28

Brakes .......................................................... 5-37

Braking ........................................................... 4-6

Braking in Emergencies ..................................... 4-8

Break-In, New Vehicle ..................................... 2-16

Bulb Replacement ........................................... 5-47

Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) ........ 5-50

Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and

Daytime Running Lamps ........................... 5-49

Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-47

Headlamps ................................................. 5-47

Replacement Bulbs ...................................... 5-51

Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and

Back-up Lamps ........................................ 5-50

Buying New Tires ........................................... 5-64

California Fuel .................................................. 5-6

Canadian Owners ................................................ ii

Capacities and Speciﬁcations .......................... 5-103

Carbon Monoxide ................... 2-10, 2-34, 4-38, 4-56

Care of

Safety Belts ................................................ 5-92

Your CD Player ........................................... 3-75

Your CDs ................................................... 3-74

Center Front Passenger Position,

Safety Belts ................................................ 1-25

Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) ........... 5-50

Chains, Tire ................................................... 5-68

Check

Engine Light ............................................... 3-30

Checking Things Under the Hood ...................... 5-10

Chemical Paint Spotting ................................... 5-96

Child Restraints

Child Restraint Systems ............................... 1-37

Infants and Young Children ........................... 1-34

Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for

Children (LATCH System) .......................... 1-46

Older Children ............................................. 1-32

Securing a Child Restraint Designed for

the LATCH System ........................... 1-48, 1-49

Securing a Child Restraint in a

Rear Seat Position ................................... 1-52

Securing a Child Restraint in the

Center Front Seat Position ........................ 1-54

Child Restraints (cont.)

Securing a Child Restraint in the

Right Front Seat Position .................. 1-54, 1-57

Top Strap ................................................... 1-42

Top Strap Anchor Location ............................ 1-43

Where to Put the Restraint ........................... 1-40

Chime Level Adjustment .................................. 3-75

Cigarette Lighter ............................................. 3-19

Cleaning

Aluminum Wheels ........................................ 5-95

Exterior Lamps/Lenses ................................. 5-93

Fabric/Carpet .............................................. 5-89

Finish Care ................................................. 5-93

Glass Surfaces ............................................ 5-92

Instrument Panel ......................................... 5-92

Interior Plastic Components ........................... 5-92

Leather ...................................................... 5-91

Tires .......................................................... 5-95

Underbody Maintenance ............................... 5-96

Vinyl .......................................................... 5-91

Washing Your Vehicle ................................... 5-93

Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-92

Windshield and Wiper Blades ........................ 5-94

Climate Control System ................................... 3-19

Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 3-21

Clutch, Hydraulic ............................................. 5-24

Comfort Guides, Rear Safety Belt ..................... 1-29

Content Theft-Deterrent .................................... 2-14

Control of a Vehicle .......................................... 4-6

Coolant

Engine Temperature Gage ............................ 3-30

Heater, Engine ............................................ 2-20

Cooling System .............................................. 5-30

Cruise Control Lever ....................................... 3-11

Cruise Control Light ........................................ 3-35

Cupholder(s) .................................................. 2-42

Customer Assistance Information

Courtesy Transportation .................................. 7-7

Customer Assistance for Text

Telephone (TTY) Users ............................... 7-4

Customer Assistance Offices ........................... 7-4

Customer Satisfaction Procedure ..................... 7-2

GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ............... 7-5

Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors ...... 7-11

Reporting Safety Defects to the

Canadian Government .............................. 7-11

Reporting Safety Defects to the

United States Government ......................... 7-10

Roadside Assistance Program ......................... 7-6

Service Publications Ordering Information ........ 7-11

Daytime Running Lamps .................................. 3-15

Daytime Running Lamps Indicator Light ............. 3-36

Defensive Driving ............................................. 4-2

Doing Your Own Service Work ........................... 5-4

Dome Lamp ................................................... 3-17

Dome Lamp Override ...................................... 3-17

Door

Locks .......................................................... 2-7

Power Door Locks ......................................... 2-8

Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............... 2-8

Rear Door Security Locks ............................... 2-9

Rear Doors ................................................. 2-10

Driver

Position, Safety Belt ..................................... 1-16

Driver Information Center (DIC) ......................... 3-37

DIC Controls and Displays ............................ 3-37

DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-41

Driving

At Night ..................................................... 4-28

City ........................................................... 4-32

Defensive ..................................................... 4-2

Drunken ....................................................... 4-3

Freeway ..................................................... 4-33

Hill and Mountain Roads .............................. 4-36

Driving (cont.)

In Rain and on Wet Roads ........................... 4-29

Recovery Hooks .......................................... 4-43

Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out ................. 4-42

Winter ........................................................ 4-38

Electrical System

Add-On Equipment ...................................... 5-98

Engine Compartment Fuse Block ................. 5-100

Fuses and Circuit Breakers ........................... 5-99

Power Windows and Other Power Options ...... 5-99

Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................... 5-99

Engine

Air Cleaner/Filter ......................................... 5-18

Battery ....................................................... 5-40

Check and Service Engine Soon Light ............ 3-30

Coolant ...................................................... 5-25

Coolant Heater ............................................ 2-20

Coolant Temperature Gage ........................... 3-30

Engine Compartment Overview ...................... 5-12

Exhaust ..................................................... 2-34

Fan Noise .................................................. 5-34

Oil ............................................................. 5-13

Overheating ................................................ 5-28

Starting ...................................................... 2-18

Event Data Recorders (EDR) ............................. 7-9

Exit Lighting ................................................... 3-18

Extender, Safety Belt ....................................... 1-31

Exterior Cargo Lamps ...................................... 3-17

Exterior Lamps ............................................... 3-14

Filter

Engine Air Cleaner ...................................... 5-18

Finish Damage ............................................... 5-96

Fixed Mast Antenna ........................................ 3-75

Flash-to-Pass ................................................... 3-9

Flat Tire ........................................................ 5-69

Flat Tire, Changing ......................................... 5-70

Flat Tire, Storing ............................................. 5-84

Fluid

Automatic Transmission ................................ 5-19

Manual Transmission .................................... 5-22

Power Steering ........................................... 5-35

Windshield Washer ...................................... 5-36

Fog Lamps .................................................... 3-16

Four-Wheel Drive .................................... 2-26, 5-45

Front Armrest Storage Area .............................. 2-42

Front Axle ...................................................... 5-46

Fuel ............................................................... 5-5

Additives ...................................................... 5-6

California Fuel .............................................. 5-6

Filling a Portable Fuel Container .................... 5-10

Filling Your Tank ........................................... 5-8

Fuels in Foreign Countries .............................. 5-7

Gage ......................................................... 3-36

Gasoline Octane ........................................... 5-5

Gasoline Speciﬁcations .................................. 5-5

Fuses

Engine Compartment Fuse Block ................. 5-100

Fuses and Circuit Breakers ........................... 5-99

Windshield Wiper ......................................... 5-99

Gage

Engine Coolant Temperature ......................... 3-30

Fuel .......................................................... 3-36

Speedometer .............................................. 3-24

Tachometer ................................................. 3-24

Gasoline

Octane ........................................................ 5-5

Speciﬁcations ............................................... 5-5

Glove Box ..................................................... 2-42

GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .................. 7-5

Hazard Warning Flashers ................................... 3-6

Head Restraints ............................................... 1-7

Headlamps .................................................... 5-47

Automatic Headlamp System ......................... 3-15

Bulb Replacement ....................................... 5-47

Daytime Running Lamps ............................... 3-15

Flash-to-Pass ............................................... 3-9

Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and

Daytime Running Lamps ........................... 5-49

Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-47

High/Low Beam Changer ................................ 3-9

On Reminder .............................................. 3-15

Heated Seats ................................................... 1-5

Heater ........................................................... 3-19

Highbeam On Light ......................................... 3-35

Highway Hypnosis ........................................... 4-35

Hill and Mountain Roads .................................. 4-36

Hood

Checking Things Under ................................ 5-10

Release ..................................................... 5-11

Horn ............................................................... 3-6

How to Use This Manual ...................................... ii

How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................... 1-16

Hydraulic Clutch ............................................. 5-24

Ignition Positions ............................................. 2-17

Infants and Young Children, Restraints ............... 1-34

Inﬂation -- Tire Pressure .................................. 5-60

Instrument Panel

Brightness .................................................. 3-17

Cluster ....................................................... 3-23

Overview ..................................................... 3-4

Interior Lamps ................................................ 3-17

Jump Starting ................................................. 5-41

Keyless Entry System ....................................... 2-4

Keys ............................................................... 2-2

Labelling, Tire Sidewall .................................... 5-55

Lamps

Battery Run-Down Protection ......................... 3-18

Dome ........................................................ 3-17

Dome Lamp Override ................................... 3-17

Lamps (cont.)

Exterior ...................................................... 3-14

Exterior Cargo ............................................. 3-17

Fog ........................................................... 3-16

Interior ....................................................... 3-17

LATCH System

Child Restraints ........................................... 1-46

Securing a Child Restraint Designed

for the LATCH System ...................... 1-48, 1-49

Latches, Seatback ............................................ 1-8

Light

Airbag Off .................................................. 3-26

Airbag Readiness ........................................ 3-25

Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ................... 3-29

Battery Warning .......................................... 3-27

Brake System Warning ................................. 3-28

Cruise Control ............................................. 3-35

Daytime Running Lamps Indicator .................. 3-36

Highbeam On ............................................. 3-35

Malfunction Indicator .................................... 3-30

Oil Pressure ............................................... 3-34

Safety Belt Reminder ................................... 3-24

Security ..................................................... 3-35

Up-Shift ..................................................... 3-28

Lighting

Exit ........................................................... 3-18

Lockout Protection .......................................... 2-10

Locks

Door ........................................................... 2-7

Lockout Protection ....................................... 2-10

Power Door .................................................. 2-8

Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............... 2-8

Rear Door Security Locks ............................... 2-9

Loss of Control ............................................... 4-14

Lumbar

Manual Controls ............................................ 1-5

Maintenance Schedule

Additional Required Services ........................... 6-6

At Each Fuel Fill ........................................... 6-9

At Least Once a Month .................................. 6-9

At Least Once a Year .................................. 6-10

Introduction .................................................. 6-2

Maintenance Footnotes .................................. 6-7

Maintenance Record .................................... 6-16

Maintenance Requirements ............................. 6-2

Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ......... 6-15

Owner Checks and Services ........................... 6-9

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ............. 6-13

Scheduled Maintenance ................................. 6-4

Using Your ................................................... 6-2

Your Vehicle and the Environment ................... 6-2

Malfunction Indicator Light ................................ 3-30

Manual Lumbar Controls .................................... 1-5

Manual Seats ................................................... 1-3

Manual Transmission

Fluid .......................................................... 5-22

Operation ................................................... 2-24

Manual Windows ............................................ 2-12

Message

DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-41

Mirrors

Automatic Dimming Rearview with Compass

and Temperature Display ........................... 2-37

Manual Rearview Mirror ................................ 2-36

Manual Rearview Mirror with OnStar

............. 2-36

Outside Convex Mirror ................................. 2-40

Outside Manual Mirrors ................................ 2-39

Outside Power Mirrors .................................. 2-39

MyGMLink.com ................................................ 7-3

New Vehicle Break-In ...................................... 2-16

Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ............ 6-15

Odometer ...................................................... 3-24

Odometer, Trip ............................................... 3-24

Off-Road Recovery .......................................... 4-12

Oil

Engine ....................................................... 5-13

Pressure Light ............................................. 3-34

Older Children, Restraints ................................ 1-32

Online Owner Center ........................................ 7-3

OnStar

System ............................................. 2-40

Operating Your All-Wheel-Drive Vehicle

Off Paved Roads ......................................... 4-15

Other Warning Devices ...................................... 3-6

Outlet Adjustment ............................................ 3-21

Outside

Convex Mirror ............................................. 2-40

Manual Mirrors ............................................ 2-39

Power Mirrors ............................................. 2-39

Owner Checks and Services .............................. 6-9

Owners, Canadian ............................................... ii

Park (P)

Shifting Into ................................................ 2-30

Shifting Out of ............................................ 2-32

Parking

Brake ........................................................ 2-29

Over Things That Burn ................................. 2-33

Parking Your Vehicle ....................................... 2-33

Passing ......................................................... 4-12

Passlock

...................................................... 2-16

Power

Accessory Outlets ........................................ 3-18

Door Locks .................................................. 2-8

Electrical System ......................................... 5-99

Retained Accessory (RAP) ............................ 2-18

Seat ............................................................ 1-4

Steering Fluid ............................................. 5-35

Windows .................................................... 2-13

Pretensioners, Safety Belt ................................ 1-31

Programmable Automatic Door Locks .................. 2-8

Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......... 1-15

Radiator Pressure Cap .................................... 5-28

Radios .......................................................... 3-44

AM-FM Radio ............................................. 3-45

Care of Your CD Player ............................... 3-75

Care of Your CDs ........................................ 3-74

Radio with CD ............................................ 3-48

Radio with Six-Disc CD ................................ 3-63

Setting the Time for Radios with Radio

Data Systems (RDS) ................................ 3-45

Setting the Time for Radios without Radio

Data Systems (RDS) ................................ 3-44

Theft-Deterrent ............................................ 3-74

Understanding Reception .............................. 3-74

Rear Axle ...................................................... 5-44

Rear Door Security Locks .................................. 2-9

Rear Doors .................................................... 2-10

Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ...................... 1-29

Rear Seat Operation ................................. 1-8, 1-10

Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts .................. 1-26

Rear Storage Area .......................................... 2-43

Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming with

Compass and Temperature Display ................ 2-37

Rearview Mirror with OnStar

........................... 2-36

Rearview Mirrors ............................................. 2-36

Reclining Seatbacks .......................................... 1-6

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ................. 6-13

Recovery Hooks ............................................. 4-43

Recreational Vehicle Towing ............................. 4-50

Remote Keyless Entry System ............................ 2-4

Remote Keyless Entry System, Operation ............ 2-5

Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the

Spare Tire .................................................. 5-74

Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................... 5-71

Replacement Bulbs ......................................... 5-51

Reporting Safety Defects

Canadian Government .................................. 7-11

General Motors ........................................... 7-11

United States Government ............................ 7-10

Restraint System Check

Checking Your Restraint Systems ................... 1-75

Replacing Restraint System Parts

After a Crash .......................................... 1-76

Restraint Systems

Checking .................................................... 1-75

Replacing Parts ........................................... 1-76

Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................... 2-18

Right Front Passenger Position, Safety Belts ...... 1-24

Roadside

Assistance Program ....................................... 7-6

Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .................... 4-42

Running Your Engine While You Are Parked ....... 2-34

Safety Belt

Pretensioners .............................................. 1-31

Reminder Light ............................................ 3-24

Safety Belts

Care of ...................................................... 5-92

Center Front Passenger Position .................... 1-25

Driver Position ............................................ 1-16

How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................ 1-16

Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ..... 1-15

Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for

Children and Small Adults ......................... 1-29

Rear Seat Passengers ................................. 1-26

Right Front Passenger Position ...................... 1-24

Safety Belts (cont.)

Safety Belt Extender .................................... 1-31

Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ................. 1-24

Safety Belts Are for Everyone ....................... 1-11

Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ........................ 1-23

Safety Warnings and Symbols .............................. iii

Scheduled Maintenance ..................................... 6-4

Seatback Latches ............................................. 1-8

Seats

Head Restraints ............................................ 1-7

Heated Seats ............................................... 1-5

Manual ........................................................ 1-3

Manual Lumbar ............................................. 1-5

Power Seats ................................................. 1-4

Rear Seat Operation .............................. 1-8, 1-10

Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 1-6

Seatback Latches .......................................... 1-8

Secondary Latch System ................................. 5-81

Securing a Child Restraint

Center Front Seat Position ............................ 1-54

Designed for the LATCH System ........... 1-48, 1-49

Rear Seat Position ...................................... 1-52

Right Front Seat Position ...................... 1-54, 1-57

Security Light ................................................. 3-35

Service ........................................................... 5-3

Adding Equipment to the Outside of

Your Vehicle .............................................. 5-5

Doing Your Own Work ................................... 5-4

Engine Soon Light ....................................... 3-30

Publications Ordering Information ................... 7-11

Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .............. 1-74

Setting the Time

Radios with Radio Data Systems (RDS) ............ 3-45

Radios without Radio Data Systems (RDS) ........ 3-44

Sheet Metal Damage ....................................... 5-96

Shifting Into Park (P) ....................................... 2-30

Shifting Out of Park (P) ................................... 2-32

Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ........................... 1-23

Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .......................... 3-8

Sliding Rear Windows ..................................... 2-14

Spare Tire ..................................................... 5-88

Installing .................................................... 5-74

Removing ................................................... 5-71

Storing ....................................................... 5-84

Speciﬁcations, Capacities ............................... 5-103

Speedometer .................................................. 3-24

Starting Your Engine ....................................... 2-18

Steering ........................................................ 4-10

Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel ................................. 3-7

Storage Areas

Cupholder(s) ............................................... 2-42

Front Armrest Storage Area ........................... 2-42

Glove Box .................................................. 2-42

Rear Storage Area ....................................... 2-43

Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ...................... 4-42

Sun Visors ..................................................... 2-14

Tachometer .................................................... 3-24

Tailgate ......................................................... 2-10

Taillamps

Turn Signal, Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps ...... 5-50

Theft-Deterrent, Radio ..................................... 3-74

Theft-Deterrent Systems ................................... 2-14

Content Theft-Deterrent ................................ 2-14

Passlock

................................................... 2-16

Tilt Wheel ........................................................ 3-7

Tires ............................................................. 5-54

Aluminum Wheels, Cleaning .......................... 5-95

Buying New Tires ........................................ 5-64

Chains ....................................................... 5-68

Changing a Flat Tire .................................... 5-70

Cleaning .................................................... 5-95

If a Tire Goes Flat ....................................... 5-69

Tires (cont.)

Inﬂation -- Tire Pressure ............................... 5-60

Inspection and Rotation ................................ 5-62

Installing the Spare Tire ................................ 5-74

Removing the Flat Tire ................................. 5-74

Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ............... 5-71

Secondary Latch System .............................. 5-81

Spare Tire .................................................. 5-88

Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ............ 5-84

Tire Sidewall Labelling .................................. 5-55

Tire Terminology and Deﬁnitions .................... 5-58

Uniform Tire Quality Grading ......................... 5-65

Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ................. 5-66

Wheel Replacement ..................................... 5-66

When It Is Time for New Tires ...................... 5-63

Top Strap ...................................................... 1-42

Top Strap Anchor Location ............................... 1-43

Towing

Recreational Vehicle ..................................... 4-50

Towing a Trailer .......................................... 4-56

Your Vehicle ............................................... 4-50

Traction

Control System (TCS) .................................... 4-9

Trailer

Connections ................................................ 4-56

Recommendations ....................................... 4-56

Transmission

Fluid, Automatic ........................................... 5-19

Fluid, Manual .............................................. 5-22

Up-Shift Light .............................................. 3-28

Transmission Operation, Automatic .................... 2-21

Transmission Operation, Manual ........................ 2-24

Trip Odometer ................................................ 3-24

Turn and Lane-Change Signals .......................... 3-8

Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ........................... 3-7

Understanding Radio Reception ........................ 3-74

Uniform Tire Quality Grading ............................ 5-65

Up-Shift Light ................................................. 3-28

Vehicle

Control ........................................................ 4-6

Damage Warnings ........................................... iv

Parking Your ............................................... 2-33

Symbols ......................................................... iv

Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data

Recorders .................................................... 7-9

Vehicle Identiﬁcation

Number (VIN) ............................................. 5-98

Service Parts Identiﬁcation Label ................... 5-98

Ventilation Adjustment ...................................... 3-21

Visors ........................................................... 2-14

Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators ................ 3-22

Warnings

DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-41

Hazard Warning Flashers ............................... 3-6

Other Warning Devices .................................. 3-6

Safety and Symbols ......................................... iii

Vehicle Damage .............................................. iv

Wheels

Alignment and Tire Balance .......................... 5-66

Replacement ............................................... 5-66

Where to Put the Restraint ............................... 1-40

Windows ....................................................... 2-12

Manual ...................................................... 2-12

Power ........................................................ 2-13

Sliding Rear ................................................ 2-14

Windshield

Wiper Blades, Cleaning ................................ 5-94

Windshield Washer ......................................... 3-10

Fluid .......................................................... 5-36

Windshield Wiper

Blade Replacement ...................................... 5-52

Fuses ........................................................ 5-99

Windshield Wipers ....................................... 3-10

Winter Driving ................................................ 4-38

XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ................ 3-75

Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................... 6-2